US20090105230A1 - Anti-inflammatory medicaments - Google Patents

Anti-inflammatory medicaments Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20090105230A1
US20090105230A1 US11/450,842 US45084206A US2009105230A1 US 20090105230 A1 US20090105230 A1 US 20090105230A1 US 45084206 A US45084206 A US 45084206A US 2009105230 A1 US2009105230 A1 US 2009105230A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
group
phenyl
mmol
formula
reaction
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US11/450,842
Inventor
Daniel L. Flynn
Peter A. Petillo
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Individual
Original Assignee
Individual
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US10/886,329 external-priority patent/US7202257B2/en
Application filed by Individual filed Critical Individual
Priority to US11/450,842 priority Critical patent/US20090105230A1/en
Publication of US20090105230A1 publication Critical patent/US20090105230A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D239/00Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings
    • C07D239/02Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D239/24Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D239/28Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D239/32One oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atom
    • C07D239/42One nitrogen atom
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/06Antiasthmatics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/16Central respiratory analeptics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/06Antipsoriatics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/02Drugs for skeletal disorders for joint disorders, e.g. arthritis, arthrosis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/06Antigout agents, e.g. antihyperuricemic or uricosuric agents
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02Immunomodulators
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P7/00Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P7/00Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
    • A61P7/06Antianaemics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/08Vasodilators for multiple indications
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/10Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D295/00Heterocyclic compounds containing polymethylene-imine rings with at least five ring members, 3-azabicyclo [3.2.2] nonane, piperazine, morpholine or thiomorpholine rings, having only hydrogen atoms directly attached to the ring carbon atoms
    • C07D295/04Heterocyclic compounds containing polymethylene-imine rings with at least five ring members, 3-azabicyclo [3.2.2] nonane, piperazine, morpholine or thiomorpholine rings, having only hydrogen atoms directly attached to the ring carbon atoms with substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached to ring nitrogen atoms
    • C07D295/10Heterocyclic compounds containing polymethylene-imine rings with at least five ring members, 3-azabicyclo [3.2.2] nonane, piperazine, morpholine or thiomorpholine rings, having only hydrogen atoms directly attached to the ring carbon atoms with substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached to ring nitrogen atoms substituted by doubly bound oxygen or sulphur atoms
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/04Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D403/12Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D413/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D413/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings
    • C07D413/12Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D413/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D413/14Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing three or more hetero rings
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D417/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00
    • C07D417/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D417/12Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D417/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00
    • C07D417/14Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing three or more hetero rings

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to novel compounds and methods of using those compounds to treat anti-inflammatory diseases.
  • inhibitors are identified in WO Publication No. 2002/034727.
  • This class of inhibitors binds to the ATP active site while also binding in a mode that induces movement of the kinase catalytic loop.
  • Pargellis et al. Nature Structural Biology , Vol. 9, p. 268 (2002) reported inhibitors p38 alpha-kinase also disclosed in WO Publication No. 00/43384 and Regan et al., J. Medicinal Chemistry , Vol. 45, pp. 2994-3008 (2002).
  • This class of inhibitors also interacts with the kinase at the ATP active site involving a concomitant movement of the kinase activation loop.
  • kinases utilize activation loops and kinase domain regulatory pockets to control their state of catalytic activity. This has been recently reviewed (see, e.g., M. Huse and J. Kuriyan, Cell (2002) 109:275).
  • the present invention is broadly concerned with new compounds for use in treating anti-inflammatory conditions and methods of treating such conditions.
  • inventive compounds have the formula
  • the compound has the structure of formula (I) except that:
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of 6-5 fused heteroaryls, 6-5 fused heterocyclyls, 5-6 fused heteroaryls, and 5-6 fused heterocyclyls, and even more preferably, R 1 is selected from the group consisting of
  • A is selected from the group consisting of aromatic, monocycloheterocyclic, and bicycloheterocyclic rings; and most preferably phenyl, naphthyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, thienyl, furyl, pyrrolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, oxaxolyl, isoxazolyl, imidazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, indolyl, indazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzotriazolyl, isoquinolyl, quinolyl, benzothiazolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothienyl, pyrazolylpyrimidinyl, imidazopyrimidinyl, purinyl, and
  • each W 1 is individually selected from the group consisting of —CH— and —N—.
  • a as described above is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, thienyl, furyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, thiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, oxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, imidazolyl, indolyl, indazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzotriazolyl, isoquinolyl, quinolyl, benzothiazolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothienyl, pyrazolylpyrimidinyl, imidazopyrimidinyl, purinyl, and
  • each W 1 is individually selected from the group consisting of —CH— and —N—.
  • Q groups Q-36 through Q-59 are set forth below.
  • Q is taken from Q-37, Q-39, Q-41, Q-42, Q-43, Q-44, Q-47, Q-48, Q-54, and Q-57; in a more preferred embodiment, Q is taken from Q-39, Q-41, Q-42, Q-43, Q-44, Q-47, Q-48, and Q-54.
  • the activation state of a kinase is determined by the interaction of switch control ligands and complemental switch control pockets.
  • One conformation of the kinase may result from the switch control ligand's interaction with a particular switch control pocket while another conformation may result from the ligand's interaction with a different switch control pocket.
  • interaction of the ligand with one pocket, such as the “on” pocket results in the kinase assuming an active conformation wherein the kinase is biologically active.
  • an inactive conformation (wherein the kinase is not biologically active) is assumed when the ligand interacts with another of the switch control pockets, such as the “off” pocket.
  • the switch control pocket can be selected from the group consisting of simple, composite and combined switch control pockets. Interaction between the switch control ligand and the switch control pockets is dynamic and therefore, the ligand is not always interacting with a switch control pocket. In some instances, the ligand is not in a switch control pocket (such as occurs when the protein is changing from an active conformation to an inactive conformation). In other instances, such as when the ligand is interacting with the environment surrounding the protein in order to determine with which switch control pocket to interact, the ligand is not in a switch control pocket. Interaction of the ligand with particular switch control pockets is controlled in part by the charge status of the amino acid residues of the switch control ligand.
  • the switch control ligand When the ligand is in a neutral charge state, it interacts with one of the switch control pockets and when it is in a charged state, it interacts with the other of the switch control pockets.
  • the switch control ligand may have a plurality of OH groups and be in a neutral charge state. This neutral charge state results in a ligand that is more likely to interact with one of the switch control pockets through hydrogen boding between the OH groups and selected residues of the pocket, thereby resulting in whichever protein conformation results from that interaction.
  • the conformation of the protein determines the activation state of the protein and can therefore play a role in protein-related diseases, processes, and conditions.
  • a metabolic process requires a biologically active protein but the protein's switch control ligand remains in the switch control pocket i.e. the “off” pocket) that results in a biologically inactive protein, that metabolic process cannot occur at a normal rate.
  • a disease is exacerbated by a biologically active protein and the protein's switch control ligand remains in the switch control pocket (i.e. the “on” pocket) that results in the biologically active protein conformation, the disease condition will be worsened.
  • selective modulation of the switch control pocket and switch control ligand by the selective administration of a molecule will play an important role in the treatment and control of protein-related diseases, processes, and conditions.
  • One aspect of the invention provides a method of modulating the activation state of a kinase, preferably p38 ⁇ -kinase and including both the consensus wild type sequence and disease polymorphs thereof.
  • the activation state is generally selected from an upregulated or downregulated state.
  • the method generally comprises the step of contacting the kinase with a molecule having the general formula (I). When such contact occurs, the molecule will bind to a particular switch control pocket and the switch control ligand will have a greater propensity to interact with the other of the switch control pockets (i.e., the unoccupied one) and a lesser propensity to interact with the occupied switch control pocket.
  • the protein will have a greater propensity to assume either an active or inactive conformation (and consequently be upregulated or downregulated), depending upon which of the switch control pockets is occupied by the molecule.
  • contacting the kinase with a molecule modulates that protein's activation state.
  • the molecule can act as an antagonist or an agonist of either switch control pocket.
  • the contact between the molecule and the kinase preferably occurs at a region of a switch control pocket of the kinase and more preferably in an interlobe oxyanion pocket of the kinase. In some instances, the contact between the molecule and the pocket also results in the alteration of the conformation of other adjacent sites and pockets, such as an ATP active site.
  • the region of the switch control pocket of the kinase comprises-an-amino acid residue sequence operable for binding to the Formula I molecule.
  • binding can occur between the molecule and a specific region of the switch control pocket with preferred regions including the ⁇ -C helix, the ⁇ -D helix, the catalytic loop, the activation loop, and the C-terminal residues or C-lobe residues (all residues located downstream (toward the C-end) from the Activation loop), the glycine rich loop, and combinations thereof.
  • one preferred binding sequence in this helix is the sequence IIHXKRXXREXXLLXXM, (SEQ ID NO. 2).
  • one preferred binding sequence in this loop is DIIHRD (SEQ ID NO. 3).
  • one preferred binding sequence in this loop is a sequence selected from the group consisting of DFGLARHTDD (SEQ ID NO.4), EMTGYVATRWYR (SEQ ID NO. 5), and combinations thereof.
  • one preferred binding sequence is WMHY (SEQ ID NO. 6).
  • one preferred binding sequence is YGSV (SEQ ID NO. 7).
  • molecules which interact with the switch control pocket that normally results in a biologically active protein conformation when interacting with the switch control ligand will be selected.
  • molecules which interact with the switch control pocket that normally results in a biologically inactive protein conformation when interacting with the switch control ligand will be selected.
  • the propensity of the protein to assume a desired conformation will be modulated by administration of the molecule.
  • the molecule will be administered to an individual undergoing treatment for a condition selected from the group consisting of human inflammation, rheumatoid arthritis, rheumatoid spondylitis, ostero-arthritis, asthma, gouty arthritis, sepsis, septic shock, endotoxic shock, Gram-negative sepsis, toxic shock syndrome, adult respiratory distress syndrome, stroke, reperfusion injury, neural trauma, neural ischemia, psoriasis, restenosis, chronic pulmonary inflammatory disease, bone resorptive diseases, graft-versus-host reaction, Chron's disease, ulcerative colitis, inflammatory bowel disease, pyresis, and combinations thereof.
  • a condition selected from the group consisting of human inflammation, rheumatoid arthritis, rheumatoid spondylitis, ostero-arthritis, asthma, gouty arthritis, sepsis, septic shock, endotoxic shock, Gram-negative sep
  • the molecules of the present invention will be administrable in any conventional form including oral, parenteral, inhalation, and subcutaneous. It is preferred for the administration to be in the oral form.
  • Preferred molecules include the preferred compounds of formula (I), as discussed above.
  • Another aspect of the present invention provides a method of treating an inflammatory condition of an individual comprising the step of administering a molecule having the general formula (I) to the individual.
  • Such conditions are often the result of an overproduction of the biologically active form of a protein, including kinases.
  • the administering step generally includes the step of causing said molecule to contact a kinase involved with the inflammatory process, preferably p38 ⁇ -kinase.
  • the contact preferably occurs in an interlobe oxyanion pocket of the kinase that includes an amino acid residue sequence operable for binding to the Formula I molecule.
  • Preferred binding regions of the interlobe oxyanion pocket include the ⁇ -C helix region, the ⁇ -D helix region, the catalytic loop, the activation loop, the C-terminal residues, the glycine rich loop residues, and combinations thereof.
  • the binding region is the ⁇ -C helix
  • one preferred binding sequence in this helix is the sequence IIHXKRXXREXXLLXXM, (SEQ ID NO. 2).
  • the binding region is the catalytic loop
  • one preferred binding sequence in this loop is DIIHRD (SEQ ID NO. 3).
  • one preferred binding sequence in this loop is a sequence selected from the group consisting of DFGLARHTDD (SEQ ID NO.4), EMTGYVATRWYR (SEQ ID NO. 5), and combinations thereof.
  • DFGLARHTDD SEQ ID NO.4
  • EMTGYVATRWYR SEQ ID NO. 5
  • Such a method permits treatment of the condition by virtue of the modulation of the activation state of a kinase by contacting the kinase with a molecule that associates with the switch control pocket that normally leads to a biologically active form of the kinase when interacting with the switch control ligand.
  • the ligand cannot easily interact with the switch control pocket associated with or occupied by the molecule, the ligand tends to interact with the switch control pocket leading to the biologically inactive form of the protein, with the attendant result of a decrease in the amount of biologically active protein.
  • the inflammatory condition is selected from the group consisting of human inflammation, rheumatoid arthritis, rheumatoid spondylitis, ostero-arthritis, asthma, gouty arthritis, sepsis, septic shock, endotoxic shock, Gram-negative sepsis, toxic shock syndrome, adult respiratory distress syndrome, stroke, reperfusion injury, neural trauma, neural ischemia, psoriasis, restenosis, chronic pulmonary inflammatory disease, bone resorptive diseases, graft-versus-host reaction, Chron's disease, ulcerative colitis, inflammatory bowel disease, pyresis, and combinations thereof.
  • the molecules may be administered in any conventional form, with any convention excipients or ingredients. However, it is preferred to administer the molecule in an oral dosage form.
  • Preferred molecules are again selected from the group consisting of the preferred formula (I) compounds discussed above.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic representation of a naturally occurring mammalian protein in accordance with the invention including “on” and “off” switch control pockets 102 and 104 , respectively, a transiently modifiable switch control ligand 106 , and an active ATP site 108 ;
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic representation of the protein of FIG. 1 , wherein the switch control ligand 106 is illustrated in a binding relationship with the off switch control pocket 104 , thereby causing the protein to assume a first biologically downregulated conformation;
  • FIG. 3 is a view similar to that of FIG. 1 , but illustrating the switch control ligand 106 in its charged-modified condition wherein the OH groups 110 of certain amino acid residues have been phosphorylated;
  • FIG. 4 is a view similar to that of FIG. 2 , but depicting the protein wherein the phosphorylated switch control ligand 106 is in a binding relationship with the on switch control pocket 102 , thereby causing the protein to assume a second biologically-active conformation different than the first conformation of FIG. 2 ;
  • FIG. 4 a is an enlarged schematic view illustrating a representative binding between the phosphorylated residues of the switch control ligand 106 , and complemental residues Z+ from the on switch control pocket 102 ;
  • FIG. 5 is a view similar to that of FIG. 1 , but illustrating in schematic form possible small molecule compounds 116 and 118 in a binding relationship with the off and on switch control pockets 104 and 102 , respectively;
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic view of the protein in a situation where a composite switch control pocket 120 is formed with portions of the switch control ligand 106 and the on switch control pocket 102 , and with a small molecule 122 in binding relationship with the composite pocket;
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic view of the protein in a situation where a combined switch control pocket 124 is formed with portions of the on switch control pocket 102 , the switch control ligand sequence 106 , and the active ATP site 108 , and with a small molecule 126 in binding relationship with the combined switch control pocket.
  • the present invention provides a way of rationally developing new small molecule modulators which interact with naturally occurring proteins (e.g., mammalian, and especially human proteins) in order to modulate the activity of the proteins.
  • Naturally occurring proteins e.g., mammalian, and especially human proteins
  • Novel-protein-small molecule adducts are also provided.
  • the invention preferably makes use of naturally occurring proteins having a conformational property whereby the proteins change their conformations in vivo with a corresponding change in protein activity.
  • a given enzyme protein in one conformation may be biologically upregulated, while in another conformation, the same protein may be biologically downregulated.
  • the invention preferably makes use of one mechanism of conformation change utilized by naturally occurring proteins, through the interaction of what are termed “switch control ligands” and “switch control pockets” within the protein.
  • switch control ligand means a region or domain within a naturally occurring protein and having one or more amino acid residues therein which are transiently modified in vivo between individual states by biochemical modification, typically phosphorylation, sulfation, acylation or oxidation.
  • switch control pocket means a plurality of contiguous or non-contiguous amino acid residues within a naturally occurring protein and comprising residues capable of binding in vivo with transiently modified residues of a switch control ligand in one of the individual states thereof in order to induce or restrict the conformation of the protein and thereby modulate the biological activity of the protein, and/or which is capable of binding with a non-naturally occurring switch control modulator molecule to induce or restrict a protein conformation and thereby modulate the biological activity of the protein.
  • a protein-modulator adduct in accordance with the invention comprises a naturally occurring protein having a switch control pocket with a non-naturally occurring molecule bound to the protein at the region of said switch control pocket, said molecule serving to at least partially regulate the biological activity of said protein by inducing or restricting the conformation of the protein.
  • the protein also has a corresponding switch control ligand, the ligand interacting in vivo with the pocket to regulate the conformation and biological activity of the protein such that the protein will assume a first conformation and a first biological activity upon the ligand-pocket interaction, and will assume a second, different conformation and biological activity in the absence of the ligand-pocket interaction.
  • FIG. 1 a protein 100 is illustrated in schematic form to include an “on” switch control pocket 102 , and “off” switch control pocket 104 , and a switch control ligand 106 .
  • the schematically depicted protein also includes an ATP active site 108 .
  • the ligand 106 has three amino acid residues with side chain OH groups 110 .
  • the off pocket 104 contains corresponding X residues 112 and the on pocket 102 has Z residues 114 .
  • the protein 100 will change its conformation depending upon the charge status of the OH groups 110 on ligand 106 , i.e., when the OH groups are unmodified, a neutral charge is presented, but when these groups are phosphorylated a negative charge is presented.
  • the functionality of the pockets 102 , 104 and ligand 106 can be understood from a consideration of FIGS. 2-4 .
  • the ligand 106 is shown operatively interacted with the off pocket 104 such that the OH groups 110 interact with the X residues 112 forming a part of the pocket 104 .
  • Such interaction is primarily by virtue of hydrogen bonding between the OH groups 110 and the residues 112 .
  • this ligand/pocket interaction causes the protein 100 to assume a conformation different from that seen in FIG. 1 and corresponding to the off or biologically downregulated conformation of the protein.
  • FIG. 3 illustrates the situation where the ligand 106 has shifted from the off pocket interaction conformation of FIG. 2 and the OH groups 110 have been phosphorylated, giving a negative charge to the ligand.
  • the ligand has a strong propensity to interact with on pocket 102 , to thereby change the protein conformation to the on or biologically upregulated state ( FIG. 4 ).
  • FIG. 4 a illustrates that the phosphorylated groups on the ligand 106 are attracted to positively charged residues 114 to achieve an ionic-like stabilizing bond. Note that in the on conformation of FIG. 4 , the protein conformation is different than the off conformation of FIG. 2 , and that the ATP active site is available and the protein is functional as a kinase enzyme.
  • FIGS. 1-4 illustrate a simple situation where the protein exhibits discrete pockets 102 and 104 and ligand 106 . However, in many cases a more complex switch control pocket pattern is observed.
  • FIG. 6 illustrates a situation where an appropriate pocket for small molecule interaction is formed from amino acid residues taken both from ligand 106 and, for example, from pocket 102 . This is termed a “composite switch control pocket” made up of residues from both the ligand 106 and a pocket, and is referred to by the numeral 120 .
  • a small molecule 122 is illustrated which interacts with the pocket 120 for protein modulation purposes.
  • FIG. 7 Another more complex switch pocket is depicted in FIG. 7 wherein the pocket includes residues from on pocket 102 , and ATP site 108 to create what is termed a “combined switch control pocket.” Such a combined pocket is referred to as numeral 124 and may also include residues from ligand 106 . An appropriate small molecule 126 is illustrated with pocket 124 for protein modulation purposes.
  • the small molecule will interact with the simple pocket 102 or 104 , in the more complex situations of FIGS. 6 and 7 the interactive pockets are in the regions of the pockets 120 or 124 .
  • the small molecules interact “at the region” of the respective switch control pocket.
  • I-7 is also available as shown in Scheme 1.4.
  • Condensation of isocyanate or isothiocyanate 2a with amine R 5 NH 2 yields urea/thiourea 2b, which, when reacted with chlorocarbonyl sulfenyl chloride according to GB1115350 and U.S. Pat. No. 3,818,024 yields 2c.
  • the action of mild, acidic deprotection conditions such as CAN or TFA will reveal the parent ring system of 2d.
  • Reaction of 2d with NaH in DMF, and displacement wherein M is a suitable leaving group such as chloride, bromide or iodide yields I-4 (X ⁇ O) and I-7 (X ⁇ S).
  • Intermediates 12 wherein p is 1 are readily available or are prepared by reaction of 19 with carbamates 10 under palladium(0)-catalyzed conditions.
  • M 1 is a group which oxidatively inserts palladium(0), preferably iodo or bromo, and is of greater reactivity than M.
  • Compounds 19 are either commercially available or prepared by one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • BOC-group removal with acid preferably trifluoroacetic acid
  • base preferably triethylamine
  • intermediate 30 is treated with acid, preferably trifluoroacetic acid, to afford the N-unsubstituted sulfahydantoin I-33.
  • phenyl ether R 4 group is methyl
  • compounds of formula I-49, I-50, I-51, or I-52 are treated with boron tribromide or lithium chloride to afford compounds of Formula I-53, wherein R 4 is hydrogen.
  • the Heck reaction product I-57 may be optionally hydrogenated to afford the saturated compound I-58.
  • R 4 is methyl
  • compounds of formula I-57, I-58, I-59, or I-60 are treated with boron tribromide or lithium chloride to afford compounds of Formula I-61, wherein R 4 is hydrogen.
  • Scheme 12 illustrates the further synthetic elaboration of intermediates 67.
  • Removal of the silyl protecting group (TBS) is accomplished by treatment of 67 with fluoride (tetra-n-butylammonium fluoride or cesium fluoride) to give primary alcohols 68.
  • fluoride tetra-n-butylammonium fluoride or cesium fluoride
  • 68 isocyanates 2 gives rise to compounds of Formula I-69.
  • reaction of 68 with [R 6 O 2 C(NH)p]q-D-E-M, wherein M is a suitable leaving group affords compounds of Formula I-70.
  • Oxidation of 68 using the Dess-Martin periodinane D. Dess, J. Martin, J. Am. Chem. Soc .
  • aldehydes 71 Reductive amination of 71 with amines 8 gives rise to compounds of Formula I-72.
  • aldehydes 71 may be reacted with ammonium acetate under reductive alkylation conditions to give rise to the primary amine 73.
  • Reaction of 73 with isocyanates 2 affords compounds of Formula I-74.
  • Scheme 17.2 illustrates the synthetic sequences for converting intermediates 104 to compounds of Formula I.
  • Reaction of amines 104.2 and 104.3 with 26 under Buchwald palladium(0) catalyzed amination conditions affords compounds of Formulae I-105.2 and I-105.3.
  • Reaction of acetylene 104.4 with 26 under Sonogashira coupling conditions affords compounds of Formula I-105.4.
  • Compounds I-105.4 may optionally be reduced to the corresponding saturated analogs I-105.5 by standard hydrogenation.
  • Scheme 19.2 illustrates the conversion of intermediates 113 into compounds of Formula I-115, I-118, or 117.
  • Treatment of 113 with aqueous copper oxide or an alkaline hydroxide affords compounds of Formula I-115.
  • treatment of 113 with t-butylmercaptan under copper(I) catalysis in the presence of ethylene glycol and potassium carbonate gives rise to 116 (see F. Y. Kwong and S. L. Buchwald, Organic Letters (2002) 4:3517.
  • Treatment of the t-butyl sulfide 116 with acid affords the desired thiols of Formula I-118.
  • 113 may be treated with excess ammonia under pressurized conditions to afford compound 117.
  • Scheme 19.3 illustrates the conversion of intermediate 114 into compounds of Formula I-119, I-122 and 121, by analogy to the sequence described in Scheme 19.2.
  • intermediates 133 are reacted with alkenes under palladium(0)-catalyzed Heck reaction conditions to give compounds of Formula I-136.
  • Compounds I-136 are optionally reduced to the corresponding saturated analogs I-137 by standard hydrogenation conditions or by the action of diamide.
  • amines 134c are available via the reduction of amides 134b as shown in Scheme 21.2.
  • the morpholine amide analogues 134d and morpholine analogues 134e are also available as shown in Scheme 21.2.
  • Intermediate 145 is converted to the diesters 148 by reaction with an alkyl iodide in the presence of base, preferably potassium carbonate.
  • Intermediates 146-148 are treated with HCl/dioxane to give the secondary amines 149-151, which are then condensed with acids 152 in the presence of PyBOP and di-isopropylethylamine to give compounds of Formula I-153.
  • Scheme 28.2 illustrates the conversion of intermediate t-butylsulfides 172-175 to the sulfonic acids, employing a two step process involving acid-catalyzed deprotection of the t-butyl sulfide to the corresponding mercaptans, and subsequent peracid oxidation (preferably with peracetic acid or trifluoroperacetic acid) of the mercaptans to the desired sulfonic acids of Formula I-176.
  • a hybrid p38-alpha kinase inhibitor is prepared which also contains an ATP-pocket binding moiety or an allosteric pocket binding moiety R 1 —X-A.
  • the synthesis of functionalized intermediates of formula R 1 —X-A are accomplished as shown in Scheme 29.
  • Readily available intermediates 177 which contain a group M capable of oxidative addition to palladium(0), are reacted with amines 178 (X ⁇ NH) under Buchwald Pd(0) amination conditions to afford 179.
  • amines or alcohols 178 Alternatively amines or alcohols 178 (X ⁇ NH or O) are reacted thermally with 177 in the presence of base under nuclear aromatic substitution reaction conditions to afford 179.
  • alcohols 178 (X ⁇ O) are reacted with 177 under Buchwald copper(I)-catalyzed conditions to afford 179.
  • 179 the carbamate of 179 is removed, preferably under acidic conditions when R 6 is t-butyl, to afford amines 180.
  • esters 179 are converted to the acids 181 preferably under acidic conditions when R 6 is t-butyl.
  • amines 180 Another sequence for preparing amines 180 is illustrated in Scheme 30.
  • Compounds of Formula I-184 are prepared as illustrated in previous schemes 1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7.1, 7.2, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 16.2, 17.2, 18, 19.1, 19.2, 19.3, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, or 28.2.
  • inhibitors of Formula I which contain an amide linkage CO—NH-connecting the oxyanion pocket binding moieties and R 1 —X-A moieties are shown in Scheme 32.
  • an activating agent preferably PyBOP in the presence of di-iso-propylethylamine
  • amines I-185 gives compounds of Formula I.
  • retroamides of Formula I are formed by treatment of acids I-186 with PyBOP in the presence of di-iso-propylethylamine and amines 180.
  • inhibitors of Formula I which contain an urea linkage NH—CO—NH— connecting the oxyanion pocket binding moieties and the R 1 —X-A moieties are shown in Scheme 33.
  • Treatment of amines I-185 with p-nitrophenyl chloroformate and base affords carbamates 187. Reaction of 187 with amines 180 gives ureas of Formula I.
  • inhibitors of Formula I which contain an urea linkage NH—CO—NH-connecting the oxyanion pocket binding moieties and the R 1 —X-A moieties are prepared as shown in Scheme 33.
  • Treatment of amines 180 with p-nitrophenyl chloroformate and base affords carbamates 188.
  • Reaction of 188 with amines I-185 gives ureas of Formula I.
  • inhibitors of Formula I.B can be generally accomplished starting from a variety of readily available beta-ketonitriles 189, wherein R 40 is alkyl, phenyl, or perfluoroalkyl.
  • R 40 is alkyl, phenyl, or perfluoroalkyl.
  • reaction of 189 with an alcohol R 4 OH, preferably methanol or ethanol, under anhydrous acidic conditions, preferably anhydrous HCl leads to the formation of imidates 190.
  • a base preferably pyridine, triethylamine, di-iso-propylethylamine, Barton's base, or an alkali metal carbonate
  • the mixture of tautomers 191/192 are not separated from each other, but are reacted as a mixture with a substituted hydrazine 193, wherein the Q moiety is optionally protected by a protecting group that diminishes its reactivity with the 191/192 mixture.
  • This cyclodehydration reaction is performed in the presence of base, acid catalysis, or under neutral conditions optionally in the presence of a dehydrating agent to afford the desired pyrazoles 194.
  • Preferable reaction solvents include dichloromethane, ethyl acetate, acetonitrile, or an alcoholic solvent taken from methanol, ethanol, or 2-propanol.
  • reaction sequence initiating from 190 and yielding 194 may take place as two separate reactions, wherein the tautomeric mixture 191/192 is isolated, and then in a second reaction step this 191/192 mixture is reacted with a substituted hydrazine 193 to afford the desired pyrazoles 194.
  • reaction sequence initiating from 190 and yielding 194 may take place in a one-pot procedure, without isolation of the intermediate 191/192 mixture.
  • reaction sequence initiating from 190 and yielding 194 may take place in a parallel array format, wherein phase-trafficking reagents, including scavenging reagents, are utilized to allow purification and isolation of intermediates and products.
  • Scheme 36 illustrates this modification.
  • Excess imidate 190 is reacted with a limiting amount of electrophile in the presence of a polymer-supported base 195 to afford the acylated imidates 191/192 as a mixture of tautomers.
  • the crude mixture of 191/192 is optionally purified by incubation with a polymer-supported electrophile 196, preferably a polymer-supported isocyanate or acid chloride.
  • purified acylated imidates 191/192 are reacted with the substituted hydrazines 193 to afford desired crude products 194.
  • a polymer-supported hydrazine 198 is optionally utilized to scavenge any remaining 191/192 from solution phase as derivatized 199. Filtration gives rise to purified desired pyrazoles 194.
  • Scheme 37 illustrates the preparation of compounds wherein Q is Q-40.
  • Readily available amine 200 wherein P is a suitable amine-protecting group or a group convertible to an amine group, is reacted with p-nitrophenyl chloroformate to give rise to carbamate 201.
  • Intermediate 201 is reacted with a substituted amino acid ester with a suitable base to afford urea 202. Further treatment with base results in cyclization to afford hydantoin 203.
  • the protecting group P is removed to afford the key amine-containing intermediate 204.
  • Amine 204 is converted to 205A by reaction with an isocyanate; 204 is converted to amide 205B by reaction with an acid chloride, acid anhydride, or a suitable activated carboxylic acid in the presence of a suitable base; 204 is converted to carbamate 205C by reaction with a substituted alkyl or aryl chloroformate in the presence of a suitable base.
  • Scheme 38 illustrates the synthesis of key substituted hydrazine 210.
  • This hydrazine can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • the nitrophenyl substituted amine 206 is reacted with p-nitrophenyl chloroformate to give rise to carbamate 207.
  • Reaction of 207 with a suitable amino acid ester affords urea 208, which is cyclized under basic conditions to give hydantoin 209.
  • Reduction of the nitro group of 209, diazotization of the resulting amine, and reduction of the diazonium salt affords key hydrazine 210.
  • Scheme 39 illustrates the synthesis of key substituted hydrazines 213 and 216, utilized to prepare compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q-42 and G is oxygen.
  • Nitrophenol 211 is reacted with an alpha-hydroxy acid, wherein R 42 is H or alkyl and R 43 is alkyl, under Mitsunobu reaction conditions to give 212; alternatively 211 is reacted under basic conditions with a carboxylic acid ester containing a displaceable Q x group to afford 212.
  • Conversion of 212 to the hydrazine 213 is accomplished by standard procedures as described above.
  • ester group of 212 is hydrolyzed to afford carboxylic acid 214, which is reacted with an amine NH(R 4 ) 2 in the presence of a coupling reagent, preferably EDC/HOBT, to give amide 215.
  • a coupling reagent preferably EDC/HOBT
  • Conversion of 215 to the substituted hydrazine 216 is accomplished by standard procedures. Hydrazines 213 and 216 can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • Scheme 40 illustrates the synthesis of key substituted hydrazines 219 and 212 utilized to prepare compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q42 and G is methylene.
  • Nitrophenyl bromide 217 is reacted with an alpha-beta unsaturated ester using Pd(0) catalyzed Heck reaction conditions, to afford ester 218.
  • This intermediate is converted to the substituted hydrazine 219 by standard procedures involving concomitant reduction of the alpha-beta unsaturated bond.
  • ester 218 is hydrolyzed to the carboxylic acid 220, which is reacted with an amine NH(R 4 ) 2 in the presence of a coupling reagent, preferably EDC/HOBT, to give amide 221.
  • Conversion of 221 to the substituted hydrazine 222 is accomplished by standard procedures.
  • Hydrazines 219 and 222 can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • Scheme 41 illustrates an alternative synthesis of key substituted hydrazines 225 and 228, utilized to prepare compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q-42, G is methylene, and one or both of R 42 are carbon-containing substituents.
  • Nitrobenzyl acetate 223 is reacted with a substituted silylketene acetal to afford ester 224.
  • This intermediate is converted to the substituted hydrazine 225 by standard procedures.
  • ester 223 is hydrolyzed to the carboxylic acid 226, which is reacted with an amine NH(R 4 ) 2 in the presence of a coupling reagent, preferably EDC/HOBT, to give amide 227.
  • Conversion of 227 to the substituted hydrazine 228 is accomplished by standard procedures.
  • Hydrazines 225 and 228 can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • Scheme 42 illustrates an alternative synthesis of key substituted hydrazines 231 and 234, utilized to prepare compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q-42 and G is NH.
  • Iodoaniline 229 is reacted with an alpha-keto ester under reductive amination conditions, preferably sodium triacetoxyborohydride, to afford ester 230.
  • This intermediate is converted to the substituted hydrazine 231 by Cu(I)-catalyzed reaction with N—BOC hydrazine.
  • ester 231 is hydrolyzed to the carboxylic acid 232, which is reacted with an amine NH(R 4 ) 2 in the presence of a coupling reagent, preferably EDC/HOBT, to give amide 233.
  • Conversion of 233 to the substituted hydrazine 234 is accomplished by Cu(I)-catalyzed reaction with N—BOC hydrazine.
  • Hydrazines 231 and 234 can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36, after acid-catalyzed removal of the hydrazine N—BOC protecting group, preferably with trifluoroacetic acid or HCl-dioxane.
  • Scheme 43 illustrates an alternative synthesis of key substituted hydrazine 239 utilized to prepare compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q42, G is oxygen, and X is taken from piperidinyl, piperazinyl, thiomorpholino sulfone, or 4-hydroxypiperinyl.
  • Iodophenol 235 is reacted with an alpha-hydroxy acid under Mitsunobu reaction conditions to give 236; alternatively 235 is reacted under basic conditions with a carboxylic acid ester containing a displaceable Q x group to afford 236.
  • Ester 236 is hydrolyzed to the carboxylic acid 237, which is reacted with an amine X—H in the presence of a coupling reagent, preferably EDC/HOBT, to give amide 238.
  • Conversion of 238 to the substituted hydrazine 239 is accomplished by Cu(I)-catalyzed reaction with N—BOC hydrazine.
  • Hydrazine 239 can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36, after acid-catalyzed removal of the hydrazine N—BOC protecting group, preferably with trifluoroacetic acid or HCl-dioxane.
  • Scheme 44 illustrates an alternative synthesis of key substituted hydrazine 241 utilized to prepare compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q-42, G is NH, and X is taken from piperidinyl, piperazinyl, thiomorpholino sulfone, or 4-hydroxypiperinyl.
  • Carboxylic acid 237 is reacted with an amine X—H in the presence of a coupling reagent, preferably EDC/HOBT, to give amide 240.
  • Conversion of 240 to the substituted hydrazine 241 is accomplished by Cu(I)-catalyzed-reaction with N—BOC hydrazine.
  • Hydrazine 241 can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36, after acid-catalyzed removal of the hydrazine N—BOC protecting group, preferably with trifluoroacetic acid or HCl-dioxane.
  • Scheme 45 illustrates an alternative synthesis of key substituted hydrazine 246, utilized to prepare compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q42, G is methylene, and X is taken from piperidinyl, piperazinyl, thiomorpholino sulfone, or 4-hydroxypiperinyl.
  • Iodobenzyl acetate 242 is reacted with a substituted silylketene acetal to afford ester 243.
  • Ester 243 is hydrolyzed to the carboxylic acid 244 which is reacted with an amine X—H in the presence of a coupling reagent, preferably EDC/HOBT, to give amide 245.
  • a coupling reagent preferably EDC/HOBT
  • Conversion of 245 to the substituted hydrazine 246 is accomplished by Cu(I)-catalyzed reaction with N—BOC hydrazine.
  • Hydrazine 246 can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36, after acid-catalyzed removal of the hydrazine N—BOC protecting group, preferably with trifluoroacetic acid or HCl-dioxane.
  • Scheme 46 illustrates an alternative synthesis of key substituted hydrazines 248, 252, and 255, utilized to prepare compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q-47 or Q-48.
  • Nitrophenol 211 is reacted with a substituted alcohol under Mitsunobu reaction conditions to afford 247; alternatively 211 is alkylated with R 4 -Q x wherein Q x is a suitable leaving group, under basic reaction conditions, to give rise to 247.
  • Conversion of 247 to the substituted hydrazine 248 is accomplished under standard conditions.
  • the nitrobenzoic acid 249 is converted to the acid fluoride 250 by reaction with a fluorinating reagent, preferably trifluorotriazine.
  • a fluorinating reagent preferably trifluorotriazine.
  • a nucleophilic fluoride source preferably cesium fluoride and tetra-n-butylammonium fluoride, affords the alpha-alpha-difluorosubstituted carbinol 251.
  • Conversion of 251 to the substituted hydrazine 252 is accomplished under standard conditions.
  • Nitrobenzaldehyde 253 is reacted with trimethylsilyltrifluoromethane (TMS-CF 3 ) and tetra-n-butylammonium fluoride to give rise to trifluoromethyl-substituted carbinol 254. Conversion of 254 to the substituted hydrazine 255 is accomplished under standard conditions. Hydrazines 248, 252, and 255 can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • Scheme 47 illustrates the preparation of compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q-59.
  • p-Nitrophenylcarbamate 201 is reacted with a substituted alpha-hydroxy ester with a suitable base to afford carbamate 256. Further treatment with base results in cyclization to afford oxazolidinedione 257.
  • the protecting group P is removed to afford the key amine-containing intermediate 258; alternatively, if P is a nitro group, then 257 is converted to 258 under reducing conditions such as iron/HCl, tin(II) chloride, or catalytic hydrogenation.
  • Amine 258 is converted to 259A by reaction with an isocyanate wherein T1 is alkylene or a direct bond connecting A and the carbonyl moiety; 258 is converted to amide 259B by reaction with an acid chloride, acid anhydride, or a suitable activated carboxylic acid in the presence of a suitable base; 258 is converted to carbamate 259C by reaction with a substituted alkyl or aryl chloroformate in the presence of a suitable base.
  • Scheme 48 illustrates an alternative approach to the preparation of compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q-59.
  • Amine 260 is reacted with p-nitrophenylchloroformate under basic conditions to give rise to carbamate 261.
  • This intermediate is reacted with an alpha-hydroxy ester in the presence of base to afford carbamate 262.
  • Further treatment with base converts 262 into the oxazolidinedione 263.
  • Conversion of 263 to the substituted hydrazine 264 is accomplished by standard procedures. Hydrazine 264 can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • Scheme 49 illustrates the approach to the preparation of compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q-57.
  • Amine 265 is reacted with p-methoxybenzylisocyanate under standard conditions to give rise to urea 266.
  • This intermediate is reacted with an oxalyl chloride in the presence of base to afford trione 267.
  • Conversion of 267 to the substituted hydrazine 268 and removal of the p-methoxybenzyl protecting group is accomplished by standard procedures.
  • Hydrazine 264 can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • Scheme 50 illustrates an approach to the preparation of compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q-56.
  • Amine 269 is reacted with p-methoxybenzylsulfonylchloride under standard conditions to give rise to sulfonylurea 270.
  • This intermediate is reacted with an oxalyl chloride in the presence of base to afford the cyclic sulfonyl urea 271.
  • Conversion of 271 to the substituted hydrazine 272 and removal of the p-methoxybenzyl protecting group is accomplished by standard procedures.
  • Hydrazine 272 can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • Scheme 51 illustrates an approach to the preparation of compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q-58.
  • Amine 273 is reacted with a cyclic anhydride e.g. succinic anhydride in the presence of base under standard conditions to give rise to imide 274.
  • Conversion of 274 to the substituted hydrazine 275 is accomplished by standard procedures. Hydrazine 275 can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • Scheme 52 illustrates an approach to the preparation of compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q-54 or Q-55.
  • Carboxylic acid 276 is converted to protected amine 279 under standard conditions, which can be subsequently converted to hydrazine 280 by standard procedures.
  • Hydrazine 280 can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36 to yield protected amine 283 which is readily deprotected to yield amine 284.
  • Scheme 53 illustrates an approach to the preparation of compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q49, Q-50 or Q-51.
  • Protected amine 287 (available by several literature procedures) is converted to deprotected hydrazine 288 is accomplished by standard procedures.
  • Amine 287 can be deprotected by TFA to yield amine 289 which can be subsequently converted amide 290.
  • Scheme 54 illustrates an approach to the preparation of compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q-52 and Q-53.
  • Scheme 55 illustrates an approach to the preparation of compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q-36.
  • Amine 302 is reacted with CDI and amine R 4 NH 2 to yield 303, which is reacted with chlorocarbonyl sulfonylchloride to yield thiadiazolidinedione 304.
  • Conversion of 304 to the substituted hydrazine 305 is accomplished by standard procedures.
  • Hydrazine 305 can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • Scheme 56 illustrates an approach to the preparation of compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q-37, Q-38 or Q-39.
  • Imides 309a, 309b, and 312 are all available via several literature methods, and are each able to be alkylated with chloride 306 to yields intermediates 307, 310 and 313 respectively.
  • Scheme 57 illustrates an alternative preparation of compounds wherein Q is Q-37.
  • Readily available amine 315 wherein P is a suitable amine-protecting group or a group convertible to an amine group, is reacted with SO 2 Cl 2 to give rise to sulfonyl chloride 316.
  • Intermediate 316 is reacted with a substituted amino acid ester with a suitable base to afford sulfonylurea 317. Further treatment with base results in cyclization to afford sulfohydantoin 318.
  • the protecting group P is removed to afford the key amine-containing intermediate 319.
  • 318 is converted to 319 under reducing conditions such as iron/HCl, tin(II) chloride, or catalytic hydrogenation.
  • Amine 319 is converted to 320A by reaction with an isocyanate;
  • 319 is converted to amide 320B by reaction with an acid chloride, acid anhydride, or a suitable activated carboxylic acid in the presence of a suitable base;
  • 319 is converted to carbamate 320C by reaction with a substituted alkyl or aryl chloroformate in the presence of a suitable base.
  • Scheme 58 illustrates an alternative synthesis of key substituted hydrazine 325 of compounds wherein Q is Q-37.
  • This hydrazine can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • the amine 321 is reacted with SO 2 Cl 2 to give rise to sulfonyl chloride 322.
  • Reaction of 322 with a suitable amino acid ester affords sulfonylurea 32.3 which is cyclized under basic conditions to give sulfohydantoin 324.
  • Reduction of the nitro group of 324 diazotization of the resulting amine, and reduction of the diazonium salt affords key hydrazine 325.
  • Scheme 59 illustrates an alternative preparation of compounds wherein Q is Q-38.
  • Readily available amine 326 wherein P is a suitable amine-protecting group or a group convertible to an amine group, is reacted with SO 2 Cl 2 to give rise to sulfonyl chloride 327.
  • Intermediate 327 is reacted with a substituted hydrazide ester with a suitable base to afford sulfonylurea 328. Further treatment with base results in cyclization to afford sulfotriazaolinedione 329.
  • the protecting group P is removed to afford the key amine-containing intermediate 330.
  • 329 is converted to 330 under reducing conditions such as iron/HCl, tin(II) chloride, or catalytic hydrogenation.
  • Amine 330 is converted to 331A by reaction with an isocyanate;
  • 330 is converted to amide 331B by reaction with an acid chloride, acid anhydride, or a suitable activated carboxylic acid in the presence of a suitable base;
  • 330 is converted to carbamate 331C by reaction with a substituted alkyl or aryl chloroformate in the presence of a suitable base.
  • Scheme 60 illustrates an alternative synthesis of key substituted hydrazine 336 of compounds wherein Q is Q-38.
  • This hydrazine can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • the amine 332 is reacted with SO 2 Cl 2 to give rise to sulfonyl chloride 333.
  • Reaction of 333 with a substituted hydrazide ester affords sulfonylurea 334, which is cyclized under basic conditions to give sulfotriazaolinedione 335.
  • Reduction of the nitro group of 335, diazotization of the resulting amine, and reduction of the diazonium salt affords key hydrazine 336.
  • Scheme 61 illustrates the preparation of compounds wherein Q is Q-39.
  • Readily available amine 337 wherein P is a suitable amine-protecting group or a group convertible to an amine group, is reacted with p-nitrophenyl chloroformate to give rise to carbamate 338.
  • Intermediate 338 is reacted with a substituted amino acid ester with a suitable base to afford urea 339. Further treatment with base results in cyclization to afford triazolinedione 340.
  • the protecting group P is removed to afford the key amine-containing intermediate 341.
  • 340 is converted to 341 under reducing conditions such as iron/HCl, tin(II) chloride, or catalytic hydrogenation.
  • Amine 341 is converted to 342A by reaction with an isocyanate; 341 is converted to amide 342B by reaction with an acid chloride, acid anhydride, or a suitable activated carboxylic acid in the presence of a suitable base; 341 is converted to carbamate 342C by reaction with a substituted alkyl or aryl chloroformate in the presence of a suitable base.
  • Scheme 62 illustrates an alternative synthesis of key substituted hydrazine 347 of compounds wherein Q is Q-39.
  • This hydrazine can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • the nitrophenyl substituted amine 343 is reacted with p-nitrophenyl chloroformate to give rise to carbamate 344.
  • Reaction of 344 with a suitable amino acid ester affords urea 345 which is cyclized under basic conditions to give triazolinedione 346.
  • Reduction of the nitro group of 346 diazotization of the resulting amine, and reduction, of the diazonium salt affords key hydrazine 347.
  • Scheme 63 illustrates the synthesis of compounds wherein Q is Q43.
  • Morphiline 348 is alkylated with protected bromohydrine. Removal of the alcohol protecting group yields intermediate 349, which can be oxidized to aldehyde 350.
  • This intermediate is converted to the substituted hydrazine 353 by Cu(I)-catalyzed reaction with N—BOC hydrazine.
  • This intermediate is converted to the substituted hydrazine 353 by Cu(I)-catalyzed reaction with N—BOC hydrazine.
  • Nitroacid 358 (readily available by anyone with normal skills in the art) is reacted with morpholine to yield amide 359, which upon reduction to the amine and conversion of the nitro group under standard conditions results in hydrazine 360.
  • This hydrazine can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • Scheme 65 illustrates the synthesis of compounds wherein Q is Q-44.
  • N-methyl piperazine 361 is alkylated with protected bromohydrine. Removal of the alcohol protecting group yields intermediate 362 which can be oxidized to aldehyde 363.
  • idoaniline 364 is reacted with 363 under reductive amination conditions, preferably sodium triacetoxyborohydride, to afford intermediate 365.
  • This intermediate is converted to the substituted hydrazine 366 by Cu(I)-catalyzed reaction with N—BOC hydrazine.
  • This intermediate is converted to the substituted hydrazine 370 by Cu(I)-catalyzed reaction with N—BOC hydrazine.
  • Nitroacid 371 (readily available by anyone with normal skills in the art) is reacted with N-methyl piperazine to yield amide 372, which upon reduction to the amine and conversion of the nitro group under standard conditions results in hydrazine 373.
  • This hydrazine can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • Scheme 67 illustrates the synthesis of compounds wherein Q is Q-45.
  • Thiomorpholine sulphone 374 is alkylated with protected bromohydrine. Removal of the alcohol protecting group yields intermediate 375 which can be oxidized to aldehyde 376.
  • This intermediate is converted to the substituted hydrazine 379 by Cu(I)-catalyzed reaction with N—BOC hydrazine.
  • iodophenol 380 is either alkylated with 381 or reacted under Mitsunobu conditions with alcohol 375 to yield intermediate 382.
  • This intermediate is converted to the substituted hydrazine 383 by Cu(I)-catalyzed reaction with N—BOC hydrazine.
  • Nitroacid 384 (readily available by anyone with normal skills in the art) is reacted with thiomorpholine sulphone to yield amide 385, which upon reduction to the amine and conversion of the nitro group under standard conditions results in hydrazine 386.
  • This hydrazine can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • Scheme 69 illustrates the synthesis of compounds wherein Q is Q-46.
  • Piperadine derivative 387 is alkylated with protected bromohydrine. Removal of the alcohol protecting group yields intermediate 388, which can be oxidized to aldehyde 389.
  • This intermediate is converted to the substituted hydrazine 392 by Cu(I)-catalyzed reaction with N—BOC hydrazine.
  • This intermediate is converted to the substituted hydrazine 395 by Cu(I)-catalyzed reaction with N—BOC hydrazine.
  • Nitroacid 397 (readily available by anyone with normal skills in the art) is reacted with thiomorpholine sulphone to yield amide 398, which upon reduction to the amine and conversion of the nitro group under standard conditions results in hydrazine 399.
  • This hydrazine can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • a fluorescence binding assay is used to detect binding of inhibitors of Formula I with unphosphorylated p38-alpha kinase as previously described: see J. Regan et al, Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (2002) 45:2994.
  • the binding affinity of an inhibitor for p38 kinase can be measured by its ability to decrease the fluorescence from SKF 86002.
  • the assay was performed in a 384 plate (Greiner uclear 384 plate) on a Polarstar Optima plate reader (BMG).
  • the reaction mixture contained 1 ⁇ M SKF 86002, 80 nM p38 kinase and various concentrations of an inhibitor in 20 mM Bis-Tris Propane buffer, pH 7, containing 0.15% (w/v) n-octylglucoside and 2 mM EDTA in a final volume of 65 ⁇ l.
  • the reaction was initiated by addition of the enzyme.
  • the plate was incubated at room temperature ( ⁇ 25° C.) for 2 hours before reading at emission of 420 nm and excitation at 340 nm.
  • rfu relative fluorescence unit
  • IC 50 value for the inhibitor was calculated from the % inhibition values obtained at a range of concentrations of the inhibitor using Prism.
  • time-dependent inhibition was assessed, the plate was read at multiple reaction times such as 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 6 hours. The IC 50 values were calculated at the each time point. An inhibition was assigned as time-dependent if the IC 50 values decrease with the reaction time (more than two-fold in four hours). This is illustrated below in Table 1.
  • Activity of phosphorylated p-38 kinase was determined by following the production of ADP from the kinase reaction through coupling with the pyruvate kinase/lactate dehydrogenase system (e.g., Schindler, et al. Science (2000) 289, 1938-1942). In this assay, the oxidation of NADH was continuously measured spectrophometrically.
  • the reaction mixture (100 ⁇ l) contained phospho p-38 alpha kinase (3.3 nM. Panvera), peptide substrate (IPTSPITTTYFFFKKK-OH, 0.2 mM), ATP (0.3 mM), MgCl 2 (10 mM), pyruvate kinase (8 units.
  • reaction rates were calculated from different time frames such as 0.5 min to 0.5 h, 0.5 h to 1 h, 1.5 h to 2 h or 2.5 h to 3 h were generally constant.
  • test compounds were incubated with the reaction mixture for ⁇ 5 min before adding ATP to start the reaction. Percentage of inhibition was obtained by comparison of reaction rate with that of a control well containing no test compound. IC 50 values were calculated from a series of % inhibition values determined at a range of concentrations of each inhibitor using Prism to process the data and fit inhibition curves. Generally, the rates obtained at the time frame of 1.5 h to 2 h were used for these calculations. In assessing whether inhibition of a test compound was time-dependent (i.e., greater inhibition with a longer incubation time), the values of % inhibition and/or IC 50 values obtained from other time frames were also calculated for the inhibitor.
  • the biological activity for compounds of the present invention in the spectrophotometric assay are illustrated in Tables 2 and 3.
  • LPS lipopolysaccharide
  • Table 2 records IC 50 values for inhibition of TNF-alpha release by Test Compounds of the present invention, wherein the IC 50 value, in micromolar concentration, represents the concentration of Test Compound resulting in a 50% inhibition of TNF-alpha release from human peripheral blood mononuclear leukocytes as compared to control experiments containing no Test Compound. Test compounds evaluated are illustrated in Table 4.
  • Example A 8.0 g, 27.9 mmol in THF (200 mL) at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at RT for 1 h, heated until all solids were dissolved, stirred at RT for an additional 3 h and quenched with H 2 O (200 mL).
  • Example A To a solution of Example A (10.7 g, 70.0 mmol) in a mixture of pyridine (56 mL) and THF (30 mL) was added a solution of 4-nitrophenyl 4-chlorophenylcarbamate (10 g, 34.8 mmol) in THF (150 mL) at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at RT for 1 h and heated until all solids were dissolved, and stirred at RT for an additional 3 h. H 2 O (200 mL) and CH 2 Cl 2 (200 mL) were added, the aqueous phase separated and extracted with CH 2 Cl 2 (2 ⁇ 100 mL).
  • Example C A solution of Example C (1.66 g, 4.0 mmol) and SOCl 2 (0.60 mL, 8.0 mmol) in CH 3 Cl (100 mL) was refluxed for 3 h and concentrated in vacuo to yield 1- ⁇ 3-tert-butyl-1-[3-chloromethyl)phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5-yl ⁇ -3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea (1.68 g, 97%) was obtained as white powder.
  • 1 H NMR (DMSO-d6) ⁇ 9.26 (s, 1H), 9.15 (s, 1H), 8.42-7.41 (m, 11H), 6.40 (s, 1H), 4.85 (s, 2H), 1.28 (s, 9H).
  • Example F 800 mg, 2.0 mmol
  • SOCl 2 (0.30 mL, 4 mmol)
  • CHCl 3 30 mL
  • the solvent was evaporated in vacuo and the residue was taken up to in CH 2 Cl 2 (2 ⁇ 20 mL).
  • 1- ⁇ 3-tert-butyl-1-[3-(chloromethyl)phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5-yl ⁇ -3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea 812 mg, 97%) was obtained as white powder.
  • Example H was dissolved in dry THF (10 mL) and added a THF solution (10 mL) of 1-isocyano naphthalene (1.13 g, 6.66 mmol) and pyridine (5.27 g, 66.6 mmol) at RT.
  • the reaction mixture was stirred for 3 h, quenched with H 2 O (30 mL), the resulting precipitate filtered and washed with 1 N HCl and ether to yield 1-[2-(3-azidomethyl-phenyl)-5-t-butyl-2H-pyrazol-3-yl]-3-naphthalen-1-yl-urea (2.4 g, 98%) as a white solid.
  • Example H To a solution of Example H (1.50 g, 5.55 mmol) in dry THF (10 mL) was added a THF solution (10 mL) of 4-chlorophenyl isocyanate (1.02 g, 6.66 mmol) and pyridine (5.27 g, 66.6 mmol) at RT. The reaction mixture was stirred for 3 h and then H 2 O (30 mL) was added.
  • Example 1 A mixture of Example 1 (41 mg, 0.1 mmol), Kemp acid anhydride (24 mg, 0.1 mmol) and Et 3 N (100 mg, 1 mmol) in anhydrous CH 2 Cl 2 (2 mL) were stirred overnight at RT, and concentrated in vacuo.
  • Example B was saponified with 2N LiOH in MeOH, and to the resulting acid (64.2 mg, 0.15 mmol) were added HOBt (30 mg, 0.225 mmol), Example K (24 mg, 0.15 mmol) and 4-methylmorpholine (60 mg, 0.60 mmol 4.0 equiv), DMF (3 mL) and EDCI (43 mg, 0.225 mmol).
  • Example 15 The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 15 utilizing Example C (37 mg) and Example K to yield 1-[1-(3- ⁇ bis[(methylcarbamoyl)methyl]carbamoyl ⁇ phenyl)-3-tert-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl]-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea.
  • Example B was saponified with 2N LiOH in MeOH, and to the resulting acid (0.642 g, 1.5 mmol) in dry THF (25 mL) at ⁇ 78° C. were added freshly distilled triethylamine (0.202 g, 2.0 mmol) and pivaloyl chloride (0.216 g, 1.80 mmol) with vigorous stirring. After stirring at ⁇ 78° C. for 15 min and at 0° C. for 45 min, the mixture was again cooled to ⁇ 78° C.
  • the lithium salt of the oxazolidinone reagent was previously prepared by the slow addition of n-BuLi (2.50M in hexane, 1.20 mL, 3.0 mmol) into THF solution of D-4-phenyl-oxazoldin-2-one at ⁇ 78° C.].
  • the reaction solution was stirred at ⁇ 78° C. for 2 h and RT overnight, and then quenched with aq. ammonium chloride and extracted with dichloromethane (100 mL). The combined organic layers were dried (Na 2 SO 4 ) and concentrated in vacuo.
  • Example L A mixture of Example L (0.2 g, 0.58 mmol) and 1-naphthylisocyanate (0.10 g, 0.6 mmol) in dry CH 2 Cl 2 (4 ml) was stirred at RT under N 2 for 18 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the crude product was purified by column chromatography using ethyl acetate/hexane/CH 2 Cl 2 (3/1/0.7) as the eluent (0.11 g, off-white solid) to yield 1- ⁇ 3-tert-butyl-1-[3-(2-morpholino-2-oxoethyl)phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5-yl ⁇ -3-(naphthalene-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 21 The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 21 utilizing Example L (0.2 g, 0.58 mmol) and 4-chlorophenylisocyanate (0.09 g, 0.6 mmol) to yield 1- ⁇ 3-tert-butyl-1-[3-(2-morpholino-2-oxoethyl)phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5-yl ⁇ -3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea.
  • Example 21 The title compound is synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 21 utilizing Example L (0.2 g, 0.58 mmol) and phenylisocyanate (0.09 g, 0.6 mmol) to yield 1- ⁇ 3-tert-butyl-1-[3-(2-morpholino-2-oxoethyl)phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5-yl ⁇ -3-phenylurea.
  • Example 21 The title compound is synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 21 utilizing Example L (0.2 g, 0.58 mmol) and 1-isocyanato-4-methoxy-naphthalene to yield 1- ⁇ 3-tert-butyl-1-[3-(2-morpholino-2-oxoethyl)phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5-yl ⁇ -3-(1-methoxynaphthalen-4-yl)urea.
  • the reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 3 h.
  • the pH was adjusted to pH 14 with 50% aqueous NaOH solution and extracted with ethyl acetate.
  • the combined organic extracts were concentrated in vacuo provided 2-(3-hydrazinophenyl)acetamide.
  • Example N A mixture of Example N (2 g, 0.73 mmol) and 1-naphthylisocyanate (0.124 g, 0.73° mmol) in dry CH 2 Cl 2 (4 ml) was stirred at RT under N 2 for 18 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the crude product was washed with ethyl acetate (8 ml) and dried in vacuo to yield 1- ⁇ 3-tert-butyl-1-[3-(carbamoylmethyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl ⁇ -3-(naphthalene-1-yl)urea as a white solid (0.22 g).
  • Example C The title compound is synthesized in a manner analogous to Example C utilizing Example A and 1-isocyanato-4-methoxy-naphthalene to yield ethyl 3-(3-tert-butyl-5-(3-(1-methoxynaphthalen-4-yl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)benzoate.
  • Example M The title compound is synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 17 utilizing.
  • Example M and L-4-phenyl-oxazolidin-2-one to yield L-1- ⁇ 5-tert-butyl-2-[3-(2-oxo-4-phenyl-oxazolidinyl-3-carbonyl)phenyl]-2H-pyrazol-3-yl ⁇ -3-phenylurea.
  • Example P A mixture of Example P (0.35 g, 1.1 mmol) and 1-naphthylisocyanate (0.19 g, 1.05 mmol) in dry CH 2 Cl 2 (5 ml) was stirred at RT under N 2 for 20 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue was stirred in a solution of THF (3 ml)/MeOH (2 ml)/water (1.5 ml) containing lithium hydroxide (0.1 g) for 3 h at RT, and subsequently diluted with EtOAc and dilute citric acid solution. The organic layer was dried (Na 2 SO 4 ), and the volatiles removed in vacuo.
  • Example Q A mixture of Example Q (0.25 g, 0.8 mmol) and 1-naphthylisocyanate (0.13 g, 0.8 mmol) in dry CH 2 Cl 2 (5 ml) was stirred at RT under N 2 for 20 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue was stirred in a solution of THF (3 ml)/MeOH (2 ml)/water (1.5 ml) containing lithium hydroxide (0.1 g) for 3 h at RT and diluted with EtOAc and diluted citric acid solution. The organic layer was dried (Na 2 SO 4 ), and the volatiles removed in vacuo.
  • Example Q The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 31 utilizing Example Q (0.16 g, 0.5 mmol) and 4-chlorophenylisocyanate (0.077 g, 0.5 mmol) to yield 3- ⁇ 4-[3-tert-butyl-5-(3-(4-chlorophenyl)ureido]-1H-pyrazol-1-yl ⁇ phenyl)propanonic acid acid (0.16 g, off-white solid).
  • a 250 mL pressure vessel (ACE Glass Teflon screw cap) was charged with 3-nitrobiphenyl (20 g, 0.10 mol) dissolved in THF ( ⁇ 100 mL) and 10% Pd/C (3 g).
  • the reaction vessel was charged with H 2 (g) and purged three times.
  • the reaction was charged with 40 psi H 2 (g) and placed on a Parr shaker hydrogenation apparatus and allowed to shake overnight at RT. HPLC showed that the reaction was complete thus the reaction mixture was filtered through a bed of Celite and evaporated to yield the amine: 16.7 g (98% yield)
  • Example R (0.145 g; 0.50 mmol) was dissolved in 2 mL CH 2 Cl 2 (anhydrous) followed by the addition of phenylisocyanate (0.0544 mL; 0.50 mmol; 1 eq.). The reaction was kept under argon and stirred for 17 h. Evaporation of solvent gave a crystalline mass that was triturated with hexane/EtOAc (4:1) and filtered to yield 1-(3-tert-butyl-1-(3-phenylphenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-phenylurea (0.185 g, 90%). HPLC purity: 96%; mp: 80 84; 1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ): ⁇ 7.3 (m, 16H), 6.3 (s, 1H), 1.4 (s, 9H).
  • Example R (0.145 g; 0.50 mmol) and p-chlorophenylisocyanate (0.0768 g, 0.50 mmol, 1 eq.) to yield 1-(3-tert-butyl-1-(3-phenylphenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea (0.205 g, 92%).
  • Example P (0.30 g, 0.95 mmol) and 4-fluorophenylisocyanate (0.146 g, 0.95 mmol) to yield 3-(3-(3-tert-butyl-5-(3-(4-fluorophenyl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)phenyl)propanoic acid.
  • Example N To a stirred solution of Example N (2 g, 7.35 mmol) in THF (6 ml) was added borane-methylsulfide (18 mmol). The mixture was heated to reflux for 90 min and cooled to RT, after which 6 N HCl was added and heated to reflux for 10 min. The mixture was basified with NaOH and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (Na 2 SO 4 ) filtered and concentrated in vacuo to yield 3-tert-butyl-1-[3-(2-aminoethyl)phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5 amine (0.9 g).
  • Example T A mixture of Example T (0.26 g, 0.73 mmol) and 1-naphthylisocyanate (0.123 g, 0.73 mmol) in dry CH 2 Cl 2 (5 ml) was stirred at RT under N 2 for 48 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue was purified by column chromatography using 1% methanol in CH 2 Cl 2 as the eluent (0.15 g, off-white solid). The solid was then treated with TFA (0.2 ml) for 5 min and diluted with EtOAc.
  • Example T (0.15 g, 0.42 mmol) and 4-chlorophenylisocyanate (0.065 g, 0.42 mmol) to yield 1- ⁇ 3-tert-butyl-1-[3-(2-Aminoethyl)phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5-yl ⁇ -3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea as an off-white solid (20 mg).
  • Example U In a dry vial with a magnetic stir bar, Example U (2.62 g, 0.0107 mol) was dissolved in CH 2 Cl 2 (5 mL, anhydrous) followed by the addition of 1-naphthylisocyanate (1.53 mL, 0.0107 mol, 1 eq.). The reaction was kept under Ar and stirred for 18 h. Evaporation of solvent followed by column chromatography with EtOAc/hexane/Et 3 N (7:2:0.5) as the eluent yielded 1-[3-tert-butyl-1-(3-methoxyphenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl]-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea (3.4 g, 77%). HPLC: 97%; mp: 78-80; 1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ): ⁇ 7.9-6.8 (m, 15H), 6.4 (s, 1H), 3.7 (s, 3H), 1.4 (s, 9H).
  • Example U 3.82 g; 0.0156 mol
  • p-chlorophenylisocyanate (2.39 g, 0.0156 mol, 1 eq.)
  • purified by trituration with hexane/EtOAc (4:1) and filtered to yield 1-[3-tert-butyl-1-(3-methoxyphenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl]-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea (6.1 g, 98%).
  • Example 39 (2.07 g) was dissolved in CH 2 Cl 2 (20 mL) and cooled to 0° C. with an ice bath. BBr 3 (1 M in CH 2 Cl 2 ; 7.5 mL) was added slowly. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm warm to RT overnight. Additional BBr 3 (1 M in CH 2 Cl 2 , 2 ⁇ 1 mL, 9.5 mmol total added) was added and the reaction was quenched by the addition of MeOH.
  • the starting material 1-[4-(aminomethyl)phenyl]-3-tert-butyl-N-nitroso-1H-pyrazol-5-amine, was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example A utilizing 4-aminobenzamide and 4,4-dim ethyl-3-oxopentanenitrile.
  • a 1 L four-necked round bottom flask was equipped with a stir bar, a source of dry Ar, a heating mantle, and a reflux condenser.
  • the flask was flushed with Ar and charged with the crude material from the previous reaction (12 g, 46.5 mmol; 258.1 g/mol) and anhydrous THF (500 ml).
  • This solution was treated cautiously with LiAlH 4 (2.65 g, 69.8 mmol) and the reaction was stirred overnight.
  • the reaction was heated to reflux and additional LiAlH 4 was added complete (a total of 8.35 g added).
  • a 40 mL vial was equipped with a stir bar, a septum, and a source of Ar.
  • the vial was charged with the crude material from the previous reaction (2 g, 8.2 mmol, 244.17 g/mol) and (15 mL) were cooled to 0 under Ar and di-tert-butylcarbonate (1.9 g, 9.0 mmol) dissolved in CHCl 3 (5 mL) was added drop wise over a 2 min period.
  • the mixture was treated with 1N KOH (2 mL), added over a 2 h period.
  • the resulting emulsion was broken with the addition of saturated NaCl solution, the layers were separated and the aqueous phase extracted with CH 2 Cl 2 (2 ⁇ 1.5 ml).
  • a 40 mL vial was equipped with a septum, a stir bar and a source of Ar, and charged with Example V (2 g, 5.81 mmol), flushed with Ar and dissolved in CHCl 3 (20 mL).
  • the solution was treated with 2-naphthylisocyanate (984 mg, 5.81 mmol) in CHCl 3 (5 mL) and added over 1 min The reaction was stirred for 8 h, and additional 1-naphthylisocyanate (81 mg) was added and the reaction stirred overnight.
  • Example W To a solution of 1-isocyanato-4-methoxy-naphthalene (996 mg) in anhydrous CH 2 Cl 2 (20 mL) of was added Example W (1.23 g). The reaction solution was stirred for 3 h, the resulting white precipitate filtered, treated with 10% HCl and recrystallized from MeOH, and dried in vacuo to yield 1-[3-tert-butyl-1-(4-methoxyphenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl]-3-(1-methoxynaphthalen-4-yl-urea as white crystals (900 mg, 40%).
  • Methyl 4-(3-tert-butyl-5-amino-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)benzoate (3.67 mmol) was prepared from methyl 4-hydrazinobenzoate and pivaloylacetonitrile by the procedure of Regan, et al., J. Med. Chem., 45, 2994 (2002).
  • Example X 1 g was dissolved in CH 2 Cl 2 (100 mL). Saturated sodium bicarbonate (100 mL) was added and the mixture rapidly stirred, cooled in an ice bath and treated with diphosgene (1.45 g) and the heterogeneous mixture stirred for 1 h. The layers were separated and the CH 2 Cl 2 layer treated with tert-butanol (1.07 g) and the solution stirred overnight at RT.
  • Example 41 The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 41 utilizing Example X (1.27 g) and 1-isocyanato-4-methoxy-naphthalene (996 mg) to yield methyl 4- ⁇ 3-tert-butyl-5-[3-(1-methoxynaphthalen-4-yl)ureido]-1H-pyrazol-1-yl ⁇ benzoate as white crystals (845 mg, 36%).
  • Example 59 To a solution of Example 59 (700 mg) in 30 mL of toluene at ⁇ 78° C., was added dropwise a solution of diisobutylaluminum hydride in toluene (1M in toluene, 7.5 mL) over 10 min. The reaction mixture was stirred for 30 min at ⁇ 78° C., and then 30 min at 0° C. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo to dryness and treated with H 2 O. The solid was filtered and treated with acetonitrile.
  • X or Y is O, S, NR6, —NR6SO2-, NR6CO—, alkylene, O—(CH2)n-, NR6-(CH2)n-, wherein one of the methylene units may be substituted with an oxo group, or X or Y is a direct bond; D is taken from the groups identified in Chart I:
  • Example Y 13 g, 53.3 mmol
  • 4,4-dimethyl-3-oxo-pentanenitrile (6.9 g, 55 mol) in ethanol (150 mL) was heated to reflux overnight.
  • the reaction solution was evaporated under reduced pressure.
  • the residue was purified by column chromatography to give 3-[3-(5-amino-3-t-butyl-pyrazol-1-yl)-phenyl]-propionic acid ethyl ester (14.3 g, 45.4 mmol) as a white solid.
  • Example 149u (47 mg, 0.1 mmol) and 2N LiOH (3 mL) in MeOH (3 mL) was stirred at RT overnight.
  • the filtrate was concentrated to afford 3-(3- ⁇ 3-t-butyl-5-[(isoquinoline-1-carbonyl)-amino]-pyrazol-1-yl ⁇ -phenyl)-propionic acid, (39 mg, 87%).
  • Example Z A solution of Example Z (315 mg, 1.0 mmol) and Barton's base (0.5 mL) in anhydrous CH 2 Cl 2 (5 mL) under N 2 was stirred at RT for 30 min, and then added to a solution of naphthalene-1-carbonyl fluoride (348 mg, 0.2 mmol) in anhydrous CH 2 Cl 2 (5 mL). The resulting mixture was stirred at RT overnight. After quenching with water (100 mL), the reaction mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (3 ⁇ 100 mL).
  • Example BB A solution of Example BB (13.8 g, 56.00 mmol) and SOCl 2 (8.27 mL, 0.11 mol) in THF (200 mL) was refluxed for 3 h and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield 5-t-butyl-2-(3-chloromethyl-phenyl)-2H-pyrazol-3-ylamine (14.5 g, 98%) as white powder which was used without further purification.
  • Example EE 100 mg, 0.37 mmol
  • anhydrous DMF 3 mL
  • NaH 18 mg, 0.44 mmol
  • a solution of Example E 160 mg, 0.37 mmol in anhydrous DMF (3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture, which was stirred overnight at RT and subsequently concentrated under reduced pressure to yield a crude solid which was used without further purification.
  • Example FF 60 mg, 0.22 mmol
  • anhydrous DMF 2 mL
  • NaH 11 mg, 0.27 mmol
  • a solution of Example D 100 mg, 0.22 mmol in anhydrous DMF (2 mL) was added to the reaction mixture, which was stirred overnight at RT.
  • Example CC 0.263 g, 1.0 mmol
  • THF 2.0 mL
  • 1-fluoro-4-isocyanato-benzene 0.114 mL, 1.10 mmol
  • THF 5.0 mL
  • the mixture was stirred at RT for 1 h then heated until all solids were dissolved.
  • the mixture was stirred at RT for 3 h and poured into water (20 mL).
  • Example 41 To a solution of Example 41 (100 mg, 0.25 mmol) in acetonitrile (10 mL) was added Example GG (75 mg, 0.30 mmol) and K 2 CO 3 (172 mg, 1.25 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred at 45° C. for 3 h before filtered. After the filtrate was concentrated, the residue was purified by preparative TLC to afford 1-(5-t-Butyl-2- ⁇ 3-[3-(4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-propoxy]-phenyl ⁇ -2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-3-naphthalen-1-yl-urea (31 mg, 23%).
  • Example II (10 mmol) is dissolved in absolute EtOH (50 mL) at RT and Example Y (10.5 mmol) is added dropwise over 5 min. The reaction mixture is stirred for 30 min at RT, poured in water (100 mL) and ethyl acetate (100 mL). After shaking, the organic layer is washed with 5% HCl, water, dried (MgSO 4 ) and concentrated to afford 1-naphthyl 1-(3-(2-(ethoxycarbonyl)ethyl)phenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example JJ is synthesized utilizing Example HH and 2-napthylchloroformate according to the procedure described for Example II to afford (Z)-naphthalen-2-yl-1-ethoxy-4,4-dimethyl-3-oxopentylidenecarbamate.
  • Example 166 is synthesized utilizing Example Y and Example JJ according to the procedure described for Example 79 to afford 2-naphthyl 1-(3-(2-(ethoxycarbonyl)ethyl)phenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example 167 is synthesized utilizing Example 166 according to the procedure described for Example 165 to afford 2-napthyl 1-(3-(2-carboxymethylphenyl)-3-t-butyl-H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example KK is synthesized utilizing Example HH and p-chlorophenylchloroformate according to the procedure described for Example II to afford (Z)-4-chlorophenyl 1-ethoxy-4,4-dimethyl-3-oxopentylidenecarbamate.
  • Example 168 is synthesized utilizing Example Y and Example KK according to the procedure described for Example 164 to afford 4-chlorophenyl 1-(3-(2-(ethoxycarbonyl)ethyl)phenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example 169 is synthesized utilizing Example 168 according to the procedure described for Example 165 to afford 4-chlorophenyl 1-(3-(2-carboxymethylphenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example LL is synthesized utilizing Example HH and p-methoxyphenylchloroformate according to the procedure described for Example II to afford (Z)-4-methoxyphenyl 1-ethoxy-4,4-dimethyl-3-oxopentylidenecarbamate.
  • Example 170 is synthesized utilizing Example Y and Example LL according to the procedure described for Example 164 to afford 4-methoxyphenyl 1-(3-(2-(ethoxycarbonyl)ethyl)phenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example 171 is synthesized utilizing Example 170 according to the procedure described for Example 165 to afford 4-methoxyphenyl 1-(3-(2-carboxyethylphenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example MM is synthesized utilizing Example HH and quinolin-8-yl-chloroformate according to the procedure described for Example II to afford (Z)-quinolin-8-yl 1-ethoxy-4,4-dimethyl-3-oxopentylidenecarbamate
  • Example 172 is synthesized utilizing Example Y and Example MM according to the procedure described for Example 164 to afford quinolin-8-yl 1-(3-(2-(ethoxycarbonyl)ethyl)phenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example 173 is synthesized utilizing Example 172 according to the procedure described for Example 165 to afford quinolin-8-yl 1-(3-(2-carboxyethylphenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example 174 is synthesized utilizing a mixture of 4-methoxy-1-naphthylamine and Example Z according to the procedure described for Example 147 to afford 3-(3- ⁇ 3-t-butyl-5-[3-(4-methoxy-1-naphthyl)-ureido]-pyrazol-1-yl ⁇ -phenyl)-propionic acid ethyl ester.
  • Example 176 is synthesized utilizing a mixture of indoline and Example Z according to the procedure described for Example 147 to afford ethyl 3-(3-(3-t-butyl-5-(indoline-1-carboxamido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)phenyl)propanoate.
  • Example 173 3-(3-(3-t-butyl-5-(indoline-1-carboxamido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)phenyl)propionic acid is synthesized.
  • Example 11 (10 mmol) and Example NN (10.5 mmol) are combined to afford 1-naphthyl 1-(4-(2-(ethoxycarbonyl)ethyl)phenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example 179 is synthesized utilizing Example 178 according to the procedure described for Example 165 to afford 1-napthyl 1-(4-(2-carboxyethylphenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example JJ (10 mmol) and Example NN (10.5 mmol) are combined to afford 2-naphthyl 1-(4-(2-(ethoxycarbonyl)ethyl)phenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example 181 is synthesized utilizing Example 180 according to the procedure described for Example 165 to afford 2-napthyl 1-(4-(2-carboxyethylphenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example KK (10 mmol) and Example NN (10.5 mmol) are combined to afford p-chlorophenyl 1-(4-(2-(ethoxycarbonyl)ethyl)phenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example 183 is synthesized utilizing Example 182 according to the procedure described for Example 165 to afford 4-chlorophenyl 1-(4-(2-carboxyethylphenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example LL (10 mmol) and Example NN (10.5 mmol) are combined to afford p-methoxyphenyl 1-(4-(2-(ethoxycarbonyl)ethyl)phenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example 185 is synthesized utilizing Example 184 according to the procedure described for Example 165 to afford p-methoxyphenyl 1-(4-(2-carboxyethylphenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example HH and 1-naphthylisocyanate are combined utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example II to afford (Z)-1-(1-ethoxy-4,4-dimethyl-3-oxopentylidene)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example PP (10 mmol) and Example OO (10.5 mmol) are combined to afford 3-(3- ⁇ 3-t-butyl-5-[3-(1-naphthyl)-ureido]-pyrazol-1-yl ⁇ -phenoxy)-acetic acid ethyl ester.
  • Example 186 Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example 146 and starting with Example 186, 3-(3- ⁇ 3-t-butyl-5-[3-(1-naphthyl)-ureido]-pyrazol-1-yl ⁇ -phenoxy)-acetic acid is synthesized.
  • Example HH and 4-chlorophenylisocyanate are combined utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example II to afford (Z)-1-(4-chlorophenyl)-3-(1-ethoxy-4,4-dimethyl-3-oxopentylidene)urea
  • Example QQ (10 mmol) and Example OO (10.5 mmol) are combined to afford 3-(3- ⁇ 3-t-butyl-5-[3-(1-4-chlorophenyl)-ureido]-pyrazol-1-yl ⁇ -phenoxy)-acetic acid ethyl ester.
  • Ethyl bromoacetate is reacted with para-nitrophenol under standard conditions to afford ethyl 2-(4-nitrophenoxy)acetate, which is elaborated to ethyl 2-(4-hydrazinophenoxy)acetate using the reduction/oxidation sequence described for Example Y.
  • Example PP (10 mmol) and Example RR (10.5 mmol) are combined to afford 4-(3- ⁇ 3-t-butyl-5-[3-(1-naphthyl)-ureido]-pyrazol-1-yl ⁇ -phenoxy)-acetic acid ethyl ester.
  • Example 190 4-(3- ⁇ 3-t-butyl-5-[3-(1-naphthyl)-ureido]-pyrazol-1-yl ⁇ -phenoxy)-acetic acid is synthesized.
  • Example QQ (10 mmol) and Example RR (10.5 mmol) are combined to afford 4-(3- ⁇ 3-t-butyl-5-[3-(1-4-chlorophenyl)-ureido]-pyrazol-1-yl ⁇ -phenoxy)-acetic acid ethyl ester.
  • Example 192 4-(3- ⁇ 3-t-butyl-5-[3-(14-chlorophenyl)-ureido]-pyrazol-1-yl ⁇ -phenoxy)-acetic acid is synthesized.
  • Example E and Example OO are combined utilizing the procedure for Example 160 to afford 1-(5-t-butyl-2- ⁇ 3-[5-methyl-1,1,4-trioxo-1 ⁇ 6 -[1,2,5]thiadiazolidin-2-ylmethyl]-phenyl ⁇ -2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-3-naphthyl-urea.
  • Example X To a solution of Example X (2.9 g, 10 mmol) in THF (50 mL) was added a solution of 1-naphthyl isocyanate (1.7 g, 10 mmol) in THF (20 mL) at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at RT for 1 h and heated until all solids dissolved. The mixture was then stirred at RT for 3 h and poured into water (200 mL).
  • Example B To a solution of Example B (228 mg, 0.5 mmol) in dry THF (20 mL) was added dropwise a solution of methyl magnesium bromide in toluene/THF (3.6 mL, 5.0 mmol) at ⁇ 78° C. under N 2 . After stirring for 1 h, the mixture was allowed to rise to RT and stirred for another 2 h. The reaction mixture was quenched with saturated NH 4 Cl solution and aqueous HCl solution (10%), extracted with ethyl acetate.
  • Example C To a solution of Example C (220 mg, 0.5 mmol) in dry THF (20 mL) was added dropwise a solution of methyl magnesium bromide in toluene/THF (3.6 mL, 5.0 mmol) at ⁇ 78° C. under N 2 . After stirring for 1 h, the mixture was allowed to rise to RT and stirred for another 2 h. The reaction mixture was quenched with saturated NH 4 Cl and aqueous HCl solution (10%), and extracted with ethyl acetate.
  • Example 195 To a solution of Example 195 (228 mg, 0.5 mmol) in dry THF (20 mL) was added dropwise a solution of methylmagnesium bromide in toluene/THF (3.6 mL, 5.0 mmol) at ⁇ 78° C. under N 2 . After stirring for 1 h, the mixture was allowed to rise to RT and stirred for another 2 h. The reaction mixture was quenched with saturated NH 4 Cl and aqueous HCl solution (10%), extracted with ethyl acetate.
  • Example 57 To a solution of Example 57 (220 mg, 0.5 mmol) in dry THF (20 mL) was added dropwise a solution of methyl magnesium bromide in toluene/THF (3.6 mL, 5.0 mmol) at ⁇ 78° C. under N 2 . After stirring for 1 h, the mixture was allowed to rise to RT and stirred for another 2 h. The reaction mixture was quenched with saturated NH 4 Cl and aqueous HCl solution (10%), and extracted with ethyl acetate.
  • Example PP A mixture of Example PP (22.2 g, 0.1 mol) and 4,4-dimethyl-3-oxo-pentanenitrile (18.7 g, 0.15 mol) in ethanol (250 mL) was heated to reflux overnight. The reaction solution was concentrated under reduced pressure, and the residue purified by column chromatography to afford 2-(3-bromo-phenyl)-5-t-butyl-2H-pyrazol-3-ylamine as a white solid.
  • Example QQ To a mixture of Example QQ (2.94 g, 10 mmol), Pd(OAc) 2 (1 mmol), PPh 3 (20 mmol), and K 2 CO 3 (20 mmol) in MeCN (50 mL) was added 2-methyl-acrylic acid ethyl ester (20 mmol). The resulting mixture was heated to reflux overnight, filtered, concentrated, and the residue was purified by column chromatography to afford 1.2 g of 3-[3-(5-Amino-3-t-butyl-pyrazol-1-yl)-phenyl]-2-methyl-acrylic acid ethyl ester.
  • Example RR 1.2 g, and Pd/C (120 mg, 10%) in methanol (50 mL) was stirred under 40 psi of H 2 at RT overnight, filtered. And concentrated to afford 3-[3-(5-amino-3-t-butyl-pyrazol-1-yl)-phenyl]-2-methyl-propionic acid ethyl ester as a racemate (1.1 g), which was used for the next reaction without further purification.
  • Example SS 100 mg, 0.3 mmol
  • Et 3 N 60 mg, 0.6 mmol
  • CH 2 Cl 2 10 mL
  • 1-isocyanato-naphthalene 77 mg, 0.45 mmol
  • the resulting mixture was stirred at RT overnight, added to water (50 mL), extracted with CH 2 Cl 2 (3 ⁇ 30 mL) and the combined organic extracted were washed with brine, dried (Na 2 SO 4 ), and filtered.
  • Example SS 100 mg, 0.3 mmol
  • Et 3 N 60 mg, 0.6 mmol
  • CH 2 Cl 2 10 mL
  • 1-chloro-4-isocyanato-benzene 77 mg, 0.45 mmol
  • the resulting mixture was stirred at RT overnight, and then added to water (50 mL).
  • the solution was extracted with CH 2 Cl 2 (3 ⁇ 30 mL) and the combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried (Na 2 SO 4 ), and filtered.
  • Example 195 500 mg, 0.83 mmol
  • THF 10 mL
  • LiAlH 4 powder 65 mg, 1.66 mmol

Abstract

Novel compounds and methods of using those compounds for the treatment of inflammatory conditions are provided. In a preferred embodiment, modulation of the activation state of p38 kinase protein comprises the step of contacting the kinase protein with the novel compounds.

Description

    RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/886,329, filed Jul. 6, 2004, which is a continuation-in-part of application Ser. No. 10/746,460 filed Dec. 24, 2003, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/437,487, filed Dec. 31, 2002, Ser. No. 60/437,403, filed Dec. 31, 2002, Ser. No. 60/437,415, filed Dec. 31, 2002, Ser. No. 60/437,304, filed Dec. 31, 2002, and Ser. No. 60/463,804 filed Apr. 18, 2003. These prior applications are incorporated by reference herein.
  • SEQUENCE LISTING
  • The following application contains a sequence listing in computer readable format (CRF). The content of the enclosed CRF is hereby incorporated by reference.
  • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • 1. Field of the Invention
  • The present invention relates to novel compounds and methods of using those compounds to treat anti-inflammatory diseases.
  • 2. Description of the Prior Art
  • Basic research has recently provided the life sciences community with an unprecedented volume of information on the human genetic code and the proteins that are produced by it. In 2001, the complete sequence of the human genome was reported (Lander, E. S. et al. Initial sequencing and analysis of the human genome. Nature (2001) 409:860; Venter, J. C. et al. The sequence of the human genome. Science (2001) 291:1304). Increasingly, the global research community is now classifying the 50,000+ proteins that are encoded by this genetic sequence, and more importantly, it is attempting to identify those proteins that are causative of major, under-treated human diseases.
  • Despite the wealth of information that the human genome and its proteins are providing, particularly in the area of conformational control of protein function, the methodology and strategy by which the pharmaceutical industry sets about to develop small molecule therapeutics has not significantly advanced beyond using native protein active sites for binding to small molecule therapeutic agents. These native active sites are normally used by proteins to perform essential cellular functions by binding to and processing natural substrates or transducing signals from natural ligands. Because these native pockets are used broadly by many other proteins within protein families, drugs which interact with them are often plagued by lack of selectivity and, as a consequence, insufficient therapeutic windows to achieve maximum efficacy. Side effects and toxicities are revealed in such small molecules, either during preclinical discovery, clinical trials, or later in the marketplace. Side effects and toxicities continue to be a major reason for the high attrition rate seen within the drug development process. For the kinase protein family of proteins, interactions at these native active sites have been recently reviewed: see J. Dumas, Protein Kinase Inhibitors: Emerging Pharmacophores 1997-2001, Expert Opinion on Therapeutic Patents (2001) 11: 405-429; J. Dumas, Editor, New challenges in Protein Kinase Inhibition, in Current Topics in Medicinal Chemistry (2002) 2: issue 9.
  • It is known that proteins are flexible, and this flexibility has been reported and utilized with the discovery of the small molecules which bind to alternative, flexible active sites with proteins. For review of this topic, see Teague, Nature Reviews/Drug Discovery, Vol. 2, pp. 527-541 (2003). See also, Wu et al., Structure, Vol. 11, pp. 399-410 (2003). However these reports focus on small molecules which bind only to proteins at the protein natural active sites. Peng et al., Bio. Organic and Medicinal Chemistry Ltrs., Vol. 13, pp. 3693-3699 (2003), and Schindler, et al., Science, Vol. 289, p. 1938 (2000) describe inhibitors of abl kinase. These inhibitors are identified in WO Publication No. 2002/034727. This class of inhibitors binds to the ATP active site while also binding in a mode that induces movement of the kinase catalytic loop. Pargellis et al., Nature Structural Biology, Vol. 9, p. 268 (2002) reported inhibitors p38 alpha-kinase also disclosed in WO Publication No. 00/43384 and Regan et al., J. Medicinal Chemistry, Vol. 45, pp. 2994-3008 (2002). This class of inhibitors also interacts with the kinase at the ATP active site involving a concomitant movement of the kinase activation loop.
  • More recently, it has been disclosed that kinases utilize activation loops and kinase domain regulatory pockets to control their state of catalytic activity. This has been recently reviewed (see, e.g., M. Huse and J. Kuriyan, Cell (2002) 109:275).
  • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention is broadly concerned with new compounds for use in treating anti-inflammatory conditions and methods of treating such conditions. In more detail, the inventive compounds have the formula
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00001
  • wherein:
      • R1 is selected from the group consisting of aryls (preferably C6-C18, and more preferably C6-C12) and heteroaryls;
      • each X and Y is individually selected from the group consisting of —O—, —S—, —NR6—, —NR6SO2—, —NR6CO—, alkynyls (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), alkenyls (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), alkylenes (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), —O(CH2)h—, and —NR6(CH2)h—, where each h is individually selected from the group consisting of 1, 2, 3, or 4, and where for each of alkylenes (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), —O(CH2)h—, and —NR6(CH2)h—, one of the methylene groups present therein may be optionally double-bonded to a side-chain oxo group except that where —O(CH2)h— the introduction of the side-chain oxo group does not form an ester moiety;
      • A is selected from the group consisting of aromatic (preferably C6-C18, and more preferably C6-C12), monocycloheterocyclic, and bicycloheterocyclic rings;
      • D is phenyl or a five- or six-membered heterocyclic ring selected from the group consisting of pyrazolyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, furyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, thienyl, pyridyl, and pyrimidyl;
      • E is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridinyl, and pyrimidinyl;
      • L is selected from the group consisting of —C(O)— and —S(O)2—;
      • j is 0 or 1;
      • m is 0 or 1;
      • n is 0 or 1;
      • p is 0 or 1;
      • q is 0 or 1;
      • t is 0 or 1;
      • Q is selected from the group consisting of
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00002
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00003
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00004
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00005
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00006
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00007
      • each R4 group is individually selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyls (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), aminoalkyls (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), alkoxyalkyls (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), aryls (preferably C6-C18, and more preferably C6-C12), aralkyls (preferably C6-C18, and more preferably C6-C12 and preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), heterocyclyls, and heterocyclylalkyls except when the R4 substituent places a heteroatom on an alpha-carbon directly attached to a ring nitrogen on Q;
      • when two R4 groups are bonded with the same atom, the two R4 groups optionally form an alicyclic or heterocyclic 4-7 membered ring;
      • each R5 is individually selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyls (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), aryls (preferably C6-C18, and more preferably C6-C12), heterocyclyls, alkylaminos (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), arylaminos (preferably C6-C18, and more preferably C6-C12), cycloalkylaminos (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), heterocyclylaminos, hydroxys, alkoxys (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), aryloxys (preferably C6-C18, and more preferably C6-C12), alkylthios (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), arylthios (preferably C6-C18, and more preferably C6-C12), cyanos, halogens, perfluoroalkyls (preferably C1-C8, and more preferably C1-C12), alkylcarbonyls (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), and nitros;
      • each R6 is individually selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyls (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), allyls, and β-trimethylsilylethyl;
      • each R8 is individually selected from the group consisting of alkyls (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), phenyl, naphthyl, aralkyls (wherein the aryl is preferably C6-C18, and more preferably C6-C12, and wherein alkyl is preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), heterocyclyls, and heterocyclylalkyls (wherein the alkyl is preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12);
      • each R9 group is individually selected from the group consisting of —H, —F, and alkyls (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), wherein when two R9 groups are geminal alkyl groups, said geminal alkyl groups may be cyclized to form a 3-6 membered ring;
      • G is alkylene (preferably C1-C8, and more preferably C1-C4), N(R6), O;
      • each Z is individually selected from the group consisting of —O— and —N(R4)—; and
      • each ring of formula (IA) optionally includes one or more of R7, where R7 is a noninterfering substituent individually selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyls (preferably C1-C18 and more preferably C1-C12), aryls (preferably C6-C18, and more preferably C6-C12), heterocyclyls, alkylaminos (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), arylaminos (preferably C6-C18, and more preferably C6-C12), cycloalkylaminos (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), heterocyclylaminos, hydroxys, alkoxys (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), aryloxys (preferably C6-C18, and more preferably C6-C12), alkylthios (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), arthylthios, cyanos, halogens, nitrilos, nitros, alkylsulfinyls (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), alkylsulfonyls (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), aminosulfonyls, and perfluoroalkyls (preferably C1-C18 and more preferably C1-C12).
  • In one preferred embodiment, the compound has the structure of formula (I) except that:
      • when Q is Q-3 or Q-4, then the compound of formula (I) is not
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00008
      • when Q is Q-7, q is 0, and R5 and D are phenyl, then A is not phenyl, oxazolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, pyrazolyl, or imidazolyl;
      • when Q is Q-7, R5 is —OH, Y is —O—, —S—, or —CO—, m is 0, n is 0, p is 0, and A is phenyl, pyridyl, or thiazolyl, then D is not thienyl, thiazolyl, or phenyl;
      • when Q is Q-7, R5 is —OH, m is 0, n is 0, p is 0, t is 0, and A is phenyl, pyridyl, or thiazolyl, then D is not thienyl, thiazolyl, or phenyl;
      • when Q is Q-7, then the compound of formula (I) is not
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00009
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00010
      • when Q is Q-8, then Y is not —CH2O—;
      • when Q is Q-8, the compound of formula (I) is not
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00011
      • when Q is Q-9, then the compound of formula (I) is not
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00012
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00013
      • when Q is Q-10, t is 0, and E is phenyl, then any R7 on E is not an o-alkoxy;
      • when Q is Q-10, then the compound of formula (I) is not
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00014
      • when Q is Q-11, t is 0, and E is phenyl, then any R7 on E is not an o-alkoxy;
      • when Q is Q-11, then the compound of formula (I) is not
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00015
      • when Q is Q-15, then the compound of formula (I) is not
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00016
      • when Q is Q-16 and Y is —NH—, then
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00017
        • of formula (I) is not biphenyl;
      • when Q is Q-16 and Y is —S—, then
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00018
        • of formula (I) is not phenylsulfonylaminophenyl orphenylcarbonylaminophenyl;
      • when Q is Q-16 and Y is —SO2NH—, then the compound of formula (I) is not
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00019
      • when
        • Q is
        • Q-16
        • and
        • Y is —CONH—, then
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00020
        • of formula (I) is not imidazophenyl;
      • when Q is Q-16 and Y is —CONH—, then the compound of formula (I) is not
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00021
      • when Q is Q-16 and t is 0, then
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00022
        • of formula (I) is not phenylcarbonylphenyl, pyrimidophenyl, phenylpyrimidyl, pyrimidyl, or N-pyrolyl;
      • when Q is Q-17, then the compound of formula (I) is not
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00023
      • when Q is Q-21, then the compound of formula (I) is not
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00024
      • when Q is Q-22, then the compound of formula (I) is selected from the group consisting of
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00025
      • when Q is Q-22 and q is 0, then the compound of formula (I) is selected from the group consisting of
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00026
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00027
      • but excluding
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00028
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00029
      • when Q is Q-23, then the compound of formula (I) is not
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00030
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00031
      • when Q is Q-24, Q-25, Q-26, or Q-31, then the compound of formula (I) is selected from the group consisting of
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00032
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00033
        • wherein each W is individually selected from the group consisting of —CH— and —N—;
        • each G1 is individually selected from the group consisting of —O—, —S—, and —N(R4)—; and
        • * denotes the point of attachment to Q-24, Q-25, Q-26, or Q-31 as follows:
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00034
          • wherein each Z is individually selected from the group consisting of —O— and —N(R4)—;
      • when Q is Q-31, then the compound of formula (I) is not
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00035
      • when Q is Q-28 or Q-29 and t is 0, then the compound of formula (I) is not
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00036
      • when Q is Q-28 or Q-29 and Y is an ether linkage, then the compound of formula (I) is not
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00037
      • when Q is Q-28 or Q-29 and Y is —CONH—, then the compound of formula (I) is not
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00038
      • when Q is Q-32, then
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00039
        • is not biphenyl, benzoxazolylphenyl, pyridylphenyl or bipyridyl;
      • when Q is Q-32, Y is —CONH—, q is 0, m is 0, and
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00040
        • of formula (I) is —CONH—, then A is not phenyl;
      • when Q is Q-32, q is 0, m is 0, and
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00041
        • is —CONH—, then the compound of formula (I) is not
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00042
      • when Q is Q-32, D is thiazolyl, q is 0, t is 0, p is 0, n is 0, and m is 0, then A is not phenyl or 2-pyridone;
      • when Q is Q-32, D is oxazolyl or isoxazolyl, q is 0, t is 0, p is 0, n is 0, and m is 0, then A is not phenyl;
      • when Q is Q-32, D is pyrimidyl q is 0, t is 0, p is 0, n is 0, and m is 0, then A is not phenyl;
      • when Q is Q-32 and Y is an ether linkage, then
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00043
        • of formula (I) is not biphenyl or phenyloxazolyl;
      • when Q is Q-32 and Y is —CH═CH—, then
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00044
        • of formula (I) is not phenylaminophenyl;
      • when Q is Q-32, then the compound of formula (I) is not
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00045
      • when Q is Q-35 as shown
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00046
        • wherein G is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —S—, —NR4—, and —CH2—, k is 0 or 1, and u is 1, 2, 3, or 4, then
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00047
        • is selected from the group consisting of
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00048
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00049
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00050
      • except that the compound of formula (I) is not
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00051
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00052
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00053
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00054
  • Even more preferably, R1, as discussed above is selected from the group consisting of 6-5 fused heteroaryls, 6-5 fused heterocyclyls, 5-6 fused heteroaryls, and 5-6 fused heterocyclyls, and even more preferably, R1 is selected from the group consisting of
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00055
      • each R2 is individually selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyls (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), aminos, alkylaminos (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), arylaminos (preferably C6-C18, and more preferably C6-C12), cycloalkylaminos (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), heterocyclylaminos, halogens, alkoxys (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), and hydroxys; and
      • each R3 is individually selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyls (preferably C1-C8, and more preferably C1-C2), alkylaminos (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), arylaminos (preferably C6-C18, and more preferably C6-C12), cycloalkylaminos (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), heterocyclylaminos, alkoxys (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), hydroxys, cyanos, halogens, perfluoroalkyls (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), alkylsulfinyls (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), alkylsulfonyls (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), R4NHSO2—, and —NHSO2R4.
  • Finally, in another preferred embodiment, wherein A is selected from the group consisting of aromatic, monocycloheterocyclic, and bicycloheterocyclic rings; and most preferably phenyl, naphthyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, thienyl, furyl, pyrrolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, oxaxolyl, isoxazolyl, imidazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, indolyl, indazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzotriazolyl, isoquinolyl, quinolyl, benzothiazolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothienyl, pyrazolylpyrimidinyl, imidazopyrimidinyl, purinyl, and
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00056
  • where each W1 is individually selected from the group consisting of —CH— and —N—.
  • An additional class of compounds useful in the invention have the formula

  • A-T-(L)n-(NH)p-D-(E)q-(Y)t-Q  (IB)
  • wherein:
      • Y is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —S—, —NR6—, —NR6SO2—, —NR6CO—, alkynyls (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), alkenyls (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), alkylenes (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), —O(CH2)h—, and —NR6(CH2)h—, where each h is individually selected from the group consisting of 1, 2, 3, or 4, and where for each of alkylenes (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), —O(CH2)h—, and —NR6(CH2)h—, one of the methylene groups present therein may be optionally double-bonded to a side-chain oxo group except that where —O(CH2)h— the introduction of the side-chain oxo group does not form an ester moiety;
      • A is selected from the group consisting of aromatic (preferably C6-C18, and more preferably C6-C12), monocycloheterocyclic, and bicycloheterocyclic rings; and most preferably phenyl, naphthyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, thienyl, furyl, pyrrolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, oxaxolyl, isoxazolyl, imidazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, indolyl, indazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzotriazolyl, isoquinolyl, quinolyl, benzothiazolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothienyl, pyrazolylpyrimidinyl, imidazopyrimidinyl, purinyl, and
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00057
        • where each W1 is individually selected form the group consisting of —CH— and —N—.
      • D is phenyl or a five- or six-membered heterocyclic ring selected from the group consisting of pyrazolyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, furyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, thienyl, pyridyl, and pyrimidyl;
      • E is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridinyl, and pyrimidinyl;
      • L is selected from the group consisting of —C(O)— and —S(O)2—;
      • T is NR6, O, alkylene (preferably C1-C12, more preferably C1-C4), —O(CH2)h—, or —NR6(CH2)h—, where each h is individually selected from the group consisting of 1, 2, 3, or 4, or T is absent wherein A is directly bonded to -(L)n(NH)p-D-(E)q-(Y)t-Q;
      • n is 0 or 1;
      • p is 0 or 1;
      • q is 0 or 1;
      • t is 0 or 1;
      • v is 1, 2, or 3;
      • x is 1 or 2;
      • Q is selected from the group consisting of formulae Q36-Q59, inclusive;
      • each R4 group is individually selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyls (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), aminoalkyls (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), alkoxyalkyls (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), aryls (preferably C6-C18, and more preferably C6-C12), aralkyls (preferably C6-C18, and more preferably C6-C12 and preferably C1-C12), and more preferably C1-C12), heterocyclyls, and heterocyclylalkyls except when the R4 substituent places a heteroatom on an alpha-carbon directly attached to a ring nitrogen on Q;
      • when two R4 groups are bonded with the same atom, the two R4 groups optionally form an alicyclic or heterocyclic 4-7 membered ring;
      • each R6 is individually selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyls (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), allyls, and B-trimethylsilylethyl;
      • each R8 is individually selected from the group consisting of alkyls (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), phenyl, naphthyl, aralkyls (wherein the aryl is preferably C6-C18, and more preferably C6-C12), wherein alkyl is preferably C18, and more preferably C1-C12), heterocyclyls, and heterocyclylalkyls (wherein the alkyl is preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12);
      • each R9 group is individually selected from the group consisting of —H, —F, and alkyls (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), wherein when two R9 groups are geminal alkyl groups, said geminal alkyl groups may be cyclized to form a 3-6 membered ring;
      • each R9 group is individually selected from the group consisting of —F, and alkyls (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), wherein when two R9, groups are geminal alkyl groups, said geminal alkyl groups may be cyclized to form a 3-6 membered ring;
      • each R10 is alkyl or perfluoroalkyl;
      • G is alkylene (preferably C1-C8, and more preferably C1-C4), N(R6), O;
      • each Z is individually selected from the group consisting of —O— and —N(R4)—; and each ring of formula (I) optionally includes one or more of R7′, where R7′ is a substituent individually selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyls (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), aryls (preferably C6-C18, and more preferably C6-C12), heterocyclyls, alkylaminos (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), arylaminos (preferably C6-C18, and more preferably C6-C12), cycloalkylaminos (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), heterocyclylaminos, hydroxys, alkoxys (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), perfluoroalkoxys (preferably C1-C8, more preferably C1-C4), aryloxys (preferably C6-C18, and more preferably C6-C12), alkylthios (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), arthylthios, cyanos, halogens, nitrilos, nitros, alkylsulfinyls (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), alkylsulfonyls (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12), aminosulfonyls, perfluoroalkyls (preferably C1-C18, and more preferably C1-C12);
        • aminooxaloylamino; alkylaminooxaloylamino; dialkylaminooxaloylamino; morpholinooxaloylamino; piperazinooxaloylamino; alkoxycarbonylamino; heterocyclyloxycarbonylamino; heterocyclylalkyloxycarbonylamino; heterocyclylcarbonylamino; heterocyclylalkylcarbonylamino; aminoalkyloxycarbonylamino; alkylaminoalkyloxycarbonylamino; or dialkylaminoalkyloxycarbonylamino.
  • In a preferred embodiment, A as described above is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, thienyl, furyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, thiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, oxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, imidazolyl, indolyl, indazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzotriazolyl, isoquinolyl, quinolyl, benzothiazolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothienyl, pyrazolylpyrimidinyl, imidazopyrimidinyl, purinyl, and
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00058
  • where each W1 is individually selected from the group consisting of —CH— and —N—.
  • Q groups Q-36 through Q-59 are set forth below. In an additionally preferred embodiment, Q is taken from Q-37, Q-39, Q-41, Q-42, Q-43, Q-44, Q-47, Q-48, Q-54, and Q-57; in a more preferred embodiment, Q is taken from Q-39, Q-41, Q-42, Q-43, Q-44, Q-47, Q-48, and Q-54.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00059
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00060
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00061
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00062
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00063
  • With respect to the method of using the novel compounds, the activation state of a kinase is determined by the interaction of switch control ligands and complemental switch control pockets. One conformation of the kinase may result from the switch control ligand's interaction with a particular switch control pocket while another conformation may result from the ligand's interaction with a different switch control pocket. Generally interaction of the ligand with one pocket, such as the “on” pocket, results in the kinase assuming an active conformation wherein the kinase is biologically active. Similarly, an inactive conformation (wherein the kinase is not biologically active) is assumed when the ligand interacts with another of the switch control pockets, such as the “off” pocket. The switch control pocket can be selected from the group consisting of simple, composite and combined switch control pockets. Interaction between the switch control ligand and the switch control pockets is dynamic and therefore, the ligand is not always interacting with a switch control pocket. In some instances, the ligand is not in a switch control pocket (such as occurs when the protein is changing from an active conformation to an inactive conformation). In other instances, such as when the ligand is interacting with the environment surrounding the protein in order to determine with which switch control pocket to interact, the ligand is not in a switch control pocket. Interaction of the ligand with particular switch control pockets is controlled in part by the charge status of the amino acid residues of the switch control ligand. When the ligand is in a neutral charge state, it interacts with one of the switch control pockets and when it is in a charged state, it interacts with the other of the switch control pockets. For example, the switch control ligand may have a plurality of OH groups and be in a neutral charge state. This neutral charge state results in a ligand that is more likely to interact with one of the switch control pockets through hydrogen boding between the OH groups and selected residues of the pocket, thereby resulting in whichever protein conformation results from that interaction. However, if the OH groups of the switch control ligand become charged through phosphorylation or some other means, the propensity of the ligand to interact with the other of the switch control pockets will increase and the ligand will interact with this other switch control pocket through complementary covalent binding between the negatively or positively charged residues of the pocket and ligand. This will result in the protein assuming the opposite conformation assumed when the ligand was in a neutral charge state and interacting with the other switch control pocket.
  • Of course, the conformation of the protein determines the activation state of the protein and can therefore play a role in protein-related diseases, processes, and conditions. For example, if a metabolic process requires a biologically active protein but the protein's switch control ligand remains in the switch control pocket i.e. the “off” pocket) that results in a biologically inactive protein, that metabolic process cannot occur at a normal rate. Similarly, if a disease is exacerbated by a biologically active protein and the protein's switch control ligand remains in the switch control pocket (i.e. the “on” pocket) that results in the biologically active protein conformation, the disease condition will be worsened. Accordingly, as demonstrated by the present invention, selective modulation of the switch control pocket and switch control ligand by the selective administration of a molecule will play an important role in the treatment and control of protein-related diseases, processes, and conditions.
  • One aspect of the invention provides a method of modulating the activation state of a kinase, preferably p38 α-kinase and including both the consensus wild type sequence and disease polymorphs thereof. The activation state is generally selected from an upregulated or downregulated state. The method generally comprises the step of contacting the kinase with a molecule having the general formula (I). When such contact occurs, the molecule will bind to a particular switch control pocket and the switch control ligand will have a greater propensity to interact with the other of the switch control pockets (i.e., the unoccupied one) and a lesser propensity to interact with the occupied switch control pocket. As a result, the protein will have a greater propensity to assume either an active or inactive conformation (and consequently be upregulated or downregulated), depending upon which of the switch control pockets is occupied by the molecule. Thus, contacting the kinase with a molecule modulates that protein's activation state. The molecule can act as an antagonist or an agonist of either switch control pocket. The contact between the molecule and the kinase preferably occurs at a region of a switch control pocket of the kinase and more preferably in an interlobe oxyanion pocket of the kinase. In some instances, the contact between the molecule and the pocket also results in the alteration of the conformation of other adjacent sites and pockets, such as an ATP active site. Such an alteration can also effect regulation and modulation of the active state of the protein. Preferably, the region of the switch control pocket of the kinase comprises-an-amino acid residue sequence operable for binding to the Formula I molecule. Such binding can occur between the molecule and a specific region of the switch control pocket with preferred regions including the α-C helix, the α-D helix, the catalytic loop, the activation loop, and the C-terminal residues or C-lobe residues (all residues located downstream (toward the C-end) from the Activation loop), the glycine rich loop, and combinations thereof. When the binding region is the α-C helix, one preferred binding sequence in this helix is the sequence IIHXKRXXREXXLLXXM, (SEQ ID NO. 2). When the binding region is the catalytic loop, one preferred binding sequence in this loop is DIIHRD (SEQ ID NO. 3). When the binding region is the activation loop, one preferred binding sequence in this loop is a sequence selected from the group consisting of DFGLARHTDD (SEQ ID NO.4), EMTGYVATRWYR (SEQ ID NO. 5), and combinations thereof. When the binding region is in the C-lobe residues, one preferred binding sequence is WMHY (SEQ ID NO. 6). When the binding region is in the glycine rich loop one preferred binding sequence is YGSV (SEQ ID NO. 7). When a biologically inactive protein conformation is desired, molecules which interact with the switch control pocket that normally results in a biologically active protein conformation (when interacting with the switch control ligand) will be selected. Similarly, when a biologically active protein conformation is desired, molecules which interact with the switch control pocket that normally results in a biologically inactive protein conformation (when interacting with the switch control ligand) will be selected. Thus, the propensity of the protein to assume a desired conformation will be modulated by administration of the molecule. In preferred forms, the molecule will be administered to an individual undergoing treatment for a condition selected from the group consisting of human inflammation, rheumatoid arthritis, rheumatoid spondylitis, ostero-arthritis, asthma, gouty arthritis, sepsis, septic shock, endotoxic shock, Gram-negative sepsis, toxic shock syndrome, adult respiratory distress syndrome, stroke, reperfusion injury, neural trauma, neural ischemia, psoriasis, restenosis, chronic pulmonary inflammatory disease, bone resorptive diseases, graft-versus-host reaction, Chron's disease, ulcerative colitis, inflammatory bowel disease, pyresis, and combinations thereof. In such forms, it will be desired to select molecules that interact with the switch control pocket that generally leads to a biologically active protein conformation so that the protein will have the propensity to assume the biologically inactive form and thereby alleviate the condition. It is contemplated that the molecules of the present invention will be administrable in any conventional form including oral, parenteral, inhalation, and subcutaneous. It is preferred for the administration to be in the oral form. Preferred molecules include the preferred compounds of formula (I), as discussed above.
  • Another aspect of the present invention provides a method of treating an inflammatory condition of an individual comprising the step of administering a molecule having the general formula (I) to the individual. Such conditions are often the result of an overproduction of the biologically active form of a protein, including kinases. The administering step generally includes the step of causing said molecule to contact a kinase involved with the inflammatory process, preferably p38 α-kinase. When the contact is between the molecule and a kinase, the contact preferably occurs in an interlobe oxyanion pocket of the kinase that includes an amino acid residue sequence operable for binding to the Formula I molecule. Preferred binding regions of the interlobe oxyanion pocket include the α-C helix region, the α-D helix region, the catalytic loop, the activation loop, the C-terminal residues, the glycine rich loop residues, and combinations thereof. When the binding region is the α-C helix, one preferred binding sequence in this helix is the sequence IIHXKRXXREXXLLXXM, (SEQ ID NO. 2). When the binding region is the catalytic loop, one preferred binding sequence in this loop is DIIHRD (SEQ ID NO. 3). When the binding region is the activation loop, one preferred binding sequence in this loop is a sequence selected from the group consisting of DFGLARHTDD (SEQ ID NO.4), EMTGYVATRWYR (SEQ ID NO. 5), and combinations thereof. Such a method permits treatment of the condition by virtue of the modulation of the activation state of a kinase by contacting the kinase with a molecule that associates with the switch control pocket that normally leads to a biologically active form of the kinase when interacting with the switch control ligand. Because the ligand cannot easily interact with the switch control pocket associated with or occupied by the molecule, the ligand tends to interact with the switch control pocket leading to the biologically inactive form of the protein, with the attendant result of a decrease in the amount of biologically active protein. Preferably, the inflammatory condition is selected from the group consisting of human inflammation, rheumatoid arthritis, rheumatoid spondylitis, ostero-arthritis, asthma, gouty arthritis, sepsis, septic shock, endotoxic shock, Gram-negative sepsis, toxic shock syndrome, adult respiratory distress syndrome, stroke, reperfusion injury, neural trauma, neural ischemia, psoriasis, restenosis, chronic pulmonary inflammatory disease, bone resorptive diseases, graft-versus-host reaction, Chron's disease, ulcerative colitis, inflammatory bowel disease, pyresis, and combinations thereof. As with the other methods of the invention, the molecules may be administered in any conventional form, with any convention excipients or ingredients. However, it is preferred to administer the molecule in an oral dosage form. Preferred molecules are again selected from the group consisting of the preferred formula (I) compounds discussed above.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic representation of a naturally occurring mammalian protein in accordance with the invention including “on” and “off” switch control pockets 102 and 104, respectively, a transiently modifiable switch control ligand 106, and an active ATP site 108;
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic representation of the protein of FIG. 1, wherein the switch control ligand 106 is illustrated in a binding relationship with the off switch control pocket 104, thereby causing the protein to assume a first biologically downregulated conformation;
  • FIG. 3 is a view similar to that of FIG. 1, but illustrating the switch control ligand 106 in its charged-modified condition wherein the OH groups 110 of certain amino acid residues have been phosphorylated;
  • FIG. 4 is a view similar to that of FIG. 2, but depicting the protein wherein the phosphorylated switch control ligand 106 is in a binding relationship with the on switch control pocket 102, thereby causing the protein to assume a second biologically-active conformation different than the first conformation of FIG. 2;
  • FIG. 4 a is an enlarged schematic view illustrating a representative binding between the phosphorylated residues of the switch control ligand 106, and complemental residues Z+ from the on switch control pocket 102;
  • FIG. 5 is a view similar to that of FIG. 1, but illustrating in schematic form possible small molecule compounds 116 and 118 in a binding relationship with the off and on switch control pockets 104 and 102, respectively;
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic view of the protein in a situation where a composite switch control pocket 120 is formed with portions of the switch control ligand 106 and the on switch control pocket 102, and with a small molecule 122 in binding relationship with the composite pocket; and
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic view of the protein in a situation where a combined switch control pocket 124 is formed with portions of the on switch control pocket 102, the switch control ligand sequence 106, and the active ATP site 108, and with a small molecule 126 in binding relationship with the combined switch control pocket.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS
  • The present invention provides a way of rationally developing new small molecule modulators which interact with naturally occurring proteins (e.g., mammalian, and especially human proteins) in order to modulate the activity of the proteins. Novel-protein-small molecule adducts are also provided. The invention preferably makes use of naturally occurring proteins having a conformational property whereby the proteins change their conformations in vivo with a corresponding change in protein activity. For example, a given enzyme protein in one conformation may be biologically upregulated, while in another conformation, the same protein may be biologically downregulated. The invention preferably makes use of one mechanism of conformation change utilized by naturally occurring proteins, through the interaction of what are termed “switch control ligands” and “switch control pockets” within the protein.
  • As used herein, “switch control ligand” means a region or domain within a naturally occurring protein and having one or more amino acid residues therein which are transiently modified in vivo between individual states by biochemical modification, typically phosphorylation, sulfation, acylation or oxidation. Similarly, “switch control pocket” means a plurality of contiguous or non-contiguous amino acid residues within a naturally occurring protein and comprising residues capable of binding in vivo with transiently modified residues of a switch control ligand in one of the individual states thereof in order to induce or restrict the conformation of the protein and thereby modulate the biological activity of the protein, and/or which is capable of binding with a non-naturally occurring switch control modulator molecule to induce or restrict a protein conformation and thereby modulate the biological activity of the protein.
  • A protein-modulator adduct in accordance with the invention comprises a naturally occurring protein having a switch control pocket with a non-naturally occurring molecule bound to the protein at the region of said switch control pocket, said molecule serving to at least partially regulate the biological activity of said protein by inducing or restricting the conformation of the protein. Preferably, the protein also has a corresponding switch control ligand, the ligand interacting in vivo with the pocket to regulate the conformation and biological activity of the protein such that the protein will assume a first conformation and a first biological activity upon the ligand-pocket interaction, and will assume a second, different conformation and biological activity in the absence of the ligand-pocket interaction.
  • The nature of the switch control ligand/switch control pocket interaction may be understood from a consideration of schematic FIGS. 1-4. Specifically, in FIG. 1, a protein 100 is illustrated in schematic form to include an “on” switch control pocket 102, and “off” switch control pocket 104, and a switch control ligand 106. In addition, the schematically depicted protein also includes an ATP active site 108. In the exemplary protein of FIG. 1, the ligand 106 has three amino acid residues with side chain OH groups 110. The off pocket 104 contains corresponding X residues 112 and the on pocket 102 has Z residues 114. In the exemplary instance, the protein 100 will change its conformation depending upon the charge status of the OH groups 110 on ligand 106, i.e., when the OH groups are unmodified, a neutral charge is presented, but when these groups are phosphorylated a negative charge is presented.
  • The functionality of the pockets 102, 104 and ligand 106 can be understood from a consideration of FIGS. 2-4. In FIG. 2, the ligand 106 is shown operatively interacted with the off pocket 104 such that the OH groups 110 interact with the X residues 112 forming a part of the pocket 104. Such interaction is primarily by virtue of hydrogen bonding between the OH groups 110 and the residues 112. As seen, this ligand/pocket interaction causes the protein 100 to assume a conformation different from that seen in FIG. 1 and corresponding to the off or biologically downregulated conformation of the protein.
  • FIG. 3 illustrates the situation where the ligand 106 has shifted from the off pocket interaction conformation of FIG. 2 and the OH groups 110 have been phosphorylated, giving a negative charge to the ligand. In this condition, the ligand has a strong propensity to interact with on pocket 102, to thereby change the protein conformation to the on or biologically upregulated state (FIG. 4). FIG. 4 a illustrates that the phosphorylated groups on the ligand 106 are attracted to positively charged residues 114 to achieve an ionic-like stabilizing bond. Note that in the on conformation of FIG. 4, the protein conformation is different than the off conformation of FIG. 2, and that the ATP active site is available and the protein is functional as a kinase enzyme.
  • FIGS. 1-4 illustrate a simple situation where the protein exhibits discrete pockets 102 and 104 and ligand 106. However, in many cases a more complex switch control pocket pattern is observed. FIG. 6 illustrates a situation where an appropriate pocket for small molecule interaction is formed from amino acid residues taken both from ligand 106 and, for example, from pocket 102. This is termed a “composite switch control pocket” made up of residues from both the ligand 106 and a pocket, and is referred to by the numeral 120. A small molecule 122 is illustrated which interacts with the pocket 120 for protein modulation purposes.
  • Another more complex switch pocket is depicted in FIG. 7 wherein the pocket includes residues from on pocket 102, and ATP site 108 to create what is termed a “combined switch control pocket.” Such a combined pocket is referred to as numeral 124 and may also include residues from ligand 106. An appropriate small molecule 126 is illustrated with pocket 124 for protein modulation purposes.
  • It will thus be appreciated that while in the simple pocket situation of FIGS. 1-4, the small molecule will interact with the simple pocket 102 or 104, in the more complex situations of FIGS. 6 and 7 the interactive pockets are in the regions of the pockets 120 or 124. Thus, broadly the small molecules interact “at the region” of the respective switch control pocket.
  • Materials and Methods General Synthesis of Compounds
  • In the synthetic schemes of this section, q is 0 or 1. When q=0, the substituent is replaced by a synthetically non-interfering group R7.
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is taken from Q-1 or Q-2 and Y is alkylene are prepared according to the synthetic route shown in Scheme 1.1. Reaction of isothiocyanate 1 with chlorine, followed by addition of isocyanate 2 affords 3-oxo-thiadiazolium salt 3. Quenching of the reaction with air affords compounds of Formula I-4. Alternatively, reaction of isothiocyanate 1 with isothiocyanate 5 under the reaction conditions gives rise to compounds of Formula I-7. See A. Martinez et al, Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (2002) 45: 1292.
  • Intermediates 1, 2 and 5 are commercially available or prepared according to Scheme 1.2. Reaction of amine 8 with phosgene or a phosgene equivalent affords isocyanate 2. Similarly, reaction of amine 8 with thiophosgene affords isothiocyanate 5. Amine 8 is prepared by palladium(0)-catalyzed amination of 9 wherein M is a group capable of oxidative insertion into palladium(0), according to methodology reported by S. Buchwald. See M. Wolter et al, Organic Letters (2002) 4:973; B. H. Yang and S. Buchwald, Journal of Organometallic Chemistry (1999) 576(1-2):125. In this reaction sequence, P is a suitable amine protecting group. Use of and removal of amine protecting groups is accomplished by methodology reported in the literature (Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, Peter G. M. Wutts, Theodora Greene (Editors) 3rd edition (April 1999) Wiley, John & Sons, Incorporated; ISBN: 0471160199). Starting compounds 9 are commercially available or readily prepared by one of ordinary skill in the art: See March's Advanced Organic Chemistry: Reactions, Mechanisms, and Structure, Michael B. Smith & Jerry March (Editors) 5th edition (January 2001) Wiley John & Sons; ISBN: 0471585890.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00064
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00065
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is taken from Q1 or Q-2 and Y is alkylene are also available via the synthetic route shown in Scheme 1.3. Reaction of amine 8 with isocyanate or isothiocyanate 2a yields the urea/thiourea 8a which can be cyclized by the addition of chlorocarbonyl sulfenyl chloride. See GB1115350 and U.S. Pat. No. 3,818,024, Revankar et. al U.S. Pat. No. 4,093,624, and Klayman et. al JOC 1972, 37(10), 1532 for further details. Where R4 is a readily removable protecting group (e.g. R=3,4-d-methoxybenzyl amine), the action of mild, acidic deprotection conditions such as CAN or TFA will reveal the parent ring system of I-4 (X═O) and I-7 (X═S).
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00066
  • I-7 is also available as shown in Scheme 1.4. Condensation of isocyanate or isothiocyanate 2a with amine R5NH2 yields urea/thiourea 2b, which, when reacted with chlorocarbonyl sulfenyl chloride according to GB1115350 and U.S. Pat. No. 3,818,024 yields 2c. Where R4 is a readily removable protecting group (e.g. R=3,4-d-methoxybenzyl amine), the action of mild, acidic deprotection conditions such as CAN or TFA will reveal the parent ring system of 2d. Reaction of 2d with NaH in DMF, and displacement wherein M is a suitable leaving group such as chloride, bromide or iodide yields I-4 (X═O) and I-7 (X═S).
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00067
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is taken from Q-1′ or Q-2′ and Y is alkylene are available via the synthetic route shown in Scheme 1.3. Condensation of isocyanate or isothiocyanate 2a with ammonia yields urea/thiourea 2e, which, when reacted with chlorocarbonyl sulfenyl chloride according to GB1115350 and U.S. Pat. No. 3,818,024 yields 2f. Reaction of 2f with NaH in DMF, and displacement wherein M is a suitable leaving group such as chloride, bromide or iodide yields yields I-4′ (X═O) and I-7′ (X═S).
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00068
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is taken from Q-3 or Q4 and Y is alkylene, are prepared according to the synthetic route shown in Schemes 2.1 and 2.2, respectively. Reaction of 12, wherein M is a suitable leaving group, with the carbamate-protected hydrazine 13 affords intermediate 14. Reaction of 14 with an isocyanate gives rise to intermediate 15. Thermal cyclization of 15 affords 1,2,4-thiazolidinedione of Formula I-16. By analogy, scheme 2.2 illustrates the preparation of 3-thio-5-oxo-1,2,4-thiazolidines of Formula I-18 by reaction of intermediate 14 with an isothiocyanate and subsequent thermal cyclization.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00069
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00070
  • Intermediates 12 wherein p is 1 are readily available or are prepared by reaction of 19 with carbamates 10 under palladium(0)-catalyzed conditions. M1 is a group which oxidatively inserts palladium(0), preferably iodo or bromo, and is of greater reactivity than M. Compounds 19 are either commercially available or prepared by one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00071
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein D is taken from Q-3 or Q-4 and Y is alkylene, are also prepared according to the synthetic route shown in Scheme 2.4. Oxidation of amine R4NH2 to the corresponding hydrazine, condensation with ethyl chloroformate subsequent heating yields 1,2,4-thiazolidinedione 15a. After the action of NaH in DMF, displacement wherein M is a suitable leaving group such as chloride, bromide or iodide yields I-16 (X═O) and I-18 (X═S).
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00072
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein D is taken from D-3′ or D-4′ and Y is alkylene, are also prepared according to the synthetic route shown in Scheme 2.4. When R5 is a readily removable protecting group (e.g. R=3,4-d-methoxybenzyl amine), the action of mild, acidic deprotection conditions such as CAN or TFA on 15a will reveal 1,2,4-thiazolidinedione 15b. After deprotonation of 15b by NaH in DMF, displacement wherein M is a suitable leaving group such as chloride, bromide or iodide yields I-16′ (X═O) and I-18′ (X═S).
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is taken from Q-5 or Q-6 and Y is alkylene are prepared according to the synthetic route shown in Scheme 3. Reaction of hydrazine 20 with chlorosulfonylisocyanate and base, such as triethylamine, gives rise to a mixture of intermediates 21A and 21B which are not isolated but undergo cyclization in situ to afford compounds of Formulae I-22A and I-22B. Compounds I-22A and I-22B are separated by chromatography or fractional crystallization. Optionally, compounds I-22A and I-22B can undergo Mitsunobu reaction with alcohols R4OH to give compounds of Formulae I-23A and I-23B. Compounds 20 are prepared by acid-catalyzed deprotection of t-butyl carbamates of structure 14 wherein R10 is t-butyl.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00073
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is Q-7 and Y is alkylene are prepared as shown in Scheme 4. Reaction of amine 8 with maleimide 24 wherein M is a suitable leaving group, affords compounds of Formula I-25. Reaction of compound 26, wherein M is a group which can oxidatively insert Pd(0), can participate in a Heck reaction with maleimide 27, affording compounds of Formula I-28. Maleimides 24 and 27 are commercially available or prepared by one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00074
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is Q-8 and Y is alkylene are prepared as shown in Scheme 5, according to methods reported by M. Tremblay et al, Journal of Combinatorial Chemistry (2002) 4:429. Reaction of polymer-bound activated ester 29 (polymer linkage is oxime activated-ester) with chlorosulfonylisocyante and t-butanol affords N—BOC sulfonylurea 30. Subjection of 30 to the Mitsunobu reaction with R4OH gives rise to 31. BOC-group removal with acid, preferably trifluoroacetic acid, and then treatment with base, preferably triethylamine, provides the desired sulfahydantoin I-32. Optionally, intermediate 30 is treated with acid, preferably trifluoroacetic acid, to afford the N-unsubstituted sulfahydantoin I-33.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00075
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is Q-8 and Y is alkylene are also prepared as shown in Scheme 5a. Amine 8 is condensed with the glyoxal hemiester to yield 31a. Reaction of chlorosulphonyl isocyanate first with benzyl alcohol then 31a yields 31b, which after heating yields I-32.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00076
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is taken from Q-8′, are prepared according to the synthetic route shown in Scheme 5.2. Formation of 31c by the method of Muller and DuBois JOC 1989, 54, 4471 and its deprotonation with NaH/DMF or NaH/DMF and subsequently alkylation wherein M is a suitable leaving group such as chloride, bromide or iodide yields I-32′. Alternatively, I-32′ is also available as shown in Scheme 5.3. Mitsunobu reaction of boc-sulfamide amino ethyl ester with alcohol 8b (made by methods analogous to that for amine 8) yields 31c, which after Boc removal with 2N HCl in dioxane is cyclized by the action of NaH on 31d results in I-32′.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00077
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is Q-9 and Y is alkylene are prepared as shown in Scheme 6. Reaction of polymer-bound amino acid ester 34 with an isocyanate affords intermediate urea 35. Treatment of 35 with base, preferably pyridine or triethylamine, with optional heating, gives rise to compounds of Formula I-36.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00078
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is Q-9 and Y is alkylene are also prepared as shown in Scheme 6.1. Reaction of aldehyde 8c under reductive amination conditions with the t-butyl ester of glycine yields 35a. Isocyanate 2a is condensed with p-nitrophenol (or the corresponding R4NH2 amine is condensed with p-nitrophenyl chloroformate) to yield the carbamic acid p-nitrophenyl ester, which when reacted with deprotonated 35a and yields the urea that when deprotected with acid yields 35b. Formula I-36 is directly available from 35b by the action of NaH and heat.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00079
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is taken from Q-9′, are prepared according to the synthetic route shown in Scheme 6.2. Formation of 35c by the method described in JP10007804A2 and Zvilichovsky and Zucker, Israel Journal of Chemistry, 1969, 7(4), 547-54 and its deprotonation with NaH/DMF or NaH/DMF and its subsequent displacement of M, wherein M is a suitable leaving group such as chloride, bromide or iodide, yields I-36′.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00080
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is Q-10 or Q-11, and Y is alkylene are prepared as shown in Schemes 7.1 and 7.2, respectively. Treatment of alcohol 37 (Z=O) or amine 37 (Z=NH) with chlorosulfonylisocyanate affords intermediate carbamate or urea of structure 38. Treatment of 38 with an amine of structure HN(R4)2 and base, preferably triethylamine or pyridine, gives sulfonylureas of Formula I-39. Reaction of chlorosulonylisocyanate with an alcohol (Z=O) or amine (Z=NR4) 40 affords intermediate 41. Treatment of 41 with an amine 8 and base, preferably triethylamine or pyridine, gives sulfonylureas of Formula I-42.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00081
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00082
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is taken from Q-12 are prepared according to the synthetic route shown in Scheme 8. Alkylation of pyridine 43 wherein TIPS is tri-isopropylsilyl, under standard conditions (K2CO3, DMF, R4—I or Mitsunobu conditions employing R4—OH) yields pyridine derivative 44 which is reacted with compound 12, wherein M is a suitable leaving group, to afford pyridones of formula I-45.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00083
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is taken from Q-13 are prepared according to the synthetic route shown in Scheme 9. Starting from readily available pyridine 46 alkylation under standard conditions (K2CO3, DMF, R4—I or Mitsunobu conditions employing R4—OH) yields pyridine derivative 47. N-alkylation with K2CO3, DMF, R4—I affords pyridones of formula 48. Intermediate 48 is partitioned to undergo a Heck reaction, giving I-49, a Buchwald amination reaction, giving I-51; or a Buchwald Cu(I) catalyzed O-arylation reaction, to give I-52. The Heck reaction product I-49 may be optionally hydrogenated to afford the saturated compound I-50. Wherein the phenyl ether R4 group is methyl, compounds of formula I-49, I-50, I-51, or I-52 are treated with boron tribromide or lithium chloride to afford compounds of Formula I-53, wherein R4 is hydrogen.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00084
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is taken from Q-14 are prepared according to the synthetic route shown in Scheme 10. Starting from readily available pyridine 54 alkylation under standard conditions (K2CO3, DMF, R4—I or Mitsunobu conditions employing R4—OH) yields pyridine derivative 55. N-alkylation with K2CO3, DMF, R4—I affords pyridones of formula 56. Intermediate 56, wherein M is a suitable leaving group, preferably bromine or chlorine, is partitioned to undergo a Heck reaction, giving I-57; a Buchwald amination reaction, giving I-59; or a Buchwald Cu(I) catalyzed O-arylation reaction, to give I-60. The Heck reaction product I-57 may be optionally hydrogenated to afford the saturated compound I-58. Wherein R4 is methyl, compounds of formula I-57, I-58, I-59, or I-60 are treated with boron tribromide or lithium chloride to afford compounds of Formula I-61, wherein R4 is hydrogen.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00085
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is taken from Q-15 are prepared according to the synthetic routes shown in Schemes 11 and 12. Starting esters 62 are available from the corresponding secoacids via TBS-ether and ester formation under standard conditions. Reaction of protected secoester 62 with Meerwin's salt produces the vinyl ether 63 as a pair of regioisomers. Alternatively, reaction of 62 with dimethylamine affords the vinylogous carbamate 64. Formation of the dihydropyrimidinedione 66 proceeds by condensation with urea 65 with azeotropic removal of dimethylamine or methanol. Dihydropyrimidinedione 66 may optionally be further substituted by Mitsunobu reaction with alcohols R4OH to give rise to compounds 67.
  • Scheme 12 illustrates the further synthetic elaboration of intermediates 67. Removal of the silyl protecting group (TBS) is accomplished by treatment of 67 with fluoride (tetra-n-butylammonium fluoride or cesium fluoride) to give primary alcohols 68. Reaction of 68 with isocyanates 2 gives rise to compounds of Formula I-69. Alternatively, reaction of 68 with [R6O2C(NH)p]q-D-E-M, wherein M is a suitable leaving group, affords compounds of Formula I-70. Oxidation of 68 using the Dess-Martin periodinane (D. Dess, J. Martin, J. Am. Chem. Soc. (1991) 113:7277) or tetra-n-alkyl perruthenate (W. Griffith, S. Ley, Aldrichimica Acta (1990) 23:13) gives the aldehydes 71. Reductive amination of 71 with amines 8 gives rise to compounds of Formula I-72. Alternatively, aldehydes 71 may be reacted with ammonium acetate under reductive alkylation conditions to give rise to the primary amine 73. Reaction of 73 with isocyanates 2 affords compounds of Formula I-74.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00086
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is taken from Q-16 are prepared according to the synthetic routes shown in Schemes 13 and 14. Starting esters 75 are available from the corresponding secoacids via TBS-ether and ester formation under standard conditions. Reaction of protected secoester 75 with Meerwin's salt produces the vinyl ether 76 as a pair of regioisomers. Alternatively, reaction of 75 with dimethylamine affords the vinylogous carbamate 77. Formation of the dihydropyrimidinedione 78 proceeds by condensation with urea 65 with azeotropic removal of dimethylamine or methanol. Dihydropyrimidinedione 78 may optionally be further substituted by Mitsunobu reaction with alcohols R4OH to give rise to compounds 79. Compounds of Formulae I-81, I-82, I-84, and I-86 are prepared as shown in Scheme 14 by analogy to the sequence previously described in Scheme 12.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00087
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00088
  • Alkyl acetoacetates 87 are commercially available and are directly converted into the esters 88 as shown in Scheme 15. Treatment of 87 with NaHMDS in THF, followed by quench with formaldehyde and TBSCl (n=1) or Q-(CH2)n-OTBS (n=2-4), gives rise to compounds 88.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00089
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is taken from Q-17 are prepared according to the synthetic routes shown in Schemes 16.1 and 16.2, and starts with the BOC-protected hydrazine 13, which is converted to the 1,2-disubstituted hydrazine 89 by a reductive alkylation with a glyoxal derivative mediated by sodium cyanoborohydride and acidic workup. Condensation of 89 with diethyl malonate in benzene under reflux yields the heterocycle 90. Oxidation with N2O4 in benzene (see Cardillo, Merlini and Boeri Gazz. Chim. Ital., (1966) 9:8) to the nitromalonohydrazide 91 and further treatment with P2O5 in benzene (see: Cardillo, G. et al, Gazz. Chim. Ital. (1966) 9:973-985) yields the tricarbonyl 92. Alternatively, treatment of 90 with Brederick's reagent (t-BuOCH(N(Me2)2, gives rise to 92, which is subjected to ozonolysis, with a DMS and methanol workup, to afford the protected tricarbonyl 92. Compound 92 is readily deprotected by the action of CsF in THF to yield the primary alcohol 94. Alcohol 94 is optionally converted into the primary amine 95 by a sequence involving tosylate formation, azide displacement, and hydrogenation.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00090
  • Reaction of 94 with (hetero)aryl halide 26, wherein M is iodo, bromo, or chloro, under copper(I) catalysis affords compounds I-96. Optional deprotection of the di-methyl ketal with aqueous acid gives rise to compounds of Formula I-98. By analogy, reaction of amine 95 with 26 under palladium(0) catalysis affords compounds of Formula I-97. Optional deprotection of the di-methyl ketal with aqueous acid gives rise to compounds of Formula I-99.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00091
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is taken from Q-17 are also prepared according to the synthetic route shown in Scheme 16.3. Deprotonation of 4,4-dimethyl-3,5-dioxo-pyrazolidine (95a, prepared according to the method described in Zinner and Boese, D. Pharmazie 1970, 25(5-6), 309-12 and Bausch, M. J. et. al J. Org. Chem. 1991, 56(19), 5643) with NaH/DMF or NaH/DMF and its subsequent displacement of M, wherein M is a suitable leaving group such as chloride, bromide or iodide yields I-99a.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00092
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is taken from Q-18 are prepared as shown in Schemes 17.1 and 17.2. Aminoesters 100 are subjected to reductive alkylation conditions to give rise to intermediates 101. Condensation of amines 101 with carboxylic acids using an acid activating reagent such as dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC)/hydroxybenzotriazole (HOBt) affords intermediate amides 102. Cyclization of amides 102 to tetramic acids 104 is mediated by Amberlyst A-26 hydroxide resin after trapping of the in situ generated alkoxide 103 and submitting 103 to an acetic acid-mediated resin-release.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00093
  • Scheme 17.2 illustrates the synthetic sequences for converting intermediates 104 to compounds of Formula I. Reaction of alcohol 104.1 with aryl or heteroaryl halide 26 (Q=halogen) under copper(I) catalysis gives rise to compounds of Formula I-105.1. Reaction of amines 104.2 and 104.3 with 26 under Buchwald palladium(0) catalyzed amination conditions affords compounds of Formulae I-105.2 and I-105.3. Reaction of acetylene 104.4 with 26 under Sonogashira coupling conditions affords compounds of Formula I-105.4. Compounds I-105.4 may optionally be reduced to the corresponding saturated analogs I-105.5 by standard hydrogenation.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00094
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00095
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is taken from Q-19, Q-20, or Q-21 are prepared as illustrated in Scheme 18. Commercially available Kemp's acid 106 is converted to its anhydride 107 using a dehydrating reagent, preferably di-isopropylcarbodiimide (DIC) or 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide (EDC). Reaction of 107 with amines R4NH2 affords the intermediate amides which are cyclized to the imides 108 by reaction with DIC or EDC. Alternatively, 107 is reacted with amines 8 to afford amides of Formula I-110. Amides I-110 may optionally be further reacted with DIC or EDC to give rise to compounds of Formula I-111. Acid 108 is further reacted with amines 8 to give compounds of Formula
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00096
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is taken from Q-22 or Q-23 are prepared as shown in Schemes 19.1 through 19.3. Preparation of intermediates 113 and 114 are prepared as shown in Scheme 19.1 from di-halo(hetero)aryls 112, wherein M2 is a more robust leaving group than M1. Reaction of 112 with amines 37 (Z=NH) either thermally in the presence of base or by palladium(0) catalysis in the presence of base and phosphine ligand affords compounds 113. Alternatively, reaction of 112 with alcohols 37 (X═O) either thermally in the presence of base or by copper(I) catalysis in the presence of base affords compounds 114.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00097
  • Scheme 19.2 illustrates the conversion of intermediates 113 into compounds of Formula I-115, I-118, or 117. Treatment of 113 with aqueous copper oxide or an alkaline hydroxide affords compounds of Formula I-115. Alternatively, treatment of 113 with t-butylmercaptan under copper(I) catalysis in the presence of ethylene glycol and potassium carbonate gives rise to 116 (see F. Y. Kwong and S. L. Buchwald, Organic Letters (2002) 4:3517. Treatment of the t-butyl sulfide 116 with acid affords the desired thiols of Formula I-118. Alternatively, 113 may be treated with excess ammonia under pressurized conditions to afford compound 117.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00098
  • Scheme 19.3 illustrates the conversion of intermediate 114 into compounds of Formula I-119, I-122 and 121, by analogy to the sequence described in Scheme 19.2.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00099
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein q is taken from Q-24, Q-25, or Q-26 are prepared as shown in Scheme 20. Reaction of compounds I-115 or I-119 with chlorosulfonylisocyanate, followed by in situ reaction with amines HN(R4)2 gives rise to compounds of Formulae I-123 or I-124. Reaction of compounds I-118 or I-122 with a peracid, preferably peracetic acid or trifluoroperacetic acid, affords compounds of Formula I-125 or I-126. Reaction of compounds 117 or 121 with chlorosulfonylisocyanate, followed by in situ reaction with amines HN(R4)2 or alcohols R4OH, affords compounds of Formulae I-127, I-128, I-129, or I-130.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00100
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is taken from Q-27 are prepared as illustrated in Scheme 21. Reductive alkylation of thiomorpholine with aldehydes 131 affords benzylic amines 132, which are then subjected to peracid oxidation to give rise to the thiomorpholine sulfones 133 (see C. R. Johnson et al, Tetrahedron (1969) 25: 5649). Intermediates 133 are reacted with amines 8 (Z=NH2) under Buchwald palladium-catalyzed amination conditions to give rise to compounds of Formula I-134. Alternatively, compounds 133 are reacted with alcohols 8 (Z=OH) under Buchwald copper(I) catalyzed conditions to afford compounds of Formula I-135. Alternatively, intermediates 133 are reacted with alkenes under palladium(0)-catalyzed Heck reaction conditions to give compounds of Formula I-136. Compounds I-136 are optionally reduced to the corresponding saturated analogs I-137 by standard hydrogenation conditions or by the action of diamide.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00101
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00102
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is taken from Q-27 are also prepared as illustrated in Scheme 21.1. Aldehyde 8c is reductively aminated with ammonia, and the resultant amine condensed with divinyl sulphone to yield I-134. Intermediate 134a is also available by reduction of amide 8d under a variety of standard conditions.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00103
  • More generally, amines 134c are available via the reduction of amides 134b as shown in Scheme 21.2. The morpholine amide analogues 134d and morpholine analogues 134e are also available as shown in Scheme 21.2.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00104
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is taken from Q-28 or Q-29 are prepared according to the sequences illustrated in Scheme 22. Readily available amides 138 are reacted with chlorosulfonylisocyanate to give intermediates 140, which are reacted in situ with amines HN(R4)2 or alcohols R4OH to afford compounds of Formulae I-141 or I-142, respectively. Alternatively, amides 138 are reacted with sulfonylchlorides to give compounds of Formula I-139.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00105
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is taken from Q-30 are prepared as shown in Scheme 23. Readily available N—BOC anhydride 143 (see S. Chen et al, J. Am. Chem. Soc. (1996) 118:2567) is reacted with amines HN(R4)2 or alcohols R6OH to afford acids 144 or 145, respectively. Intermediates 144 or 145 are further reacted with amines HN(R4)2 in the presence of an acid-activating reagent, preferably PyBOP and di-isopropylethylamine, to give diamides 146 or ester-amides 147. Intermediate 145 is converted to the diesters 148 by reaction with an alkyl iodide in the presence of base, preferably potassium carbonate. Intermediates 146-148 are treated with HCl/dioxane to give the secondary amines 149-151, which are then condensed with acids 152 in the presence of PyBOP and di-isopropylethylamine to give compounds of Formula I-153.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00106
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is taken from Q-31 or Q-32 are prepared according to the sequences illustrated in Scheme 24. Treatment of readily available sulfenamides 154 with amines 37 (Z=NH), alcohols 37 (Z=O), or alkenes 37 (Z=—CH═CH2), gives rise to compounds of Formula I-155. Treatment of sulfenamides I-155 with iodosobenzene in the presence of alcohols R6OH gives rise to the sulfonimidates of Formula I-157 (see D. Leca et al, Organic Letters (2002) 4:4093). Alternatively, compounds I-155 (Z=—CH═CH) may be optionally reduced to the saturated analogs I-156 (Z=CH2—CH2—), which are converted to the corresponding sulfonimidates I-157.
  • Treatment of readily available sulfonylchlorides 154.1 with amines HN(R4)2 and base gives rise to compounds of Formula I-154.2.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00107
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is taken from Q-33 are prepared as shown in Scheme 25. Readily available nitriles 158 are reacted with amines 37 (Z=NH), alcohols 37 (Z=O), or alkenes 37 (Z=—CH═CH2) to afford compounds of Formula I-159. Compounds I-159 (wherein Z=CH═CH—) are optionally reduced to their saturated analogs I-160 by standard catalytic hydrogenation conditions. Treatment of compounds I-159 or I-160 with a metal azide (preferably sodium azide or zinc azide) gives rise to tetrazoles of Formula I-161.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00108
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is taken from Q-34 are prepared as shown in Scheme 26. Readily available esters 162 are reacted with amines 37 (Z=NH), alcohols 37 (Z=O), or alkenes 37 (Z=—CH═CH2) to afford compounds of Formula I-163. Compounds I-163 (wherein Z is —CH═CH—) are optionally converted to the saturated analogs I-164 by standard hydrogenation conditions. Compounds I-163 or I-164 are converted to the desired phosphonates I-165 by an Arbuzov reaction sequence involving reduction of the esters to benzylic alcohols, conversion of the alcohols to the benzylic bromides, and treatment of the bromides with a tri-alkylphosphine. Optionally, phosphonates I-165 are converted to the fluorinated analogs I-166 by treatment with diethylaminosulfur trifluoride (DAST).
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00109
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is taken from Q-35 are prepared according to Scheme 27. Readily available acid chlorides 167 are reacted with oxazolidines in the presence of base to afford the N-acyl oxazolidinones 168. Intermediate 168 are reacted with amines 37 (Z=NH), alcohols 37 (Z=O), or alkenes 37 (Z=—CH═CH2) to afford the N-acyl oxazolidinones of Formula I-169. Compounds I-169 (wherein Z is —CH═CH—) are optionally converted to the saturated analogs I-170 under standard hydrogenation conditions.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00110
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is taken from Q-35 are also prepared as illustrated in Scheme 27.1. Intermediate 8a, wherein M is a suitable leaving group such as chloride, bromide or iodide, is refluxed with triethyl phosphite and the resulting phosphoryl intermediate saponified under mild conditions to yield I-165.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00111
  • Compounds of Formula I wherein Q is taken from Q-36 are prepared as illustrated in Schemes 28.1 and 28.2. Reductive alkylation of the t-butylsulfide substituted piperazines with the readily available aldehydes 131 gives rise to the benzylic piperazines 171. Intermediates 171 are reacted with amines 37 (Z=NH), alcohols 37 (Z=O), or alkenes 37 (Z=—CH═CH2) to give compounds 172, 173 or 174 respectively. Optionally, intermediates 174 are converted to the saturated analogs 175 under standard hydrogenation conditions.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00112
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00113
  • Scheme 28.2 illustrates the conversion of intermediate t-butylsulfides 172-175 to the sulfonic acids, employing a two step process involving acid-catalyzed deprotection of the t-butyl sulfide to the corresponding mercaptans, and subsequent peracid oxidation (preferably with peracetic acid or trifluoroperacetic acid) of the mercaptans to the desired sulfonic acids of Formula I-176.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00114
  • In some instances a hybrid p38-alpha kinase inhibitor is prepared which also contains an ATP-pocket binding moiety or an allosteric pocket binding moiety R1—X-A. The synthesis of functionalized intermediates of formula R1—X-A are accomplished as shown in Scheme 29. Readily available intermediates 177, which contain a group M capable of oxidative addition to palladium(0), are reacted with amines 178 (X═NH) under Buchwald Pd(0) amination conditions to afford 179. Alternatively amines or alcohols 178 (X═NH or O) are reacted thermally with 177 in the presence of base under nuclear aromatic substitution reaction conditions to afford 179. Alternatively, alcohols 178 (X═O) are reacted with 177 under Buchwald copper(I)-catalyzed conditions to afford 179. In cases where p=1, the carbamate of 179 is removed, preferably under acidic conditions when R6 is t-butyl, to afford amines 180. In cases where p=0, the esters 179 are converted to the acids 181 preferably under acidic conditions when R6 is t-butyl.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00115
  • Another sequence for preparing amines 180 is illustrated in Scheme 30. Reaction of amines or alcohols 178 with nitro(hetero)arenes 182 wherein M is a leaving group, preferably M is fluoride, or M is a group capable of oxidative insertion into palladium(0), preferably M is bromo, chloro, or iodo, gives intermediates 183. Reduction of the nitro group under standard hydrogenation conditions or treatment with a reducing metal, such as stannous chloride, gives amines 180.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00116
  • In instances when hybrid p38-alpha kinase inhibitors are prepared, compounds of Formula I-184 wherein q is 1 may be converted to amines I-185 (p=1) or acids I-186 (p=0) by analogy to the conditions described in Scheme 29. Compounds of Formula I-184 are prepared as illustrated in previous schemes 1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7.1, 7.2, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 16.2, 17.2, 18, 19.1, 19.2, 19.3, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, or 28.2.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00117
  • The preparation of inhibitors of Formula I which contain an amide linkage CO—NH-connecting the oxyanion pocket binding moieties and R1—X-A moieties are shown in Scheme 32. Treatment of acids 181 with an activating agent, preferably PyBOP in the presence of di-iso-propylethylamine, and amines I-185 gives compounds of Formula I. Alternatively, retroamides of Formula I are formed by treatment of acids I-186 with PyBOP in the presence of di-iso-propylethylamine and amines 180.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00118
  • The preparation of inhibitors of Formula I which contain an urea linkage NH—CO—NH— connecting the oxyanion pocket binding moieties and the R1—X-A moieties are shown in Scheme 33. Treatment of amines I-185 with p-nitrophenyl chloroformate and base affords carbamates 187. Reaction of 187 with amines 180 gives ureas of Formula I.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00119
  • Alternatively, inhibitors of Formula I which contain an urea linkage NH—CO—NH-connecting the oxyanion pocket binding moieties and the R1—X-A moieties are prepared as shown in Scheme 33. Treatment of amines 180 with p-nitrophenyl chloroformate and base affords carbamates 188. Reaction of 188 with amines I-185 gives ureas of Formula I.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00120
  • The preparation of inhibitors of Formula I.B can be generally accomplished starting from a variety of readily available beta-ketonitriles 189, wherein R40 is alkyl, phenyl, or perfluoroalkyl. As illustrated in Scheme 35, reaction of 189 with an alcohol R4OH, preferably methanol or ethanol, under anhydrous acidic conditions, preferably anhydrous HCl, leads to the formation of imidates 190. Reaction of 190 with acyl chlorides, isocyanates, para-nitrophenylcarbamates, or substituted chloroformates in the presence of a base, preferably pyridine, triethylamine, di-iso-propylethylamine, Barton's base, or an alkali metal carbonate, affords key intermediates 191 and 192 as a mixture of tautomers, wherein T is alkylene, NH, O, or when T is absent, then the carbonyl side chain and A are connected by a direct bond.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00121
  • The mixture of tautomers 191/192 are not separated from each other, but are reacted as a mixture with a substituted hydrazine 193, wherein the Q moiety is optionally protected by a protecting group that diminishes its reactivity with the 191/192 mixture. This cyclodehydration reaction is performed in the presence of base, acid catalysis, or under neutral conditions optionally in the presence of a dehydrating agent to afford the desired pyrazoles 194. Preferable reaction solvents include dichloromethane, ethyl acetate, acetonitrile, or an alcoholic solvent taken from methanol, ethanol, or 2-propanol.
  • The reaction sequence initiating from 190 and yielding 194 may take place as two separate reactions, wherein the tautomeric mixture 191/192 is isolated, and then in a second reaction step this 191/192 mixture is reacted with a substituted hydrazine 193 to afford the desired pyrazoles 194. Alternatively, the reaction sequence initiating from 190 and yielding 194 may take place in a one-pot procedure, without isolation of the intermediate 191/192 mixture.
  • In a further modification, the reaction sequence initiating from 190 and yielding 194 may take place in a parallel array format, wherein phase-trafficking reagents, including scavenging reagents, are utilized to allow purification and isolation of intermediates and products. Scheme 36 illustrates this modification. Excess imidate 190 is reacted with a limiting amount of electrophile in the presence of a polymer-supported base 195 to afford the acylated imidates 191/192 as a mixture of tautomers. The crude mixture of 191/192 is optionally purified by incubation with a polymer-supported electrophile 196, preferably a polymer-supported isocyanate or acid chloride. Reaction of 196 with any remaining imidate 190 sequesters this imidate as polymer-supported 197. Filtration gives purified 191/192. In the second step, purified acylated imidates 191/192 are reacted with the substituted hydrazines 193 to afford desired crude products 194. A polymer-supported hydrazine 198 is optionally utilized to scavenge any remaining 191/192 from solution phase as derivatized 199. Filtration gives rise to purified desired pyrazoles 194.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00122
  • Scheme 37 illustrates the preparation of compounds wherein Q is Q-40. Readily available amine 200, wherein P is a suitable amine-protecting group or a group convertible to an amine group, is reacted with p-nitrophenyl chloroformate to give rise to carbamate 201. Intermediate 201 is reacted with a substituted amino acid ester with a suitable base to afford urea 202. Further treatment with base results in cyclization to afford hydantoin 203. The protecting group P is removed to afford the key amine-containing intermediate 204. Alternatively, if P is a nitro group, then 203 is converted to 204 under reducing conditions such as iron/HCl, tin(II) chloride, or catalytic hydrogenation. Amine 204 is converted to 205A by reaction with an isocyanate; 204 is converted to amide 205B by reaction with an acid chloride, acid anhydride, or a suitable activated carboxylic acid in the presence of a suitable base; 204 is converted to carbamate 205C by reaction with a substituted alkyl or aryl chloroformate in the presence of a suitable base.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00123
  • Scheme 38 illustrates the synthesis of key substituted hydrazine 210. This hydrazine can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36. The nitrophenyl substituted amine 206 is reacted with p-nitrophenyl chloroformate to give rise to carbamate 207. Reaction of 207 with a suitable amino acid ester affords urea 208, which is cyclized under basic conditions to give hydantoin 209. Reduction of the nitro group of 209, diazotization of the resulting amine, and reduction of the diazonium salt affords key hydrazine 210.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00124
  • Scheme 39 illustrates the synthesis of key substituted hydrazines 213 and 216, utilized to prepare compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q-42 and G is oxygen. Nitrophenol 211 is reacted with an alpha-hydroxy acid, wherein R42 is H or alkyl and R43 is alkyl, under Mitsunobu reaction conditions to give 212; alternatively 211 is reacted under basic conditions with a carboxylic acid ester containing a displaceable Qx group to afford 212. Conversion of 212 to the hydrazine 213 is accomplished by standard procedures as described above.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00125
  • Alternatively, the ester group of 212 is hydrolyzed to afford carboxylic acid 214, which is reacted with an amine NH(R4)2 in the presence of a coupling reagent, preferably EDC/HOBT, to give amide 215. Conversion of 215 to the substituted hydrazine 216 is accomplished by standard procedures. Hydrazines 213 and 216 can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • Scheme 40 illustrates the synthesis of key substituted hydrazines 219 and 212 utilized to prepare compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q42 and G is methylene. Nitrophenyl bromide 217 is reacted with an alpha-beta unsaturated ester using Pd(0) catalyzed Heck reaction conditions, to afford ester 218. This intermediate is converted to the substituted hydrazine 219 by standard procedures involving concomitant reduction of the alpha-beta unsaturated bond. Alternatively, ester 218 is hydrolyzed to the carboxylic acid 220, which is reacted with an amine NH(R4)2 in the presence of a coupling reagent, preferably EDC/HOBT, to give amide 221. Conversion of 221 to the substituted hydrazine 222 is accomplished by standard procedures. Hydrazines 219 and 222 can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00126
  • Scheme 41 illustrates an alternative synthesis of key substituted hydrazines 225 and 228, utilized to prepare compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q-42, G is methylene, and one or both of R42 are carbon-containing substituents. Nitrobenzyl acetate 223 is reacted with a substituted silylketene acetal to afford ester 224. This intermediate is converted to the substituted hydrazine 225 by standard procedures. Alternatively, ester 223 is hydrolyzed to the carboxylic acid 226, which is reacted with an amine NH(R4)2 in the presence of a coupling reagent, preferably EDC/HOBT, to give amide 227. Conversion of 227 to the substituted hydrazine 228 is accomplished by standard procedures. Hydrazines 225 and 228 can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00127
  • Scheme 42 illustrates an alternative synthesis of key substituted hydrazines 231 and 234, utilized to prepare compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q-42 and G is NH. Iodoaniline 229 is reacted with an alpha-keto ester under reductive amination conditions, preferably sodium triacetoxyborohydride, to afford ester 230. This intermediate is converted to the substituted hydrazine 231 by Cu(I)-catalyzed reaction with N—BOC hydrazine. Alternatively, ester 231 is hydrolyzed to the carboxylic acid 232, which is reacted with an amine NH(R4)2 in the presence of a coupling reagent, preferably EDC/HOBT, to give amide 233. Conversion of 233 to the substituted hydrazine 234 is accomplished by Cu(I)-catalyzed reaction with N—BOC hydrazine. Hydrazines 231 and 234 can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36, after acid-catalyzed removal of the hydrazine N—BOC protecting group, preferably with trifluoroacetic acid or HCl-dioxane.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00128
  • Scheme 43 illustrates an alternative synthesis of key substituted hydrazine 239 utilized to prepare compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q42, G is oxygen, and X is taken from piperidinyl, piperazinyl, thiomorpholino sulfone, or 4-hydroxypiperinyl. Iodophenol 235 is reacted with an alpha-hydroxy acid under Mitsunobu reaction conditions to give 236; alternatively 235 is reacted under basic conditions with a carboxylic acid ester containing a displaceable Qx group to afford 236. Ester 236 is hydrolyzed to the carboxylic acid 237, which is reacted with an amine X—H in the presence of a coupling reagent, preferably EDC/HOBT, to give amide 238. Conversion of 238 to the substituted hydrazine 239 is accomplished by Cu(I)-catalyzed reaction with N—BOC hydrazine. Hydrazine 239 can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36, after acid-catalyzed removal of the hydrazine N—BOC protecting group, preferably with trifluoroacetic acid or HCl-dioxane.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00129
  • Scheme 44 illustrates an alternative synthesis of key substituted hydrazine 241 utilized to prepare compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q-42, G is NH, and X is taken from piperidinyl, piperazinyl, thiomorpholino sulfone, or 4-hydroxypiperinyl. Carboxylic acid 237 is reacted with an amine X—H in the presence of a coupling reagent, preferably EDC/HOBT, to give amide 240. Conversion of 240 to the substituted hydrazine 241 is accomplished by Cu(I)-catalyzed-reaction with N—BOC hydrazine. Hydrazine 241 can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36, after acid-catalyzed removal of the hydrazine N—BOC protecting group, preferably with trifluoroacetic acid or HCl-dioxane.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00130
  • Scheme 45 illustrates an alternative synthesis of key substituted hydrazine 246, utilized to prepare compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q42, G is methylene, and X is taken from piperidinyl, piperazinyl, thiomorpholino sulfone, or 4-hydroxypiperinyl. Iodobenzyl acetate 242 is reacted with a substituted silylketene acetal to afford ester 243. Ester 243 is hydrolyzed to the carboxylic acid 244 which is reacted with an amine X—H in the presence of a coupling reagent, preferably EDC/HOBT, to give amide 245. Conversion of 245 to the substituted hydrazine 246 is accomplished by Cu(I)-catalyzed reaction with N—BOC hydrazine. Hydrazine 246 can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36, after acid-catalyzed removal of the hydrazine N—BOC protecting group, preferably with trifluoroacetic acid or HCl-dioxane.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00131
  • Scheme 46 illustrates an alternative synthesis of key substituted hydrazines 248, 252, and 255, utilized to prepare compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q-47 or Q-48. Nitrophenol 211 is reacted with a substituted alcohol under Mitsunobu reaction conditions to afford 247; alternatively 211 is alkylated with R4-Qx wherein Qx is a suitable leaving group, under basic reaction conditions, to give rise to 247. Conversion of 247 to the substituted hydrazine 248 is accomplished under standard conditions.
  • The nitrobenzoic acid 249 is converted to the acid fluoride 250 by reaction with a fluorinating reagent, preferably trifluorotriazine. Treatment of acid fluoride 250 with a nucleophilic fluoride source, preferably cesium fluoride and tetra-n-butylammonium fluoride, affords the alpha-alpha-difluorosubstituted carbinol 251. Conversion of 251 to the substituted hydrazine 252 is accomplished under standard conditions.
  • Nitrobenzaldehyde 253 is reacted with trimethylsilyltrifluoromethane (TMS-CF3) and tetra-n-butylammonium fluoride to give rise to trifluoromethyl-substituted carbinol 254. Conversion of 254 to the substituted hydrazine 255 is accomplished under standard conditions. Hydrazines 248, 252, and 255 can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00132
  • Scheme 47 illustrates the preparation of compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q-59. p-Nitrophenylcarbamate 201 is reacted with a substituted alpha-hydroxy ester with a suitable base to afford carbamate 256. Further treatment with base results in cyclization to afford oxazolidinedione 257. The protecting group P is removed to afford the key amine-containing intermediate 258; alternatively, if P is a nitro group, then 257 is converted to 258 under reducing conditions such as iron/HCl, tin(II) chloride, or catalytic hydrogenation. Amine 258 is converted to 259A by reaction with an isocyanate wherein T1 is alkylene or a direct bond connecting A and the carbonyl moiety; 258 is converted to amide 259B by reaction with an acid chloride, acid anhydride, or a suitable activated carboxylic acid in the presence of a suitable base; 258 is converted to carbamate 259C by reaction with a substituted alkyl or aryl chloroformate in the presence of a suitable base.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00133
  • Scheme 48 illustrates an alternative approach to the preparation of compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q-59. Amine 260 is reacted with p-nitrophenylchloroformate under basic conditions to give rise to carbamate 261. This intermediate is reacted with an alpha-hydroxy ester in the presence of base to afford carbamate 262. Further treatment with base converts 262 into the oxazolidinedione 263. Conversion of 263 to the substituted hydrazine 264 is accomplished by standard procedures. Hydrazine 264 can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00134
  • Scheme 49 illustrates the approach to the preparation of compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q-57. Amine 265 is reacted with p-methoxybenzylisocyanate under standard conditions to give rise to urea 266. This intermediate is reacted with an oxalyl chloride in the presence of base to afford trione 267. Conversion of 267 to the substituted hydrazine 268 and removal of the p-methoxybenzyl protecting group is accomplished by standard procedures. Hydrazine 264 can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00135
  • Scheme 50 illustrates an approach to the preparation of compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q-56. Amine 269 is reacted with p-methoxybenzylsulfonylchloride under standard conditions to give rise to sulfonylurea 270. This intermediate is reacted with an oxalyl chloride in the presence of base to afford the cyclic sulfonyl urea 271. Conversion of 271 to the substituted hydrazine 272 and removal of the p-methoxybenzyl protecting group is accomplished by standard procedures. Hydrazine 272 can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00136
  • Scheme 51 illustrates an approach to the preparation of compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q-58. Amine 273 is reacted with a cyclic anhydride e.g. succinic anhydride in the presence of base under standard conditions to give rise to imide 274. Conversion of 274 to the substituted hydrazine 275 is accomplished by standard procedures. Hydrazine 275 can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00137
  • Scheme 52 illustrates an approach to the preparation of compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q-54 or Q-55. Carboxylic acid 276 is converted to protected amine 279 under standard conditions, which can be subsequently converted to hydrazine 280 by standard procedures. Hydrazine 280 can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36 to yield protected amine 283 which is readily deprotected to yield amine 284. Reaction of amine 284 with CDI and amine (R4)2NH yields 285 (Q=Q-54). Reaction of amine 284 with the indicated sulfamoylchloride derivative yields 286 (Q=Q-55).
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00138
  • Scheme 53 illustrates an approach to the preparation of compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q49, Q-50 or Q-51. Protected amine 287 (available by several literature procedures) is converted to deprotected hydrazine 288 is accomplished by standard procedures. Hydrazine 288 (Q=Q-49) can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36. Amine 287 can be deprotected by TFA to yield amine 289 which can be subsequently converted amide 290. Amide 290 is converted to hydrazine 291 (Q=Q-50) by standard procedures, which can be subsequently converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36. Alternatively, amine 289 can be reacted with CDI and amine (R4)2NH to yield urea 292 (Q=Q-51). Urea 292 is converted to hydrazine 293 (Q=Q-51) by standard procedures, which can be subsequently converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00139
  • Scheme 54 illustrates an approach to the preparation of compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q-52 and Q-53. Protected amine 294 (available by several literature procedures) is converted to protected hydrazine 295 is accomplished by standard procedures. Hydrazine 295 (Q=Q49) can be converted into compounds of formula I.B to yield protected amine 298 which is readily deprotected to yield amine 299. Reaction of amine 299 with chlorosulfonylisocyanate followed by amine (R4)2NH yields 300 (Q=Q-52). Alternatively, reaction of chlorosulfonylisocyanate and amine (R4)2NH followed by amine 299 yields 301 (Q=Q-53).
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00140
  • Scheme 55 illustrates an approach to the preparation of compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q-36. Amine 302 is reacted with CDI and amine R4NH2 to yield 303, which is reacted with chlorocarbonyl sulfonylchloride to yield thiadiazolidinedione 304. Conversion of 304 to the substituted hydrazine 305 is accomplished by standard procedures. Hydrazine 305 can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00141
  • Scheme 56 illustrates an approach to the preparation of compounds of formula I.B wherein Q is Q-37, Q-38 or Q-39. Imides 309a, 309b, and 312 are all available via several literature methods, and are each able to be alkylated with chloride 306 to yields intermediates 307, 310 and 313 respectively. Intermediates 307, 310 and 313 are respectively converted to hydrazines 308 (Q=Q-37), 311 (Q=Q-38), and 314 (Q=Q-39) by standard procedures.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00142
  • Scheme 57 illustrates an alternative preparation of compounds wherein Q is Q-37. Readily available amine 315, wherein P is a suitable amine-protecting group or a group convertible to an amine group, is reacted with SO2Cl2 to give rise to sulfonyl chloride 316. Intermediate 316 is reacted with a substituted amino acid ester with a suitable base to afford sulfonylurea 317. Further treatment with base results in cyclization to afford sulfohydantoin 318. The protecting group P is removed to afford the key amine-containing intermediate 319. Alternatively, if P is a nitro group, then 318 is converted to 319 under reducing conditions such as iron/HCl, tin(II) chloride, or catalytic hydrogenation. Amine 319 is converted to 320A by reaction with an isocyanate; 319 is converted to amide 320B by reaction with an acid chloride, acid anhydride, or a suitable activated carboxylic acid in the presence of a suitable base; 319 is converted to carbamate 320C by reaction with a substituted alkyl or aryl chloroformate in the presence of a suitable base.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00143
  • Scheme 58 illustrates an alternative synthesis of key substituted hydrazine 325 of compounds wherein Q is Q-37. This hydrazine can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36. The amine 321 is reacted with SO2Cl2 to give rise to sulfonyl chloride 322. Reaction of 322 with a suitable amino acid ester affords sulfonylurea 32.3 which is cyclized under basic conditions to give sulfohydantoin 324. Reduction of the nitro group of 324 diazotization of the resulting amine, and reduction of the diazonium salt affords key hydrazine 325.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00144
  • Scheme 59 illustrates an alternative preparation of compounds wherein Q is Q-38. Readily available amine 326, wherein P is a suitable amine-protecting group or a group convertible to an amine group, is reacted with SO2Cl2 to give rise to sulfonyl chloride 327. Intermediate 327 is reacted with a substituted hydrazide ester with a suitable base to afford sulfonylurea 328. Further treatment with base results in cyclization to afford sulfotriazaolinedione 329. The protecting group P is removed to afford the key amine-containing intermediate 330. Alternatively, if P is a nitro group, then 329 is converted to 330 under reducing conditions such as iron/HCl, tin(II) chloride, or catalytic hydrogenation. Amine 330 is converted to 331A by reaction with an isocyanate; 330 is converted to amide 331B by reaction with an acid chloride, acid anhydride, or a suitable activated carboxylic acid in the presence of a suitable base; 330 is converted to carbamate 331C by reaction with a substituted alkyl or aryl chloroformate in the presence of a suitable base.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00145
  • Scheme 60 illustrates an alternative synthesis of key substituted hydrazine 336 of compounds wherein Q is Q-38. This hydrazine can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36. The amine 332 is reacted with SO2Cl2 to give rise to sulfonyl chloride 333. Reaction of 333 with a substituted hydrazide ester affords sulfonylurea 334, which is cyclized under basic conditions to give sulfotriazaolinedione 335. Reduction of the nitro group of 335, diazotization of the resulting amine, and reduction of the diazonium salt affords key hydrazine 336.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00146
  • Scheme 61 illustrates the preparation of compounds wherein Q is Q-39. Readily available amine 337, wherein P is a suitable amine-protecting group or a group convertible to an amine group, is reacted with p-nitrophenyl chloroformate to give rise to carbamate 338. Intermediate 338 is reacted with a substituted amino acid ester with a suitable base to afford urea 339. Further treatment with base results in cyclization to afford triazolinedione 340. The protecting group P is removed to afford the key amine-containing intermediate 341. Alternatively, if P is a nitro group, then 340 is converted to 341 under reducing conditions such as iron/HCl, tin(II) chloride, or catalytic hydrogenation. Amine 341 is converted to 342A by reaction with an isocyanate; 341 is converted to amide 342B by reaction with an acid chloride, acid anhydride, or a suitable activated carboxylic acid in the presence of a suitable base; 341 is converted to carbamate 342C by reaction with a substituted alkyl or aryl chloroformate in the presence of a suitable base.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00147
  • Scheme 62 illustrates an alternative synthesis of key substituted hydrazine 347 of compounds wherein Q is Q-39. This hydrazine can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36. The nitrophenyl substituted amine 343 is reacted with p-nitrophenyl chloroformate to give rise to carbamate 344. Reaction of 344 with a suitable amino acid ester affords urea 345 which is cyclized under basic conditions to give triazolinedione 346. Reduction of the nitro group of 346 diazotization of the resulting amine, and reduction, of the diazonium salt affords key hydrazine 347.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00148
  • Scheme 63 illustrates the synthesis of compounds wherein Q is Q43. Morphiline 348 is alkylated with protected bromohydrine. Removal of the alcohol protecting group yields intermediate 349, which can be oxidized to aldehyde 350. When G=NH, idoaniline 351 is reacted with 350 under reductive amination conditions, preferably sodium triacetoxyborohydride, to afford intermediate 352. This intermediate is converted to the substituted hydrazine 353 by Cu(I)-catalyzed reaction with N—BOC hydrazine. When G=O, iodophenol 355 is either alkylated with 354 or reacted under Mitsunobu conditions with alcohol 349 to yield intermediate 356. This intermediate, is converted to the substituted hydrazine 353 by Cu(I)-catalyzed reaction with N—BOC hydrazine.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00149
  • Scheme 64 illustrates the synthesis of compounds wherein Q is Q43, G=CH2. Nitroacid 358 (readily available by anyone with normal skills in the art) is reacted with morpholine to yield amide 359, which upon reduction to the amine and conversion of the nitro group under standard conditions results in hydrazine 360. This hydrazine can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00150
  • Scheme 65 illustrates the synthesis of compounds wherein Q is Q-44. N-methyl piperazine 361 is alkylated with protected bromohydrine. Removal of the alcohol protecting group yields intermediate 362 which can be oxidized to aldehyde 363. When G=NH, idoaniline 364 is reacted with 363 under reductive amination conditions, preferably sodium triacetoxyborohydride, to afford intermediate 365. This intermediate is converted to the substituted hydrazine 366 by Cu(I)-catalyzed reaction with N—BOC hydrazine. When G=O, iodophenol 368 is either alkylated with 367 or reacted under Mitsunobu conditions with alcohol 362 to yield intermediate 369. This intermediate is converted to the substituted hydrazine 370 by Cu(I)-catalyzed reaction with N—BOC hydrazine.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00151
  • Scheme 66 illustrates the synthesis of compounds wherein Q is Q44, G=CH2. Nitroacid 371 (readily available by anyone with normal skills in the art) is reacted with N-methyl piperazine to yield amide 372, which upon reduction to the amine and conversion of the nitro group under standard conditions results in hydrazine 373. This hydrazine can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00152
  • Scheme 67 illustrates the synthesis of compounds wherein Q is Q-45. Thiomorpholine sulphone 374 is alkylated with protected bromohydrine. Removal of the alcohol protecting group yields intermediate 375 which can be oxidized to aldehyde 376. When G=NH, idoaniline 377 is reacted with 376 under reductive amination conditions, preferably sodium triacetoxyborohydride, to afford intermediate 378. This intermediate is converted to the substituted hydrazine 379 by Cu(I)-catalyzed reaction with N—BOC hydrazine. When G=O, iodophenol 380 is either alkylated with 381 or reacted under Mitsunobu conditions with alcohol 375 to yield intermediate 382. This intermediate is converted to the substituted hydrazine 383 by Cu(I)-catalyzed reaction with N—BOC hydrazine.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00153
  • Scheme 68 illustrates the synthesis of compounds wherein Q is Q44, G=CH2. Nitroacid 384 (readily available by anyone with normal skills in the art) is reacted with thiomorpholine sulphone to yield amide 385, which upon reduction to the amine and conversion of the nitro group under standard conditions results in hydrazine 386. This hydrazine can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00154
  • Scheme 69 illustrates the synthesis of compounds wherein Q is Q-46. Piperadine derivative 387 is alkylated with protected bromohydrine. Removal of the alcohol protecting group yields intermediate 388, which can be oxidized to aldehyde 389. When G=NH, idoaniline 390 is reacted with 389 under reductive amination conditions, preferably sodium triacetoxyborohydride, to afford intermediate 391. This intermediate is converted to the substituted hydrazine 392 by Cu(I)-catalyzed reaction with N—BOC hydrazine. When G=O, iodophenol 393 is either alkylated with 396 or reacted under Mitsunobu conditions with alcohol 388 to yield intermediate 394. This intermediate is converted to the substituted hydrazine 395 by Cu(I)-catalyzed reaction with N—BOC hydrazine.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00155
  • Scheme 70 illustrates the synthesis of compounds wherein Q is Q44, G=CH2. Nitroacid 397 (readily available by anyone with normal skills in the art) is reacted with thiomorpholine sulphone to yield amide 398, which upon reduction to the amine and conversion of the nitro group under standard conditions results in hydrazine 399. This hydrazine can be converted into compounds of formula I.B using the methods previously outlined in Schemes 35 and 36.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00156
  • Affinity and Biological Assessment of P38-Alpha Kinase Inhibitors
  • A fluorescence binding assay is used to detect binding of inhibitors of Formula I with unphosphorylated p38-alpha kinase as previously described: see J. Regan et al, Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (2002) 45:2994.
  • 1. P38 MAP Kinase Binding Assay
  • The binding affinities of small molecule modulators for p38 MAP kinase were determined using a competition assay with SKF 86002 as a fluorescent probe, modified based on published methods (C. Pargellis, et al Nature Structural Biology (2002) 9, 268-272. J. Regan, et al J. Med. Chem. (2002) 45, 2994-3008). Briefly, SKF 86002, a potent inhibitor of p38 kinase (Kd=180 nM), displays an emission fluorescence around 420 nm when excitated at 340 nm upon its binding to the kinase. Thus, the binding affinity of an inhibitor for p38 kinase can be measured by its ability to decrease the fluorescence from SKF 86002. The assay was performed in a 384 plate (Greiner uclear 384 plate) on a Polarstar Optima plate reader (BMG). Typically, the reaction mixture contained 1 μM SKF 86002, 80 nM p38 kinase and various concentrations of an inhibitor in 20 mM Bis-Tris Propane buffer, pH 7, containing 0.15% (w/v) n-octylglucoside and 2 mM EDTA in a final volume of 65 μl. The reaction was initiated by addition of the enzyme. The plate was incubated at room temperature (˜25° C.) for 2 hours before reading at emission of 420 nm and excitation at 340 nm. By comparison of rfu (relative fluorescence unit) values with that of a control (in the absence of an inhibitor), the percentage of inhibition at each concentration of the inhibitor was calculated. IC50 value for the inhibitor was calculated from the % inhibition values obtained at a range of concentrations of the inhibitor using Prism. When time-dependent inhibition was assessed, the plate was read at multiple reaction times such as 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 6 hours. The IC50 values were calculated at the each time point. An inhibition was assigned as time-dependent if the IC50 values decrease with the reaction time (more than two-fold in four hours). This is illustrated below in Table 1.
  • TABLE 1
    Example # IC50, nM Time-dependent
    1 292 Yes
    2 997 No
    2 317 No
    3 231 Yes
    4 57 Yes
    5 1107 No
    6 238 Yes
    7 80 Yes
    8 66 Yes
    9 859 No
    10 2800 No
    11 2153 No
    12 ~10000 No
    13 384 Yes
    15 949 No
    19 ~10000 No
    21 48 Yes
    22 666 No
    25 151 Yes
    26 68 Yes
    29 45 Yes
    30 87 Yes
    31 50 Yes
    32 113 Yes
    37 497 No
    38 508 No
    41 75 Yes
    42 373 No
    43 642 No
    45 1855 No
    46 1741 No
    47 2458 No
    48 3300 No
    57 239 Yes
    IC50 values obtained at 2 hours reaction time
  • P-38 Alpha Kinase Assay (Spectrophometric Assay)
  • Activity of phosphorylated p-38 kinase was determined by following the production of ADP from the kinase reaction through coupling with the pyruvate kinase/lactate dehydrogenase system (e.g., Schindler, et al. Science (2000) 289, 1938-1942). In this assay, the oxidation of NADH was continuously measured spectrophometrically. The reaction mixture (100 μl) contained phospho p-38 alpha kinase (3.3 nM. Panvera), peptide substrate (IPTSPITTTYFFFKKK-OH, 0.2 mM), ATP (0.3 mM), MgCl2 (10 mM), pyruvate kinase (8 units. Sigma), lactate dehydrogenase (13 units. Sigma), phosphoenol pyruvate (1 mM), and NADH (0.28 mM) in 65 mM Tris buffer, pH 7.5, containing 3.5% DMSO and 150 uM n-Dodecyl-B-D-maltopyranoside. The reaction was initiated by adding ATP. The absorption at 340 nm was monitored continuously for up to 4 hours at 30° C. on Polarstar Optima plate reader (BMG). The kinase activity (reaction rate) was calculated from the slope at the time frame from 1.5 h to 2 h. Under these conditions, a turn over number (kcat) of ˜1 s−1 was obtained. The reaction rates calculated from different time frames such as 0.5 min to 0.5 h, 0.5 h to 1 h, 1.5 h to 2 h or 2.5 h to 3 h were generally constant.
  • For inhibition determinations, test compounds were incubated with the reaction mixture for ˜5 min before adding ATP to start the reaction. Percentage of inhibition was obtained by comparison of reaction rate with that of a control well containing no test compound. IC50 values were calculated from a series of % inhibition values determined at a range of concentrations of each inhibitor using Prism to process the data and fit inhibition curves. Generally, the rates obtained at the time frame of 1.5 h to 2 h were used for these calculations. In assessing whether inhibition of a test compound was time-dependent (i.e., greater inhibition with a longer incubation time), the values of % inhibition and/or IC50 values obtained from other time frames were also calculated for the inhibitor. The biological activity for compounds of the present invention in the spectrophotometric assay are illustrated in Tables 2 and 3.
  • TABLE 2
    Example # IC50, uM % inhibition @ concentration, uM
    1 0.067
    2 0.29
    3 0.019
    4 0.609
    5 0.514
    6 0.155
    7 0.165
    9 0.355
    10 83% @ 10
    11 0.953
    12 70% @ 10
    13 0.269
    14 0.096
    15 0.53
    17 40% @ 10
    18 60% @ 10
    21 0.171
    22 0.445
    25 0.055
    26 0.19
    29 0.011
    30 0.251
    31 0.056
    32 0.307
    38 0.51
    39 0.012
    40 0.055
    41 0.013
    42 0.425
    43 7.5
    45 0.48
    46 1
    47 0.295
    48 2
    49 0.071
    51 0.033
    52 0.416
    53 0.109
    54  68% @ 1.0
    55 0.74
    57 0.782
    58 0.172
    59 0.709
    60 0.264
    D 0.179
    F 0.437
  • TABLE 3
    Example # IC50, uM % Inhibition @ concentration, uM
    145 1.3
    146  9% @ 10
    147 27% @ 10
    150 53% @ 10
    154 21% @ 10
    155 58% @ 10
    160 0.044
    161 0.1
    162 0.65
    163 0.464
    196 0.028
    197 0.243
    198 0.137
    199 0.684
    200  73% @ 1.0
    201 0.029
    202 1.9
    203 0.328
    204 0.008
    206 0.013
    207 0.033
    209 0.354
    234 11
    284 1.95
    285 0.102
    286 0.079
    287 0.041
    288 0.104
    289 1.3
    291 5.1
    294 2.1
    295 1.2
    296 0.284
    297 0.34
    298 0.025
    299 2.3
    300 0.251
    301 0.63
    302 0.077
  • Human Peripheral Blood Mononuclear Leukocyte Cell Assay.
  • Human peripheral blood mononuclear leukocytes are challenged with 25 ng/mL lipopolysaccharide (LPS) in the absence or presence of Test Compound and incubated for 16 hours as described by Welker P. et al, International Archives Allergy and Immunology (1996) 109: 110. The quantity of LPS-induced tumor necrosis factor-alpha (TNF-alpha) cytokine release is measured by a commercially available Enzyme-Linked Immunosorbent Assay (ELISA) kit. Test compounds are evaluated for their ability to inhibit TNF-alpha release. Table 2 records IC50 values for inhibition of TNF-alpha release by Test Compounds of the present invention, wherein the IC50 value, in micromolar concentration, represents the concentration of Test Compound resulting in a 50% inhibition of TNF-alpha release from human peripheral blood mononuclear leukocytes as compared to control experiments containing no Test Compound. Test compounds evaluated are illustrated in Table 4.
  • TABLE 4
    Example Number IC50, uM
    3 6.1
    13 6.32
    21 3.4
    29 2.68
    31 4.52
    60 2.34
    296 3.49
    300 4.78
    302 5.45
  • EXAMPLES
  • The following examples set forth preferred methods in accordance with the invention. It is to be understood, however, that these examples are provided by way of illustration and nothing therein should be taken as a limitation upon the overall scope of the invention.
  • [Boc-sulfamide] aminoester (Reagent AA), 1,5,7,-trimethyl-2,4-dioxo-3-aza-bicyclo[3.3.1]nonane-7-carboxylic acid (Reagent BB), and Kemp acid anhydride (Reagent CC) was prepared according to literature procedures. See Askew et. al J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1989, 111, 1082 for further details.
  • Example A
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00157
  • To a solution (200 mL) of m-amino benzoic acid (200 g, 1.46 mol) in concentrated HCl was added an aqueous solution (250 mL) of NaNO2 (102 g, 1.46 mol) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred for 1 h and a solution of SnCl2.2H2O (662 g, 2.92 mol) in concentrated HCl (2 L) was then added at 0° C., and the reaction stirred for an additional 2 h at RT. The precipitate was filtered and washed with ethanol and ether to yield 3-hydrazino-benzoic acid hydrochloride as a white solid.
  • The crude material from the previous reaction (200 g, 1.06 mol) and 4,4-dimethyl-3-oxo-pentanenitrile (146 g, 1.167 mol) in ethanol (2 L) were heated to reflux overnight. The reaction solution was evaporated in vacuo and the residue purified by column chromatography to yield ethyl 3-(3-tert-butyl-5-amino-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)benzoate (Example A, 116 g, 40%) as a white solid together with 3-(5-amino-3-tert-butyl-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)benzoic acid (93 g, 36%). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): 8.09 (s, 1H), 8.05 (brd, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.87 (brd, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.71 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 5.64 (s, 1H), 4.35 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 1.34 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H), 1.28 (s, 9H).
  • Example B
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00158
  • To a solution of 1-naphthyl isocyanate (9.42 g, 55.7 mmol) and pyridine (44 mL) in THF (100 mL) was added a solution of Example A (8.0 g, 27.9 mmol) in THF (200 mL) at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at RT for 1 h, heated until all solids were dissolved, stirred at RT for an additional 3 h and quenched with H2O (200 mL). The precipitate was filtered, washed with dilute HCl and H2O, and dried in vacuo to yield ethyl 3-[3-t-butyl-5-(3-naphthalen-1-yl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]benzoate (12.0 g, 95%) as a white power. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): 9.00 (s, 1H), 8.83 (s, 1H), 8.25 7.42 (m, 11H), 6.42 (s, 1H), 4.30 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 1.26 (s, 9H), 1.06 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H); MS (ESI) m/z: 457.10 (M+H+).
  • Example C
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00159
  • To a solution of Example A (10.7 g, 70.0 mmol) in a mixture of pyridine (56 mL) and THF (30 mL) was added a solution of 4-nitrophenyl 4-chlorophenylcarbamate (10 g, 34.8 mmol) in THF (150 mL) at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at RT for 1 h and heated until all solids were dissolved, and stirred at RT for an additional 3 h. H2O (200 mL) and CH2Cl2 (200 mL) were added, the aqueous phase separated and extracted with CH2Cl2 (2×100 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with 1N NaOH, and 0.1N HCl, saturated brine and dried over anhydrous Na2SO4. The solvent was removed in vacuo to yield ethyl 3-{(3-tert-butyl-5-[3-(4-chlorophenyl)ureido]-1H-pyrazol-1-yl}benzoate (8.0 g, 52%). 1H NMR DMSO-d6): δ 9.11 (s, 1H), 8.47 (s, 1H), 8.06 (m, 1H), 7.93 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.81 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.65 (dd, J=8.0, 7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.43 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 7.30 (d, J=8.87 Hz, 2H), 6.34 (s, 1H), 4.30 (q, J=6.8 Hz, 2H), 1.27 (s, 9H), 1.25 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 3H); MS (ESI) m/z: 441 (M+H).
  • Example D
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00160
  • To a stirred solution of Example B (8.20 g, 18.0 mmol) in ThF (500 mL) was added LiAlH4 powder (2.66 g, 70.0 mmol) at −10° C. under N2. The mixture was stirred for 2 h at RT and excess LiAlH4 destroyed by slow addition of ice. The reaction mixture was acidified to pH=7 with dilute HCl, concentrated in vacuo and the residue extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic layers were concentrated in vacuo to yield 1-{3-tert-butyl-1-[3-(hydroxymethyl)phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5-yl}-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea (7.40 g, 99%) as a white powder. AH NMR (DMSO-d6): 9.19 (s, 1H), 9.04 (s, 1H), 8.80 (s, 1H), 8.26-7.35 (m, 11H), 6.41 (s, 1H), 4.60 (s, 2H), 1.28 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 415 (M+H+).
  • Example E
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00161
  • A solution of Example C (1.66 g, 4.0 mmol) and SOCl2 (0.60 mL, 8.0 mmol) in CH3Cl (100 mL) was refluxed for 3 h and concentrated in vacuo to yield 1-{3-tert-butyl-1-[3-chloromethyl)phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5-yl}-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea (1.68 g, 97%) was obtained as white powder. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 9.26 (s, 1H), 9.15 (s, 1H), 8.42-7.41 (m, 11H), 6.40 (s, 1H), 4.85 (s, 2H), 1.28 (s, 9H). MS (ESI) m/z: 433 (M+H+).
  • Example F
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00162
  • To a stirred solution of Example C (1.60 g, 3.63 mmol) in THF (200 mL) was added LiAlH4 powder (413 mg, 10.9 mmol) at −10° C. under N2. The mixture was stirred for 2 h and excess LiAlH4 was quenched by adding ice. The solution was acidified to pH=7 with dilute HCl. Solvents were slowly removed and the solid was filtered and washed with EtOAc (200+100 mL). The filtrate was concentrated to yield 1-{3-tert-butyl-1-[3-hydroxymethyl)phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5-yl}-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea (1.40 g, 97%). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 9.11 (s, 1H), 8.47 (s, 1H), 7.47-7.27 (m, 8H), 6.35 (s, 1H), 5.30 (t, J=5.6 Hz, 1H), 4.55 (d, J=5.6 Hz, 2H), 1.26 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 399 (M+H+).
  • Example G
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00163
  • A solution of Example F (800 mg, 2.0 mmol) and SOCl2 (0.30 mL, 4 mmol) in CHCl3 (30 mL) was refluxed gently for 3 h. The solvent was evaporated in vacuo and the residue was taken up to in CH2Cl2 (2×20 mL). After removal of the solvent, 1-{3-tert-butyl-1-[3-(chloromethyl)phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5-yl}-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea (812 mg, 97%) was obtained as white powder. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 9.57 (s, 1H), 8.75 (s, 1H), 7.63 (s, 1H), 7.50-7.26 (m, 7H), 6.35 (s, 1H), 4.83 (s, 2H), 1.27 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 417 (M+H+).
  • Example H
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00164
  • To a suspension of LiAlH4 (5.28 g, 139.2 mmol) in THF (1000 mL) was added Example A (20.0 g, 69.6 mmol) in portions at 0° C. under N2. The reaction mixture was stirred for 5 h, quenched with 1 N HCl at 0° C. and the precipitate was filtered, washed by EtOAc and the filtrate evaporated to yield [3-(5-amino-3-tert-butyl-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)phenyl]methanol (15.2 g, 89%). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): 7.49 (s, 1H), 7.37 (m, 2H), 7.19 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 5.35 (s, 1H), 5.25 (t, J=5.6 Hz, 1H), 5.14 (s, 2H), 4.53 (d, J=5.6 Hz, 2H), 1.19 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 246.19 (M+H+).
  • The crude material from the previous reaction (5.0 g, 20.4 mmol) was dissolved in dry THF (50 mL) and SOCl2 (4.85 g, 40.8 mmol), stirred for 2 h at RT, concentrated in vacuo to yield 3-tert-butyl-1-(3-chloromethylphenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-amine (5.4 g), which was added to N3 (3.93 g, 60.5 mmol) in DMF (50 mL). The reaction mixture was heated at 30° C. for 2 h, poured into H2O (50 mL), and extracted with CH2Cl2. The organic layers were combined, dried over MgSO4, and concentrated in vacuo to yield crude 3-tert-butyl-1-[3-(azidomethyl)phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5-amine (1.50 g, 5.55 mmol).
  • Example I
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00165
  • Example H was dissolved in dry THF (10 mL) and added a THF solution (10 mL) of 1-isocyano naphthalene (1.13 g, 6.66 mmol) and pyridine (5.27 g, 66.6 mmol) at RT. The reaction mixture was stirred for 3 h, quenched with H2O (30 mL), the resulting precipitate filtered and washed with 1 N HCl and ether to yield 1-[2-(3-azidomethyl-phenyl)-5-t-butyl-2H-pyrazol-3-yl]-3-naphthalen-1-yl-urea (2.4 g, 98%) as a white solid.
  • The crude material from the previous reaction and Pd/C (0.4 g) in THF (30 mL) was hydrogenated under 1 atm at RT for 2 h. The catalyst was removed by filtration and the filtrate concentrated in vacuo to yield 1-{3-tert-butyl-1-[3-(aminomethyl)phenyl}-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalene-1-yl)urea (2.2 g, 96%) as a yellow solid. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): 9.02 (s, 1H), 7.91 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 7.89 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 7.67-7.33 (m, 9H), 6.40 (s, 1H), 3.81 (s, 2H), 1.27 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 414 (M+H+).
  • Example J
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00166
  • To a solution of Example H (1.50 g, 5.55 mmol) in dry THF (10 mL) was added a THF solution (10 mL) of 4-chlorophenyl isocyanate (1.02 g, 6.66 mmol) and pyridine (5.27 g, 66.6 mmol) at RT. The reaction mixture was stirred for 3 h and then H2O (30 mL) was added. The precipitate was filtered and washed with 1N HCl and ether to give 1-{3-tert-butyl-1-[3-(aminomethyl)phenyl}-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea (2.28 g, 97%) as a white solid, which was used for next step without further purification. MS (ESI) m/z: 424 (M+H+).
  • Example K
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00167
  • To a solution of benzyl amine (16.5 g, 154 mmol) and ethyl bromoacetate (51.5 g, 308 mmol) in ethanol (500 mL) was added K2CO3 (127.5 g, 924 mmol). The mixture was stirred at RT for 3 h, was filtered, washed with EtOH, concentrated in vacuo and chromatographed to yield N-(2-ethoxy-2-oxoethyl)-N-(phenylmethyl)-glycine ethyl ester (29 g, 67%). 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 7.39-7.23 (m, 5H), 4.16 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 4H), 3.91 (s, 2H), 3.54 (s, 4H), 1.26 (t, J=72 Hz, 6H); MS (ESI): m/e: 280 (M++H).
  • A solution of N-(2-ethoxy-2-oxoethyl)-N-(phenylmethyl)-glycine ethyl ester (7.70 g, 27.6 mmol) in methylamine alcohol solution (25-30%, 50 mL) was heated to 50° C. in a sealed tube for 3 h, cooled to RT and concentrated in vacuo to yield N-(2-methylamino-2-oxoethyl)-N-(phenylmethyl)-glycine methylamide in quantitative yield (7.63 g). 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 7.35-7.28 (m, 5H), 6.75 (br s, 2H), 3.71 (s, 2H), 3.20 (s, 4H), 2.81 (d, J=5.6 Hz, 6H); MS (ESI) in/e 250 (M+H+).
  • The mixture of N-(2-methylamino-2-oxoethyl)-N-(phenylmethyl)-glycine methylamide (3.09 g, 11.2 mmol) in MeOH (30 mL) was added 10% Pd/C (0.15 g). The mixture was stirred and heated to 40° C. under 40 psi H2 for 10 h, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to yield. N-(2-methylamino-2-oxoethyl)-glycine methylamide in quantitative yield (1.76 g). 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 6.95 (br s, 2H), 3.23 (s, 4H), 2.79 (d, J=6.0, 4.8 Hz), 2.25 (br s, 1H); MS (ESI) m/e 160 (M+H+)
  • Example 1
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00168
  • To a solution of 1-methyl-[1,2,4]triazolidine-3,5-dione (188 mg, 16.4 mmol) and sodium hydride (20 mg, 0.52 mmol) in DMSO (1 mL) was added Example E (86 mg, 0.2 mmol). The reaction was stirred at RT overnight, quenched with H2O (10 mL), extracted with CH2Cl2, and the organic layer was separated, washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by preparative HPLC to yield 1-(3-tert-butyl-1-{3-[(1-methyl-3,5-dioxo-1,2,4-triazolidin-4-yl)methyl]phenyl}-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalene-1-yl)urea (Example 1, 14 mg). 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ7.88-7.86 (m, 2H), 7.71-7.68 (m, 2H), 7.58 (m, 2H), 7.60-7.42 (m, 5H), 6.49 (s, 1H), 4.85 (s, 1H), 1.34 (s, 9H), 1.27 (s, 6H); MS (ESI) m/z: 525 (M+H+).
  • Example 2
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00169
  • The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 1, utilizing Example G to yield 1-(3-tert-butyl-1-{3-[(1-methyl-3,5-dioxo-1,2,4-triazolidin-4-yl)methyl]phenyl}-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.2˜7.5 (m, 7H), 6.40 (s 1H), 4.70 (s, 2H), 2.60 (d, J=14 Hz, 2H), 1.90 (m, 1H), 1.50 (m, 1H), 1.45 (s, 9H), 1.30 (m, 2H), 1.21 (s, 3H), 1.18 (s, 6H); MS (ESI) m/z: 620 (M+H+).
  • Example 3
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00170
  • A mixture of compound 1,1-Dioxo-[1,2,5]thiadiazolidin-3-one (94 mg, 0.69 mmol) and NaH (5.5 mg, 0.23 mmol) in THF (2 mL) was stirred at −10° C. under N2 for 1 h until all NaH was dissolved. Example E (100 mg, 0.23 mmol) was added and the reaction was allowed to stir at RT overnight, quenched with H2O, and extracted with CH2Cl2. The combined organic layers were concentrated in vacuo and the residue was purified by preparative HPLC to yield 1-(3-tert-butyl-1-{[3-(1,1,3-trioxo-[1,2,5]thiadiazolidin-2-yl)methyl]phenyl}-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea (18 mg) as a white powder. 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.71-7.44 (m, 11H), 6.45 (s, 1H), 4.83 (s, 2H), 4.00 (s, 2H), 1.30 (s, 9H). MS (ESI) m/z: 533.40 (M+H+).
  • Example 4
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00171
  • The title compound was obtained in a manner analogous to Example 3 utilizing Example G. to yield 1-(3-tert-butyl-1-{[3-(1,1,3-trioxo-[1,2,5]thiadiazolidin-2-yl)methyl]phenyl}-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea. 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.38-7.24 (m, 8H), 6.42 (s, 1H), 4.83 (s, 2H), 4.02 (s, 2H), 1.34 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 517 (M+H+).
  • Example 5
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00172
  • To a stirred solution of chlorosulfonyl isocyanate (19.8 μL, 0.227 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (0.5 mL) at 0° C. was added pyrrolidine (18.8 μL, 0.227 mmol) at such a rate that the reaction solution temperature did not rise above 5° C. After stirring for 1.5 h, a solution of Example J (97.3 mg, 0.25 mmol) and Et3N (95 L, 0.678 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (1.5 mL) was added at such a rate that the reaction temperature did not rise above 5° C. When the addition was completed, the reaction solution was warmed to RT and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was poured into 10% HCl, extracted with CH2Cl2, the organic layer washed with saturated NaCl, dried over MgSO4, and filtered. After removal of the solvents, the crude product was purified by preparative HPLC to yield 1-(3-tert-butyl-1-[[3-N-[[(1-pyrrolidinylcarbonyl)amino]sulphonyl]aminomethyl]phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea. 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.61 (s, 1H), 7.43-7.47 (m, 3H), 7.23-7.25 (dd, J=6.8 Hz, 2H), 7.44 (dd, J=6.8 Hz, 2H), 6.52 (s, 1H), 4.05 (s, 2H), 3.02 (m, 4H), 1.75 (m, 4H), 1.34 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 574.00 (M+H+).
  • Example 6
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00173
  • The title compound was made in a manner analogous to Example 5 utilizing Example I to yield 1-(3-tert-butyl-1-[[3-N-[[(1-pyrrolidinylcarbonyl)amino]sulphonyl]aminomethyl]-phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea. 1HNMR (CDCl3): δ7.88 (m, 2H), 7.02-7.39 (m, 2H), 7.43-7.50 (m, 7H), 6.48 (s, 1H), 4.45 (s, 1H), 3.32-3.36 (m, 4H), 1.77-1.81 (m, 4H), 1.34 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 590.03 (M+H+).
  • Example 7
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00174
  • To a stirred solution of chlorosulfonyl isocyanate (19.8μΛ, 0.227μμoλ) iv XH11 (0.5μΛ) ατ 0° C., was added Example J (97.3 mg, 0.25 mmol) at such a rate that the reaction solution temperature did not rise above 5° C. After being stirred for 1.5 h, a solution of pyrrolidine (18.8 μL, 0.227 mmol) and Et3N (95 μL, 0.678 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (1.5 mL) was added at such a rate that the reaction temperature did not rise above 5° C. When addition was completed, the reaction solution was warmed to RT and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was poured into 10% HCl, extracted with CH2Cl2, the organic layer was washed with saturated NaCl, dried over Mg2SO4, and filtered. After removal of the solvents, the crude product was purified by preparative HPLC to yield 1-(3-tert-butyl-1-[[3-N-[[(1-pyrrolidinylsulphonyl)amino]carbonyl]aminomethyl]phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea. 1HNMR (CDCl3): δ 7.38 (m, 1H), 7.36-7.42 (m, 3H), 7.23 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 7.40 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 6.43 (s, 1H), 4.59 (s, 1H), 4.43 (s, 2H), 1.81 (s, 2H), 1.33 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 574.10 (M+H+).
  • Example 8
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00175
  • The title compound was made in a manner analogous to Example 7 utilizing Example I to yield 1-(3-tert-butyl-1-[[3-N-[[(1-pyrrolidinylsulphonyl)amino]carbonyl]aminomethyl]-phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea. 1HNMR (CDCl3): δ7.88 (m, 2H), 7.02-7.39 (m, 2H), 7.43-7.50 (m, 7H), 6.48 (s, 1H), 4.45 (s, 1H), 3.32-3.36 (m, 4H), 1.77-1.81 (m, 4H), 1.34 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 590.03 (M+H+).
  • Example 9
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00176
  • To a solution of Reagent BB (36 mg, 0.15 mmol), Example 1 (62 mg, 0.15 mmol), HOBt (40 mg, 0.4 mmol) and NMM (0.1 mL, 0.9 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) was added EDCI (58 mg, 0.3 mmol). After being stirred overnight, the mixture was poured into water (15 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (3 5 mL). The organic layers were combined, washed with brine, dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by preparative TLC to yield 1,5,7-trimethyl-2,4-dioxo-3-azabicyclo[3.3.1]nonane-7-carboxylic acid 3-[3-t-butyl-5-(3-naphthalen-1-yl-ureido)-pyrazol-1-yl]benzylamide (22 mg). 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 8.40 (s, 1H), 8.14 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 7.91 (s, 1H), 7.87 (s, 1H), 7.86 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 7.78 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.73 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.69 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.57-7.40 (m, 4H), 7.34 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 6.69 (s, 1H), 6.32 (t, J=5.6 Hz, 1H), 5.92 (brs, 1H), 4.31 (d, J=5.6 Hz, 2H), 2.37 (d, J=14.8 Hz, 2H), 1.80 (d, J=13.2 Hz, 1H), 1.35 (s, 9H), 1.21 (d, J=13.2 Hz, 1H), 1.15 (s, 3H), 1.12 (d, J=12.8 Hz, 2H), 1.04 (s, 6H); MS (ESI) m/z: 635 (M+H+).
  • Example 10
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00177
  • The title compound, was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 9 utilizing Example J to yield 1,5,7-trimethyl-2,4-dioxo-3-aza-bicyclo[3.3.1]nonane-7-carboxylic acid 3-{3-t-butyl-5-[3-(4-chloro-phenyl)-ureido]-pyrazol-1-yl}benzylamide. 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 8.48 (s, 1H), 7.78 (s, 1H), 7.75 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.69 (s, 1H), 7.53 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.48 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 7.26 (m, 3H), 6.62 (s, 1H), 6.35 (t, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 5.69 (brs, 1H), 4.26 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 2H), 2.48 (d, J=14.0 Hz, 2H), 1.87 (d, J=13.6 Hz, 1H), 1.35 (s, 9H), 1.25 (m, 6H), 1.15 (s, 6H); MS (ES) m/z: 619 (M+H+).
  • Example 11
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00178
  • A mixture of Example 1 (41 mg, 0.1 mmol), Kemp acid anhydride (24 mg, 0.1 mmol) and Et3N (100 mg, 1 mmol) in anhydrous CH2Cl2 (2 mL) were stirred overnight at RT, and concentrated in vacuo. Anhydrous benzene (20 mL) was added to the residue, the mixture was refluxed for 3 h, concentrated in vacuo and purified by preparative HPLC to yield 3-{3-[3-t-butyl-5-(3-naphthalen-1-yl-ureido)-pyrazol-1-yl]-benzyl}-1,5-di-methyl-2,4-dioxo-3-aza-bicyclo[3.3.1]nonane-7-carboxylic acid (8.8 mg, 14%). 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.3-7.4 (m, 2H), 7.20 (m, 2H), 7.4-7.6 (m, 7H), 6.50 (m, 1H), 4.80 (s, 2H), 2.60 (d, J=14 Hz, 2H), 1.90 (m, 1H), 1.40 (m, 1H), 1.30 (m, 2H), 1.20 (s, 3H), 1.15 (s, 6H); MS (ESI) m/z: 636 (M+H+).
  • Example 12
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00179
  • The title compound, was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 11 utilizing Example J to yield 3-{3-[3-t-butyl-5-(3-naphthalen-1-yl-ureido)-pyrazol-1-yl]-benzyl}-1,5-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-3-aza-bicyclo[3.3.1]nonane-7-carboxylic acid. 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.2-7.5 (m, 7H), 6.40 (s, 1H), 4.70 (s, 2H), 2.60 (d, J=14 Hz, 2H), 1.90 (m, 1H), 1.50 (m, 1H), 1.45 (s, 9H), 1.30 (m, 2H), 1.21 (s, 3H), 1.18 (s, 6H); MS (ESI) m/z: 620 (M+H+).
  • Example 13
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00180
  • The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 1 utilizing Example E and 4,4-dimethyl-3,5-dioxo-pyrazolidine to yield 1-(3-tert-butyl-1-{3-[(4,4-dimethyl-3,5-dioxopyrazolidin-1-yl)methyl]phenyl}-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea. 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.88-7.86 (m, 2H), 7.71-7.68 (m, 2H), 7.58 (m, 2H), 7.60-7.42 (m, 5H), 6.49 (s, 1H), 4.85 (s, 1H), 1.34 (s, 9H), 1.27 (s, 6H); MS (ESI) m/z: 525 (M+H+).
  • Example 14
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00181
  • The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 1 utilizing Example G and 4,4-dimethyl-3,5-dioxo-pyrazolidine to yield 1-(3-tert-butyl-1-{3-[(4,4-dimethyl-3,5-dioxopyrazolidin-1-yl)methyl]phenyl}-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea. 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.60-7.20 (m, 8H), 6.43 (s, 1H), 4.70 (s, 1H), 1.34 (s, 9H), 1.26 (s, 6H); MS (ESI) m/z: 509, 511 (M+H+).
  • Example 15
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00182
  • Example B was saponified with 2N LiOH in MeOH, and to the resulting acid (64.2 mg, 0.15 mmol) were added HOBt (30 mg, 0.225 mmol), Example K (24 mg, 0.15 mmol) and 4-methylmorpholine (60 mg, 0.60 mmol 4.0 equiv), DMF (3 mL) and EDCI (43 mg, 0.225 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at RT overnight and poured into H2O (3 mL), and a white precipitate collected and further purified by preparative HPLC to yield 1-[1-(3-{bis[(methylcarbamoyl)methyl]carbamoyl}phenyl)-3-tert-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl]-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea (40 mg). 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 8.45 (brs, 1H), 8.10 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.86-7.80 (m, 2H), 7.63-7.56 (m, 2H), 7.52 (s, 1H), 7.47-7.38 (m, 3H), 7.36-7.34 (m, 1H), 7.26 (s, 1H), 7.19-7.17 (m, 2H), 6.60 (s, 1H), 3.98 (s, 2H), 3.81 (s, 3H), 2.87 (s, 3H), 2.63 (s, 3H), 1.34 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 570 (M+H+).
  • Example 16
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00183
  • The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 15 utilizing Example C (37 mg) and Example K to yield 1-[1-(3-{bis[(methylcarbamoyl)methyl]carbamoyl}phenyl)-3-tert-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl]-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea. 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 8.58 (brs, 1H), 8.39 (brs, 1H), 7.64-7.62 (m, 3H), 7.53-7.51 (m, 1H), 7.38 (d, J=9.2 Hz, 2H), 7.25 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 6.44 (s, 1H), 4.17 (s, 2H), 4.11 (s, 2H), 2.79 (s, 3H), 2.69 (s, 3H), 1.34-1.28 (m, 12H); MS (ESI) m/z: 554 (M+H+).
  • Example 17
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00184
  • Example B was saponified with 2N LiOH in MeOH, and to the resulting acid (0.642 g, 1.5 mmol) in dry THF (25 mL) at −78° C. were added freshly distilled triethylamine (0.202 g, 2.0 mmol) and pivaloyl chloride (0.216 g, 1.80 mmol) with vigorous stirring. After stirring at −78° C. for 15 min and at 0° C. for 45 min, the mixture was again cooled to −78° C. and then transferred into the THF solution of lithium salt of D-4-phenyl-oxazolidin-2-one [*: The lithium salt of the oxazolidinone reagent was previously prepared by the slow addition of n-BuLi (2.50M in hexane, 1.20 mL, 3.0 mmol) into THF solution of D-4-phenyl-oxazoldin-2-one at −78° C.]. The reaction solution was stirred at −78° C. for 2 h and RT overnight, and then quenched with aq. ammonium chloride and extracted with dichloromethane (100 mL). The combined organic layers were dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by preparative HPLC to yield D-1-{5-tert-butyl-2-[3-(2-oxo-4-phenyl-oxazolidinyl-3-carbonyl)phenyl]-2H-pyrazol-3-yl}-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea (207 mg, 24%). 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 8.14-8.09 (m, 2H), 8.06 (s, 1H), 7.86-7.81 (m, 4H), 7.79 (s, 1H), 7.68-7.61 (m, 2H), 7.51-7.40 (m, 9H), 6.75 (s, 1H), 5.80 (t, J=9.2, 7.6 Hz, 1H), 4.89 (t, J=9.2 Hz, 1H), 4.42 (dd, J=9.2, 7.6 Hz, 1H), 1.37 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 574 (M+H+).
  • Example 18
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00185
  • The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 17 utilizing Example B and L-4-phenyl-oxazolidin-2-one to yield L-1-{5-tert-butyl-2-[3-(2-oxo-4-phenyl-oxazolidinyl-3-carbonyl)phenyl]-2H-pyrazol-3-yl}-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 8.14-8.09 (m, 2H), 8.06 (s, 1H), 7.86-7.81 (m, 4H), 7.79 (s, 1H), 7.68-7.61 (m, 2H), 7.51-7.40 (m, 9H), 6.75 (s, 1H), 5.80 (t, J=9.2, 7.6 Hz, 1H), 4.89 (t, J=9.2 Hz, 1H), 4.42 (dd, J=9.2, 7.6 Hz, 1H), 1.37 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 574 (M+H+)
  • Example 19
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00186
  • The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 17 utilizing Example C and D-4-phenyl-oxazolidin-2-one to yield D-1-{5-tert-butyl-2-[3-(2-oxo-4-phenyl-oxazolidinyl-3-carbonyl)phenyl]-2H-pyrazol-3-yl}-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea. 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 7.91 (s, 1H), 7.85 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.79 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.71 (m, 1H), 7.65 (m, 1H), 7.49-7.40 (m, 8H), 7.26-7.24 (m, 2H), 6.68 (s, 1H), 5.77 (dd, J=8.8, 8.0 Hz, 1H), 4.96 (t, 8.8 Hz, 1H), 4.44 (dd, J=8.8, 8.0 Hz, 1H), 1.36 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 558 (M+H+)
  • Example 20
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00187
  • The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 17 utilizing Example C and L-4-phenyl-oxazolidin-2-one to yield L-1-{5-tert-butyl-2-[3-(2-oxo-4-phenyl-oxazolidinyl-3-carbonyl)phenyl]-2H-pyrazol-3-yl}-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea. 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 7.91 (s, 1H), 7.85 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.79 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.71 (m, 1H), 7.65 (m, 1H), 7.49-7.40 (m, 8H), 7.26-7.24 (m, 2H), 6.68 (s, 1H), 5.77 (dd, J=8.8, 8.0 Hz, 1H), 4.96 (t, 8.8 Hz, 1H), 4.44 (dd, J=8.8, 8.0 Hz, 1H), 1.36 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 558 (M+H+)
  • Example L
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00188
  • To a stirred suspension of (3-nitro-phenyl)-acetic acid (2 g) in CH2Cl2 (40 ml, with a catalytic amount of DMF) at 0° C. under N2 was added oxalyl chloride (1.1 ml) drop wise. The reaction mixture was stirred for 40 min morpholine (2.5 g) was added. After stirring for 20 min, the reaction mixture was filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to yield 1-morpholin-4-yl-2-(3-nitro-phenyl)-ethanone as a solid (2 g). A mixture of 1-morpholin-4-yl-2-(3-nitro-phenyl)-ethanone (2 g) and 10% Pd on activated carbon (0.2 g) in ethanol (30 ml) was hydrogenated at 30 psi for 3 h and filtered over Celite. Removal of the volatiles in vacuo provided 2-(3-amino-phenyl)-1-morpholin-4-yl-ethanone (1.7 g). A solution of 2-(3-amino-phenyl)-1-morpholin-4-yl-ethanone (1.7 g, 7.7 mmol) was dissolved in 6 N HCl (15 ml), cooled to 0° C., and vigorously stirred. Sodium nitrite (0.54 g) in water (8 ml) was added. After 30 min, tin (II) chloride dihydrate (10 g) in 6 N HCl (30 ml) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 3 h. The pH was adjusted to pH 14 with solid potassium hydroxide and extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic extracts were concentrated in vacuo provided 2-(3-hydrazin-phenyl)-1-morpholin-4-yl-ethanone (1.5 g). 2-(3-Hydrazinophenyl)-1-morpholin-4-yl-ethanone (3 g) and 4,4-dimethyl-3-oxopentanenitrile (1.9 g, 15 mmol) in ethanol (60 ml) and 6 N HCl (1 ml) were refluxed for 1 h and cooled to RT. The reaction mixture was neutralized by adding solid sodium hydrogen carbonate. The slurry was filtered and removal of the volatiles in vacuo provided a residue that was extracted with ethyl acetate. The volatiles were removed in vacuo to provide 2-[3-(3-tert-butyl-5-amino-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)phenyl]-1-morpholinoethanone (4 g), which was used without further purification.
  • Example 21
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00189
  • A mixture of Example L (0.2 g, 0.58 mmol) and 1-naphthylisocyanate (0.10 g, 0.6 mmol) in dry CH2Cl2 (4 ml) was stirred at RT under N2 for 18 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the crude product was purified by column chromatography using ethyl acetate/hexane/CH2Cl2 (3/1/0.7) as the eluent (0.11 g, off-white solid) to yield 1-{3-tert-butyl-1-[3-(2-morpholino-2-oxoethyl)phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5-yl}-3-(naphthalene-1-yl)urea. mp: 194-196; 1H NMR (200 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 9.07 (1H, s), 8.45 (s, 1H), 8.06-7.93 (m, 3H), 7.69-7.44 (m, 7H), 7.33-7.29 (d, 6.9 Hz, 1H), 6.44 (s, 1H), 3.85 (m, 2H), 3.54-3.45 (m, 8H), 1.31 (s, 9H); MS:
  • Example 22
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00190
  • The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 21 utilizing Example L (0.2 g, 0.58 mmol) and 4-chlorophenylisocyanate (0.09 g, 0.6 mmol) to yield 1-{3-tert-butyl-1-[3-(2-morpholino-2-oxoethyl)phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5-yl}-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea. mp: 100 104; 1H NMR (200 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ9.16 (s, 1H), 8.45 (s, 1H), 7.52-7.30 (m, 8H), 6.38 (s, 1H), 3.83 (m, 1H), 3.53-3.46 (m, 8H), 1.30 (s, 9H); MS:
  • Example 23
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00191
  • The title compound is synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 21 utilizing Example L (0.2 g, 0.58 mmol) and phenylisocyanate (0.09 g, 0.6 mmol) to yield 1-{3-tert-butyl-1-[3-(2-morpholino-2-oxoethyl)phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5-yl}-3-phenylurea.
  • Example 24
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00192
  • The title compound is synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 21 utilizing Example L (0.2 g, 0.58 mmol) and 1-isocyanato-4-methoxy-naphthalene to yield 1-{3-tert-butyl-1-[3-(2-morpholino-2-oxoethyl)phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5-yl}-3-(1-methoxynaphthalen-4-yl)urea.
  • Example M
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00193
  • The title compound is synthesized in a manner analogous to Example C utilizing Example A and phenylisocyanate to yield ethyl 3-(3-tert-butyl-5-(3-phenylureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)benzoate.
  • Example N
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00194
  • A solution of (3-nitrophenyl)acetic acid (23 g, 127 mmol) in methanol (250 ml) and a catalytic amount of concentrated in vacuo H2SO4 was heated to reflux for 18 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo to a yellow oil. This was dissolved in methanol (250 ml) and stirred for 18 h in an ice bath, whereupon a slow flow of ammonia was charged into the solution. The volatiles were removed in vacuo. The residue was washed with diethyl ether and dried to afford 2-(3-nitrophenyl)acetamide (14 g, off-white solid). 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 8.1 (s, 1H), 8.0 (d, 1H), 7.7 (d, 1H), 7.5 (m, 1H), 7.1 (bd s, 1H), 6.2 (brs, 1H), 3.6 (s, 2H).
  • The crude material from the previous reaction (8 g) and 10% Pd on activated carbon (1 g) in ethanol (100 ml) was hydrogenated at 30 psi for 18 h and filtered over Celite. Removal of the volatiles in vacuo provided 2-(3-aminophenyl)acetamide (5.7 g). A solution of this material (7 g, 46.7 mmol) was dissolved in 6 N HCl (100 ml), cooled to 0° C., and vigorously stirred. Sodium nitrite (3.22 g, 46.7 mmol) in water (50 ml) was added. After 30 min, tin (II) chloride dihydrate (26 g) in 6 N HCl (100 ml) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 3 h. The pH was adjusted to pH 14 with 50% aqueous NaOH solution and extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organic extracts were concentrated in vacuo provided 2-(3-hydrazinophenyl)acetamide.
  • The crude material from the previous reaction (ca. 15 mmol) and 4,4-dimethyl-3-oxopentanenitrile (1.85 g, 15 mmol) in ethanol (60 ml) and 6 N HCl (1.5 ml) was refluxed for 1 h and cooled to RT. The reaction mixture was neutralized by adding solid sodium hydrogen carbonate. The slurry was filtered and removal of the volatiles in vacuo provided a residue, which was extracted with ethyl acetate. The solvent was removed in vacuo to provide 2-[3-(3-tert-butyl-5-amino-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)phenyl]acetamide as a white solid (3.2 g), which was used without further purification.
  • Example 25
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00195
  • A mixture of Example N (2 g, 0.73 mmol) and 1-naphthylisocyanate (0.124 g, 0.73° mmol) in dry CH2Cl2 (4 ml) was stirred at RT under N2 for 18 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the crude product was washed with ethyl acetate (8 ml) and dried in vacuo to yield 1-{3-tert-butyl-1-[3-(carbamoylmethyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl}-3-(naphthalene-1-yl)urea as a white solid (0.22 g). mp: 230 (dec.); 1H NMR (200 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 9.12 (s, 1H), 8.92 (s, 1H), 8.32-8.08 (m, 3H), 7.94-7.44 (m, 8H), 6.44 (s, 1H), 3.51 (s, 2H), 1.31 (s, 9H); MS:
  • Example 26
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00196
  • The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 23 utilizing Example N (0.2 g, 0.73 mmol) and 4-chlorophenylisocyanate (0.112 g, 0.73 mmol) to yield 1-{3-tert-butyl-1-[3-(carbamoylmethyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl}-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea as a white solid (0.28 g). mp: 222 224. (dec.); 1H NMR (200 MHz, DMSO-d6); δ 9.15 (s, 1H), 8.46 (s, 1H), 7.55-7.31 (m, 8H), 6.39 (s, 1H), 3.48 (s, 2H), 1.30 (s, 9H); MS:
  • Example 0
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00197
  • The title compound is synthesized in a manner analogous to Example C utilizing Example A and 1-isocyanato-4-methoxy-naphthalene to yield ethyl 3-(3-tert-butyl-5-(3-(1-methoxynaphthalen-4-yl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)benzoate.
  • Example 27
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00198
  • The title compound is synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 17 utilizing Example M and D-4-phenyl-oxazolidin-2-one to yield D-1-{5-tert-butyl-2-[3-(2-oxo-4-phenyl-oxazolidinyl-3-carbonyl)phenyl]-2H-pyrazol-3-yl}-3-phenylurea.
  • Example 28
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00199
  • The title compound is synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 17 utilizing. Example M and L-4-phenyl-oxazolidin-2-one to yield L-1-{5-tert-butyl-2-[3-(2-oxo-4-phenyl-oxazolidinyl-3-carbonyl)phenyl]-2H-pyrazol-3-yl}-3-phenylurea.
  • Example P
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00200
  • A mixture of 3-(3-amino-phenyl)-acrylic acid methyl ester (6 g) and 10% Pd on activated carbon (1 g) in ethanol (50 ml) was hydrogenated at 30 psi for 18 h and filtered over Celite. Removal of the volatiles in vacuo provided 3-(3-amino-phenyl)propionic acid methyl ester (6 g).
  • A vigorously stirred solution of the crude material from the previous reaction (5.7 g, 31.8 mmol) dissolved in 6 N HCl (35 ml) was cooled to 0° C., and sodium nitrite (2.2 g) in water (20 ml) was added. After 1 h, tin (II) chloride dihydrate (18 g) in 6 N HCl (35 ml) was added. And the mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 3 h. The pH was adjusted to pH 14 with solid KOH and extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic extracts were concentrated in vacuo provided methyl 3-(3-hydrazino-phenyl)propionate (1.7 g).
  • A stirred solution of the crude material from the previous reaction (1.7 g, 8.8 mmol) and 4,4-dimethyl-3-oxopentanenitrile (1.2 g, 9.7 mmol) in ethanol (30 ml) and 6 N HCl (2 ml) was refluxed for 18 h and cooled to RT. The volatiles were removed in vacuo and the residue dissolved in EtOAc and washed with 1 N aqueous NaOH. The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated in vacuo and the residue was purified by column chromatography using 30% ethyl acetate in hexane as the eluent to provide methyl 3-[3-(3-tert-butyl-5-amino-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)phenyl]propionate (3.2 g), which was used without further purification
  • Example 29
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00201
  • A mixture of Example P (0.35 g, 1.1 mmol) and 1-naphthylisocyanate (0.19 g, 1.05 mmol) in dry CH2Cl2 (5 ml) was stirred at RT under N2 for 20 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue was stirred in a solution of THF (3 ml)/MeOH (2 ml)/water (1.5 ml) containing lithium hydroxide (0.1 g) for 3 h at RT, and subsequently diluted with EtOAc and dilute citric acid solution. The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4), and the volatiles removed in vacuo. The residue was purified by column chromatography using 3% methanol in CH2Cl2 as the eluent to yield 3-(3-{3-tert-butyl-5-[3-(naphthalen-1-yl)ureido]-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)phenylpropionic acid (0.22 g, brownish solid). mp: 105-107; 1H NMR (200 MHz, CDCl3): δ 7.87-7.36 (m, 10H), 7.18-7.16 (m, 1H), 6.52 (s, 1H), 2.93 (t, J=6.9 Hz, 2H), 2.65 (t, J=7.1 Hz, 2H), 1.37 (s, 9H); MS
  • Example 30
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00202
  • The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 29 utilizing Example P (0.30 g, 0.95 mmol) and 4-chlorophenylisocyanate (0.146 g, 0.95 mmol) to yield 3-(3-{3-tert-butyl-5-[3-(4-chloropnehyl)ureido]-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)phenyl)propionic acid (0.05 g, white solid). mp: δ 87; 1H NMR (200 MHz, CDCl3): δ 8.21 (s, 1H), 7.44-7.14 (m, 7H), 6.98 (s, 1H), 6.55 (s, 1H), 2.98 (t, J=5.2 Hz, 2H), 2.66 (t, J=5.6 Hz, 2H), 1.40 (s, 9H); MS
  • Example Q
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00203
  • A mixture of ethyl 3-(4-aminophenyl)acrylate (1.5 g) and 10% Pd on activated carbon (0.3 g) in ethanol (20 ml) was hydrogenated at 30 psi for 18 h and filtered over Celite. Removal of the volatiles in vacuo provided ethyl 3-(4-aminophenyl)propionate (1.5 g).
  • A solution of the crude material from the previous reaction (1.5 g, 8.4 mmol) was dissolved in 6 N HCl (9 ml), cooled to 0° C., and vigorously stirred. Sodium nitrite (0.58 g) in water (7 ml) was added. After 1 h, tin (II) chloride dihydrate (5 g) in 6 N HCl (10 ml) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 3 h. The pH was adjusted to pH 14 with solid KOH and extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic extracts were concentrated in vacuo provided ethyl 3-(4-hydrazino-phenyl)-propionate(1 g).
  • The crude material from the previous reaction (1 g, 8.8 mmol) and 4,4-dimethyl-3-oxopentanenitrile (0.7 g) in ethanol (8 ml) and 6 N HCl (1 ml) was refluxed for 18 h and cooled to RT. The volatiles were removed in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate and washed with 1 N aqueous sodium hydroxide solution. The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by column chromatography using 0.7% methanol in CH2Cl2 as the eluent to provide ethyl 3-{4-[3-tert-butyl-5-(3-(naphthalene-1-yl)ureido]-1H-pyrazol-1-yl}phenyl)propionate (0.57 g).
  • Example 31
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00204
  • A mixture of Example Q (0.25 g, 0.8 mmol) and 1-naphthylisocyanate (0.13 g, 0.8 mmol) in dry CH2Cl2 (5 ml) was stirred at RT under N2 for 20 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue was stirred in a solution of THF (3 ml)/MeOH (2 ml)/water (1.5 ml) containing lithium hydroxide (0.1 g) for 3 h at RT and diluted with EtOAc and diluted citric acid solution. The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4), and the volatiles removed in vacuo. The residue was purified by column chromatography using 4% methanol in CH2Cl2 as the eluent to yield 3-{4-[3-tert-butyl-5-(3-(naphthalene-1-yl)ureido]-1H-pyrazol-1-yl}phenyl)propanonic acid (0.18 g, off-white solid). mp: 120 122; 1H NMR (200 MHz, CDCl3): δ 7.89-7.06 (m, 11H), 6.5 (s, 1H), 2.89 (m, 2H), 2.61 (m, 2H), 1.37 (s, 9H); MS
  • Example 32
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00205
  • The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 31 utilizing Example Q (0.16 g, 0.5 mmol) and 4-chlorophenylisocyanate (0.077 g, 0.5 mmol) to yield 3-{4-[3-tert-butyl-5-(3-(4-chlorophenyl)ureido]-1H-pyrazol-1-yl}phenyl)propanonic acid acid (0.16 g, off-white solid). mp: 112-114; 1H NMR (200 MHz, CDCl3): δ 8.16 (s, 1H), 7.56 (s, 1H), 7.21 (s, 2H), 7.09 (s, 2H), 6.42 (s, 1H), 2.80 (m, 2H), 2.56 (m, 2H), 1.32 (s, 9H); MS
  • Example R
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00206
  • A 250 mL pressure vessel (ACE Glass Teflon screw cap) was charged with 3-nitrobiphenyl (20 g, 0.10 mol) dissolved in THF (˜100 mL) and 10% Pd/C (3 g). The reaction vessel was charged with H2 (g) and purged three times. The reaction was charged with 40 psi H2 (g) and placed on a Parr shaker hydrogenation apparatus and allowed to shake overnight at RT. HPLC showed that the reaction was complete thus the reaction mixture was filtered through a bed of Celite and evaporated to yield the amine: 16.7 g (98% yield)
  • In a 250 mL Erlenmeyer flask with a magnetic stir bar, the crude material from the previous reaction (4.40 g, 0.026 mol) was added to 6 N HCl (40 mL) and cooled with an ice bath to ˜0° C. A solution of NaNO2 (2.11 g, 0.0306 mol, 1.18 eq.) in water (5 mL) was added drop wise. After 30 min, SnCl22H2O (52.0 g, 0.23 mol, 8.86 eq.) in 6N HCl (100 mL) was added and the reaction mixture was allowed to stir for 3 h, then subsequently transferred to a 500 mL round bottom flask. To this, 4,4-dimethyl-3-oxopentanenitrile (3.25 g, 0.026 mol) and EtOH (100 ml) were added and the mixture refluxed for 4 h, concentrated in vacuo and the residue extracted with EtOAc (2×100 mL). The residue was purified by column chromatograph using hexane/EtOAc/Et3N (8:2:0.2) to yield 0.53 g of Example R. 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 7.5 (m, 18H), 5.8 (s, 1H), 1.3 (s, 9H).
  • Example 33
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00207
  • In a dry vial with a magnetic stir bar, Example R (0.145 g; 0.50 mmol) was dissolved in 2 mL CH2Cl2 (anhydrous) followed by the addition of phenylisocyanate (0.0544 mL; 0.50 mmol; 1 eq.). The reaction was kept under argon and stirred for 17 h. Evaporation of solvent gave a crystalline mass that was triturated with hexane/EtOAc (4:1) and filtered to yield 1-(3-tert-butyl-1-(3-phenylphenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-phenylurea (0.185 g, 90%). HPLC purity: 96%; mp: 80 84; 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 7.3 (m, 16H), 6.3 (s, 1H), 1.4 (s, 9H).
  • Example 34
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00208
  • The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 33 utilizing Example R (0.145 g; 0.50 mmol) and p-chlorophenylisocyanate (0.0768 g, 0.50 mmol, 1 eq.) to yield 1-(3-tert-butyl-1-(3-phenylphenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea (0.205 g, 92%). HPLC purity: 96.5%; mp: 134 136; 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 7.5 (m, 14H), 7.0 (s, 1H), 6.6 (s, 1H), 6.4 (s, 1H), 1.4 (s, 9H).
  • Example S
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00209
  • The title compound is synthesized in a manner analogous to Example C utilizing Example A and 4-fluorophenyl isocyanate yield ethyl 3-(3-tert-butyl-5-(3-(4-fluorophenyl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)benzoate.
  • Example 35
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00210
  • The title compound is synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 17 utilizing Example M and D-4-phenyl-oxazolidin-2-one to yield D-1-{5-tert-butyl-2-[3-(2-oxo-4-phenyl-oxazolidinyl-3-carbonyl)phenyl]-2H-pyrazol-3-yl}-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 36
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00211
  • The title compound is synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 29 utilizing Example P (0.30 g, 0.95 mmol) and 4-fluorophenylisocyanate (0.146 g, 0.95 mmol) to yield 3-(3-(3-tert-butyl-5-(3-(4-fluorophenyl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)phenyl)propanoic acid.
  • Example T
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00212
  • To a stirred solution of Example N (2 g, 7.35 mmol) in THF (6 ml) was added borane-methylsulfide (18 mmol). The mixture was heated to reflux for 90 min and cooled to RT, after which 6 N HCl was added and heated to reflux for 10 min. The mixture was basified with NaOH and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4) filtered and concentrated in vacuo to yield 3-tert-butyl-1-[3-(2-aminoethyl)phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5 amine (0.9 g).
  • A mixture of the crude material from the previous reaction (0.8 g, 3.1 mmol) and di-tert-butylcarbonate (0.7 g, 3.5 mmol) and catalytically amount of DMAP in dry CH2Cl2 (5 ml) was stirred at RT under N2 for 18 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo and the residue was purified by column chromatography using 1% methanol in CH2Cl2 as the eluent to yield tert-butyl 3-(3-tert-butyl-5-amino-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)phenylcarbamate (0.5 g).
  • Example 37
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00213
  • A mixture of Example T (0.26 g, 0.73 mmol) and 1-naphthylisocyanate (0.123 g, 0.73 mmol) in dry CH2Cl2 (5 ml) was stirred at RT under N2 for 48 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue was purified by column chromatography using 1% methanol in CH2Cl2 as the eluent (0.15 g, off-white solid). The solid was then treated with TFA (0.2 ml) for 5 min and diluted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with saturated NaHCO3 solution and brine, dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to yield 1-{3-tert-butyl-1-[3-(2-Aminoethyl)phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5-yl}-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea as a solid (80 mg). mp: 110-112 1H NMR (200 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 9.09 (s, 1H), 8.90 (s, 1H), 8.01-7.34 (m, 11H), 6.43 (s, 1H), 3.11 (m, 2H), 2.96 (m, 2H), 1.29 (s, 9H); MS
  • Example 38
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00214
  • The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 37 utilizing Example T (0.15 g, 0.42 mmol) and 4-chlorophenylisocyanate (0.065 g, 0.42 mmol) to yield 1-{3-tert-butyl-1-[3-(2-Aminoethyl)phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5-yl}-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea as an off-white solid (20 mg). mp:125-127; 1H NMR (200 MHz, CDCl3): δ 8.81 (s, 1H), 8.66 (s, 1H), 7.36-7.13 (m, 8H), 6.54 (s, 1H), 3.15 (brs, 2H), 2.97 (brs, 2H), 1.32 (s, 9H); MS
  • Example U
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00215
  • In a 250 mL Erlenmeyer flask with a magnetic stir bar, m-anisidine (9.84 g, 0.052 mol) was added to 6 N HCl (80 mL) and cooled with an ice bath to 0° C. A solution of NaNO2 (4.22 g, 0.0612 mol, 1.18 eq.) in water (10 mL) was added drop wise. After 30 min, SnCl22H2O (104.0 g, 0.46 mol, 8.86 eq.) in 6 N HCl (200 mL) was added and the reaction mixture was allowed to stir for 3 h., and then subsequently transferred to a 1000 mL round bottom flask. To this, 4,4-dimethyl-3-oxopentanenitrile (8.00 g, 0.064 mol) and EtOH (200 mL) were added and the mixture refluxed for 4 h, concentrated in vacuo and the residue recrystallized from CH2Cl2 to yield 3-tert-butyl-1-(3-methoxyphenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-amine as the HCl salt (13.9 g).
  • The crude material from the previous reaction (4.65 g, 0.165 mol) was dissolved in 30 mL of CH2Cl2 with Et3N (2.30 mL, 0.0165 mol, 1 eq.) and stirred for 30 min Extraction with water followed by drying of the organic phase with Na2SO4 and concentration in vacuo yielded a brown syrup that was the free base, 3-tert-butyl-1-(3-methoxyphenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-amine (3.82 g, 94.5%), which was used without further purification.
  • Example 39
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00216
  • In a dry vial with a magnetic stir bar, Example U (2.62 g, 0.0107 mol) was dissolved in CH2Cl2 (5 mL, anhydrous) followed by the addition of 1-naphthylisocyanate (1.53 mL, 0.0107 mol, 1 eq.). The reaction was kept under Ar and stirred for 18 h. Evaporation of solvent followed by column chromatography with EtOAc/hexane/Et3N (7:2:0.5) as the eluent yielded 1-[3-tert-butyl-1-(3-methoxyphenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl]-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea (3.4 g, 77%). HPLC: 97%; mp: 78-80; 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 7.9-6.8 (m, 15H), 6.4 (s, 1H), 3.7 (s, 3H), 1.4 (s, 9H).
  • Example 40
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00217
  • The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 39 utilizing Example U (3.82 g; 0.0156 mol) and p-chlorophenylisocyanate (2.39 g, 0.0156 mol, 1 eq.), purified by trituration with hexane/EtOAc (4:1) and filtered to yield 1-[3-tert-butyl-1-(3-methoxyphenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl]-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea (6.1 g, 98%). HPLC purity: 95%; mp: 158-160; 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 7.7 (s, 1H); δ7.2 6.8 (m, 8H), 6.4 (s, 1H), 3.7 (s, 3H), 1.3 (s, 9H).
  • Example 41
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00218
  • In a 100 ml round bottom flask equipped with a magnetic stir bar, Example 39 (2.07 g) was dissolved in CH2Cl2 (20 mL) and cooled to 0° C. with an ice bath. BBr3 (1 M in CH2Cl2; 7.5 mL) was added slowly. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm warm to RT overnight. Additional BBr3 (1 M in CH2Cl2, 2×1 mL, 9.5 mmol total added) was added and the reaction was quenched by the addition of MeOH. Evaporation of solvent led to a crystalline material that was chromatographed on silica gel (30 g) using CH2Cl2/MeOH (9.6:0.4) as the eluent to yield 1-[3-tert-butyl-1-(3-hydroxyphenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl]-3-(naphthalene-1-yl)urea (0.40 g, 20%). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 9.0 (s, 1H), 8.8 (s, 1H), 8.1-6.8 (m, 11H), 6.4 (s, 1H), 1.3 (s, 9H). MS (ESI) m/z: 401 (M+H+).
  • Example 42
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00219
  • The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 41 utilizing Example 40 (2.00 g, 5 mmol) that resulted in a crystalline material that was filtered and washed with MeOH to yield 1-[3-tert-butyl-1-(3-hydroxyphenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl]-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea (1.14 g, 60%). HPLC purity: 96%; mp: 214-216; 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 8.4 (s, 1H), 7.7 (s, 1H), 7.4-6.6 (m, 9H), 1.3 (s, 9H).
  • Example V
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00220
  • The starting material, 1-[4-(aminomethyl)phenyl]-3-tert-butyl-N-nitroso-1H-pyrazol-5-amine, was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example A utilizing 4-aminobenzamide and 4,4-dim ethyl-3-oxopentanenitrile.
  • A 1 L four-necked round bottom flask was equipped with a stir bar, a source of dry Ar, a heating mantle, and a reflux condenser. The flask was flushed with Ar and charged with the crude material from the previous reaction (12 g, 46.5 mmol; 258.1 g/mol) and anhydrous THF (500 ml). This solution was treated cautiously with LiAlH4 (2.65 g, 69.8 mmol) and the reaction was stirred overnight. The reaction was heated to reflux and additional LiAlH4 was added complete (a total of 8.35 g added). The reaction was cooled to 0 and H2O (8.4 ml), 15% NaOH (8.4 ml) and H2O (24 ml) were added sequentially; The mixture was stirred for 2 h, the solids filtered through Celite, and washed extensively with THF, the solution was concentrated in vacuo to yield 1-(4-(aminomethyl-3-methoxy)phenyl)-3-tert-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-amine (6.8 g) as an oil.
  • A 40 mL vial was equipped with a stir bar, a septum, and a source of Ar. The vial was charged with the crude material from the previous reaction (2 g, 8.2 mmol, 244.17 g/mol) and (15 mL) were cooled to 0 under Ar and di-tert-butylcarbonate (1.9 g, 9.0 mmol) dissolved in CHCl3 (5 mL) was added drop wise over a 2 min period. The mixture was treated with 1N KOH (2 mL), added over a 2 h period. The resulting emulsion was broken with the addition of saturated NaCl solution, the layers were separated and the aqueous phase extracted with CH2Cl2 (2×1.5 ml). The combined organic phases were dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated in vacuo to yield tert-butyl [4-(3-tert-butyl-5-amino-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)-2-methoxybenzylcarbamate (2.23 g, 79%) as a light yellow solid. 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 7.4 (m, 5H), 5.6 (s, 1H), 4.4 (d, 2H), 1.5 (s, 9H), 1.3 (s, 9H).
  • Example 43
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00221
  • A 40 mL vial was equipped with a septum, a stir bar and a source of Ar, and charged with Example V (2 g, 5.81 mmol), flushed with Ar and dissolved in CHCl3 (20 mL). The solution was treated with 2-naphthylisocyanate (984 mg, 5.81 mmol) in CHCl3 (5 mL) and added over 1 min The reaction was stirred for 8 h, and additional 1-naphthylisocyanate (81 mg) was added and the reaction stirred overnight. The solid was filtered and washed with CH2Cl2 to yield tert-butyl 4-[3-tert-butyl-5-(3-naphthalen-1-yl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]benzylcarbamate (1.2 g). HPLC purity: 94.4%; 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 9.1 (s, 1H), 8.8 (s, 1H), 8.0 (m, 3H), 7.6 (m, 9H), 6.4 (s, 1H), 4.2 (d, 2H), 1.4 (s, 9H), 1.3 (s, 9H).
  • Example 44
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00222
  • The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 43 utilizing Example V (2.0 g, 5.81 mmol) and p-chlorophenylisocyanate (892 mg) to yield tert-butyl 4-[3-tert-butyl-5-(3-(4-chloropnehyl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]benzylcarbamate (1.5 g). HPLC purity: 97%; 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 9.2 (s, 1H), 8.4 (s, 1H), 7.4 (m, 8H), 6.4 (s, 1H), 4.2 (d, 2H), 1.4 (s, 9H), 1.3 (s, 9H).
  • Example 45
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00223
  • A 10 mL flask equipped with a stir bar was flushed with Ar and charged with Example 43 (770 mg, 1.5 mmol) and CH2Cl2 (1 ml) and 1:1 CH2Cl2:TFA (2.5 mL). After 1.5 h, reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo, the residue was dissolved in EtOAc (15 mL), washed with saturated NaHCO3 (10 mL) and saturated NaCl (10 mL). The organic layers was dried, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to yield 1-{3-tert-butyl-1-[4-(aminomethyl)phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5-yl}-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea (710 mg). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 7.4 (m, 11H), 6.4 (s, 1H), 3.7 (s, 2H), 1.3 (s, 9H).
  • Example 46
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00224
  • The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 45 utilizing Example 44 (1.5 g, 1.5 mmol) to yield 1-{3-tert-butyl-1-[4-(aminomethyl)phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5-yl}-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea (1.0 g). HPLC purity: 93.6%; mp: 100-102; 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 8.6 (s, 1H), 7.3 (m, 8H), 6.3 (s, 1H), 3.7 (brs, 2H), 1.3 (s, 9H).
  • Example 47
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00225
  • A 10 ml vial was charged with Example 45 (260 mg, 63 mmol) and absolute EtOH (3 mL) under Ar. Divinylsulfone (63 uL, 74 mg, 0.63 mmol) was added drop wise over 3 min and the reaction was stirred at RT for 1.5 h. and concentrated in vacuo to yield a yellow solid, which was purified via preparative TLC, developed in 5% MeOH:CH2Cl2. The predominant band was cut and eluted off the silica with 1:1 EtOAc:MeOH, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to yield 1-{3-tert-butyl-1-[4-(1,1-dioxothiomorpholin-4-yl)methylphenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5-yl}-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea (150 mg). HPLC purity: 96%; 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 9.1 (s, 1H), 9.0 (s, 1H), 7.9 (m, 3H), 7.5 (m, 8H), 6.4 (s, 1H), 3.1 (brs, 4H), 2.9 (brs, 4H), 1.3 (s, 9H).
  • Example 48
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00226
  • The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 47 utilizing Example 46 (260 mg, 0.66 mmol) to yield 1-{3-tert-butyl-1-[4-(1,1-dioxothiomorpholin-4-yl)methylphenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5-yl}-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea (180 mg). HPLC purity: 93%; mp: 136-138; 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 9.2 (s, 1H), 8.5 (s, 1H), 7.4 (m, 9H), 6.4 (s, 1H), 3.1 (brs, 4H), 3.0 (brs, 4H), 1.3 (s, 9H).
  • Example 49
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00227
  • To a stirring solution of chlorosulfonyl isocyanate (0.35 g, 5 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (20 mL) at 0° C. was added pyrrolidine (0.18 g, 5 mmol) at such a rate that the reaction temperature did not rise above 5° C. After stirring for 2 h, a solution of Example 41 (1.10 g, 6.5 mmol) and triethylamine (0.46 g, 9 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (20 mL) was added. When the addition was complete, the mixture was allowed to warm to RT and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was poured into 10% HCl (10 mL) saturated with NaCl, the organic layer was separated and the aqueous layer extracted with ether (20 mL). The combined organic layers were dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated in vacuo, purified by preparative HPLC to yield (pyrrolidine-1-carbonyl)sulfamic acid 3-[3-tert-butyl-5-(3-naphthalen-1-yl-ureido)-pyrazol-1-yl]phenyl ester (40 mg). 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 9.12 (brs, 1H), 8.61 (brs, 1H), 7.85-7.80 (m, 3H), 7.65 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 7.53-7.51 (m, 1H), 7.45-7.25 (m, 5H), 6.89 (s, 4H), 3.36-3.34 (brs, 1H), 3.14-3.13 (brs, 2H), 1.69 (brs, 2H), 1.62 (brs, 2H), 1.39 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 577 (M+H+).
  • Example 50
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00228
  • The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 49 utilizing Example 42 to yield (pyrrolidine-1-carbonyl)sulfamic acid 3-[3-tert-butyl-5-(4-chlorophenyl-1-yl-ureido)pyrazol-1-yl]phenyl ester. MS (ESI) m/z: 561 (M+H+).
  • Example W
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00229
  • Solid 4-methoxyphenylhydrazine hydrochloride (25.3 g) was suspended in toluene (100 mL) and treated with triethylamine (20.2 g). The mixture was stirred at RT for 30 min and treated with pivaloylacetonitrile (18 g). The reaction was heated to reflux and stirred overnight. The hot mixture was filtered, the solids washed with hexane and dried in vacuo to afford 3-tert-butyl-1-(4-methoxyphenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-amine (25 g, 70%). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 7.5 (d, 2H), 7.0 (d, 1H), 6.4 (s, 1H), 6.1 (s, 2H), 3.9 (s, 3H), 1.3 (s, 9H).
  • Example 51
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00230
  • To a solution of 1-isocyanato-4-methoxy-naphthalene (996 mg) in anhydrous CH2Cl2 (20 mL) of was added Example W (1.23 g). The reaction solution was stirred for 3 h, the resulting white precipitate filtered, treated with 10% HCl and recrystallized from MeOH, and dried in vacuo to yield 1-[3-tert-butyl-1-(4-methoxyphenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl]-3-(1-methoxynaphthalen-4-yl-urea as white crystals (900 mg, 40%). HPLC purity: 96%; mp: 143-144; 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 8.8 (s, 1H), 8.5 (s, 1H), 8.2 (d, 1H), 8.0 (d, 1H), 7.6 (m, 5H), 7.1 (d, 2H), 7.0 (d, 1H), 6.3 (s, 1H), 4.0 (s, 3H), 3.9 (s, 3H); 1.3 (s, 9H).
  • Example 52
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00231
  • The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 51 utilizing Example W and p-bromophenylisocyanate (990 mg) to yield 1-{3-tert-butyl-1-(4-methoxyphenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl}-3-(4-bromophenyl)urea as off-white crystals (1.5 g, 68%). HPLC purity: 98%; mp: 200-201; 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 9.3 (s, 1H), 8.3 (s, 1H), 7.4 (m, 6H), 7.0 (d, 2H), 6.3 (s, 1H), 3.8 (s, 3H), 1.3 (s, 9H).
  • Example 53
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00232
  • The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 51 utilizing Example W and p-chlorophenylisocyanate (768 mg) into yield 1-{3-tert-butyl-1-(4-methoxyphenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl}-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea as white crystals (1.3 g, 65%). HPLC purity: 98%; mp: 209-210; 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 9.1 (s, 1H), 8.3 (s, 1H), 7.4 (m, 4H), 7.3 (d, 2H), 7.1 (d, 2H), 6.3 (s, 1H), 3.8 (s, 3H), 1.3 (s, 9H).
  • Example 54
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00233
  • The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 41 utilizing Example 53 (500 mg) to yield 1-{3-tert-butyl-1-(4-hydroxyphenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl}-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea as white crystals (300 mg, 62%). HPLC purity: 94%; mp: 144-145; 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 9.7 (s, 1H), 9.1 (s, 1H), 8.3 (s, 1H), 7.4 (d, 2H), 7.3 (m, 4H); 6.9 (d, 2H), 6.3 (s, 1H), 1.3 (s, 9H)
  • Example 55
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00234
  • The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 41 utilizing Example (550 mg) to yield 1-{3-tert-butyl-1-(4-hydroxyphenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl}-3-(4-bromophenyl)urea as a white crystalline solid (400 mg, 70%). HPLC purity: 93%; mp: 198 200; 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 9.7 (s, 1H), 9.2 (s, 1H), 8.3 (s, 1H), 7.4 (d, 4H), 7.2 (m, 2H), 6.9 (d, 2H), 6.3 (s, 1H), 1.3 (s, 9H).
  • Example X
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00235
  • Methyl 4-(3-tert-butyl-5-amino-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)benzoate (3.67 mmol) was prepared from methyl 4-hydrazinobenzoate and pivaloylacetonitrile by the procedure of Regan, et al., J. Med. Chem., 45, 2994 (2002).
  • Example 56
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00236
  • A 500 mL round bottom flask was equipped with a magnetic stir bar and an ice bath. The flask was charged with Example X (1 g) and this was dissolved in CH2Cl2 (100 mL). Saturated sodium bicarbonate (100 mL) was added and the mixture rapidly stirred, cooled in an ice bath and treated with diphosgene (1.45 g) and the heterogeneous mixture stirred for 1 h. The layers were separated and the CH2Cl2 layer treated with tert-butanol (1.07 g) and the solution stirred overnight at RT. The solution was washed with H2O (2×150 mL), dried (Na2SO4), filtered, concentrated in vacuo, and purified by flash chromatography using 1:2 ethyl acetate:hexane as the eluent to yield tert-butyl 1-(4-(methoxycarbonyl)phenyl)-3-tert-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate (100 mg) as an off-white solid. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 9.2 (s, 1H), 8.1 (d, 2H), 7.7 (d, 2H), 6.3 (s, 1H), 3.3 (s, 3H), 1.3 (s, 18H).
  • Example 57
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00237
  • The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 41 utilizing Example X (1.37 g) and p-chlorophenylisocyanate (768 mg) to yield methyl 4-{3-tert-butyl-5-[3-(4-chlorophenyl)ureido]-1H-pyrazol-1-yl}benzoate as white crystals (1.4 g 66%). HPLC purity: 98%; mp: 160-161; 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 9.2 (s, 1H), 8.6 (s, 1H), 8.1 (d, 2H), 7.8 (d, 2H), 7.5 (d, 2H), 7.3 (d, 2H), 6.4 (s, 1H), 3.9 (s, 3H), 1.3 (s, 9H).
  • Example 58
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00238
  • The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 41 utilizing Example X (1.27 g) and 1-isocyanato-4-methoxy-naphthalene (996 mg) to yield methyl 4-{3-tert-butyl-5-[3-(1-methoxynaphthalen-4-yl)ureido]-1H-pyrazol-1-yl}benzoate as white crystals (845 mg, 36%). HPLC purity: 98%; mp: 278 280; 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 8.76 (s, 1H), 8.73 (s, 1H), 8.1 (m, 3H), 7.9 (d, 1H), 7.7 (d, 2H), 7.6 (m, 3H), 7.0 (d, 1H), 7.0 (d, 1H), 6.3 (s, 1H), 4.0 (s, 3H), 3.9 (s, 3H), 1.3 (s, 9H).
  • Example 59
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00239
  • The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 41 utilizing Example X (1.37 g) and p-bromophenylisocyanate (990 mg) to yield methyl 4-{3-tert-butyl-5-[3-(4-bromophenyl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl}benzoate as white crystals (1.4 g, 59%). HPLC purity: 94%; mp: 270 272; 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 9.2 (s, 1H), 8.6 (s, 1H), 8.1 (d, 2H), 7.7 (d, 2H), 7.4 (d, 4H), 6.4 (s, 1H), 3.9 (s, 3H), 1.3 (s, 9H).
  • Example 60
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00240
  • To a solution of Example 59 (700 mg) in 30 mL of toluene at −78° C., was added dropwise a solution of diisobutylaluminum hydride in toluene (1M in toluene, 7.5 mL) over 10 min. The reaction mixture was stirred for 30 min at −78° C., and then 30 min at 0° C. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo to dryness and treated with H2O. The solid was filtered and treated with acetonitrile. The solution was evaporated to dryness and the residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate, and precipitated by hexanes to afford yellow solid which was dried under vacuum to give 1-[3-tert-butyl-1-(4-hydroxymethyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl]urea (400 mg, 61%). HPLC purity: 95%; 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 9.2 (s, 1H), 8.4 (s, 1H), 7.5 (m, 8H), 6.4 (s, 1H), 5.3 (t, 1H), 4.6 (d, 2H), 1.3 (s, 9H).
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00241
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00242
  • Wherein Y is O, S, NR6, —NR6SO2-, NR6CO—, alkylene, O—(CH2)n—, NR6-(CH2)n—, wherein one of the methylene units may be substituted with an oxo group, or Y is a direct bond; D is taken from the groups identified in Chart I:
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00243
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00244
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00245
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00246
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00247
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00248
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00249
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00250
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00251
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00252
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00253
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00254
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00255
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00256
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00257
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00258
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00259
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00260
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00261
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00262
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00263
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00264
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00265
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00266
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00267
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00268
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00269
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00270
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00271
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00272
  • wherein X or Y is O, S, NR6, —NR6SO2-, NR6CO—, alkylene, O—(CH2)n-, NR6-(CH2)n-, wherein one of the methylene units may be substituted with an oxo group, or X or Y is a direct bond; D is taken from the groups identified in Chart I:
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00273
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00274
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00275
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00276
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00277
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00278
  • Specific examples of the present invention are illustrated by their structural formulae below:
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00279
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00280
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00281
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00282
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00283
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00284
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00285
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00286
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00287
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00288
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00289
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00290
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00291
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00292
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00293
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00294
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00295
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00296
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00297
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00298
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00299
    Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00300
  • Example Y
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00301
  • To a solution of 3-nitro-benzaldehyde (15.1 g, 0.1 mol) in CH2Cl2 (200 mL) was added (triphenyl-15-phosphanylidene)-acetic acid ethyl ester (34.8 g, 0.1 mol) in CH2Cl2 (100 mL) dropwise at 0° C., which was stirred for 2 h. After removal the solvent under reduced pressure, the residue was purified by column chromatography to afford 3-(3-nitro-phenyl)-acrylic acid ethyl ester (16.5 g, 74.6%) 1H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 8.42 (s, 1H), 8.23 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.82 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.72 (d, J=16.0 Hz, 1H), 7.58 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 6.56 (d, J=16.0 Hz, 1H), 4.29 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 1.36 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 3H).
  • A mixture of 3-(3-nitro-phenyl)-acrylic acid ethyl ester (16.5 g, 74.6 mmol) and Pd/C (1.65 g) in methanol (200 mL) was stirred under 40 psi of H2 at RT for 2 h then filtered over celite. After removal the solvent, 14 g of 3-(3-amino-phenyl)-propionic acid ethyl ester was obtained and used directly without further purification. 1H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 7.11 (t, J=5.6 Hz, 1H), 6.67 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 6.63-6.61 (m, 2H), 4.13 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.87 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 2.59 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 1.34 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 3H).
  • To a solution of 3-(3-amino-phenyl)-propionic acid ethyl ester (14 g, 72.5 mmol) in concentrated HCl (200 mL) was added an aqueous solution (10 mL) of NaNO2 (5 g, 72.5 mmol) at 0° C. and the resulting mixture was stirred for 1 h. A solution of SnCl2.2H2O (33 g, 145 mmol) in concentrated HCl (150 mL) was then added at 0° C. The reaction solution was stirred for an additional 2 h at RT. The precipitate was filtered and washed with ethanol and ether to give 3-(3-hydrazino-phenyl)-propionic acid ethyl ester as a white solid, which was used without further purification.
  • Example Z
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00302
  • A mixture of Example Y (13 g, 53.3 mmol) and 4,4-dimethyl-3-oxo-pentanenitrile (6.9 g, 55 mol) in ethanol (150 mL) was heated to reflux overnight. The reaction solution was evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography to give 3-[3-(5-amino-3-t-butyl-pyrazol-1-yl)-phenyl]-propionic acid ethyl ester (14.3 g, 45.4 mmol) as a white solid. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): 7.39-7.32 (m, 3H), 7.11 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 5.34 (s, 1H), 5.16 (s, 2H), 4.03 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.88 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.63 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 1.19 (s, 9H), 1.15 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H).
  • Example 145
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00303
  • A solution of 4-fluoro-phenylamine (111 mg, 1.0 mmol) and CDI (165 mg, 1.0 mmol) in DMF (2 mL) was stirred at RT for 30 min, and was then added to a solution of Example Z (315 mg, 1.0 mmol) in DMF (2 mL). The resulting mixture was stirred at RT overnight then added to water (50 mL). The reaction mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (3×50 mL) and the combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried (NaSO4) and filtered. After concentrated under reduced pressure, the residue was purified by flash chromatography to afford 3-(3-{3-t-butyl-5-[3-(4-fluoro-phenyl)-ureido]-pyrazol-1-yl}-phenyl)-propionic acid ethyl ester (150 mg, 33%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3): 7.91 (s, 1H), 7.42 (d, J=4.8 Hz, 1H), 7.37-7.34 (m, 2H), 7.28 (s, 1H), 7.17-7.16 (m, 2H), 6.98 (t, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 6.59 (s, 1H), 4.04 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 3.03 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), (t, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 1.36 (s, 9H), 1.17 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H); MS (ESI) m/z: 453 (M+H+).
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00304
  • Example 146
  • A solution of Example 145 (45 mg, 0.1 mmol) and 2N LiOH (3 mL) in MeOH (3 mL) was stirred at RT overnight. The reaction mixture was neutralized to pH=4, extracted with ethyl acetate (3×20 mL), the combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried (NaSO4) and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated to afford 3-(3-{3-t-butyl-5-[3-(4-fluoro-phenyl)-ureido]-pyrazol-1-yl}-phenyl)-propionic acid, (37 mg, 90%). 1H NMR (CD3OD): 7.63-7.62 (m, 2H), 7.56 (s, 1H), 7.53-7.48 (m, 1H), 7.41-7.38 (m, 2H), 7.04 (t, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 5.49 (s, 1H), 3.07 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.72 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 1.42 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 415 (M+H+).
  • Example 147
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00305
  • A mixture of 4-methoxy-phenylamine (123 mg, 1.0 mmol) and CDI (165 mg, 1.0 mmol) in DMF (2 mL) was stirred at RT for 30 min, and was then added a solution of Example Z (315 mg, 1.0 mmol) in DMF (2 mL). The resulting mixture was stirred at RT overnight then quenched with of water (50 mL). The reaction mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (3×50 mL) and the combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried (NaSO4), filtered, concentrated under reduced presume to yield a residue which was purified by flash chromatography to afford 3-(3-{3-t-butyl-5-[3-(4-methoxy-phenyl)-ureido]-pyrazol-1-yl}-phenyl)-propionic acid ethyl ester (210 mg, 45%). 1H-NMR (CD3OD): 7.46 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.38 (s, 1H), 7.34 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 7.24 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 6.84 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 6.38 (s, 1H), 4.09 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 3.75 (s, 3H), 3.00 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.68 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 1.33 (s, 9H), 1.20 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H); MS (ESI) m/z: 465 (M+H+).
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00306
  • Example 148
  • Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example 61 and starting with Example 147, 3-(3-{3-t-butyl-5-[3-(4-methoxy-phenyl)-ureido]-pyrazol-1-yl}-phenyl)-propionic acid is synthesized.
  • Example 149
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00307
  • A solution of isoquinoline-1-carboxylic acid (346 mg, 2.0 mmol), Example Z (315 mg, 1.0 mmol), EDCI (394 mg, 2.0 mmol), HOBt (270 mg, 2.0 mmol), and NMM (1.0 mL) in DMF (10 mL) was stirred at RT overnight. After quenching with water (100 mL), the reaction mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (3×100 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried (NaSO4), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield a residue which was purified by flash chromatography to afford 3-(3-{3-t-butyl-5-[(isoquinoline-1-carbonyl)-amino]-pyrazol-1-yl}-phenyl)-propionic acid ethyl ester, (380 mg, 80%). 1H-NMR (DMSO-d6): 8.83 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 8.85 (d, J=5.2 Hz, 1H), 8.09 (s, 1H), 8.07 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.82 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.72 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.52 (s, 1H), 7.44 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.39 (t, J=5.2 Hz, 1H), 7.22 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 6.57 (s, 1H), 3.98 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.84 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.57 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 1.32 (s, 9H), 1.10 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 1H); MS (ESI) m/z: 471 (M+H+).
  • Example 150
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00308
  • A solution of Example 149u (47 mg, 0.1 mmol) and 2N LiOH (3 mL) in MeOH (3 mL) was stirred at RT overnight. The reaction mixture was neutralized to pH=4, extracted with ethyl acetate (3×20 mL), and the combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried (NaSO4) and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated to afford 3-(3-{3-t-butyl-5-[(isoquinoline-1-carbonyl)-amino]-pyrazol-1-yl}-phenyl)-propionic acid, (39 mg, 87%). 1H-NMR (DMSO-d6): 10.77 (s, 1H), 9.68 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 8.44 (d, J=5.2 Hz, 1H), 7.89-7.44 (m, 2H), 7.78-7.74 (m, 2H), 7.49-7.47 (m, 3H), 7.30-7.27 (m, 3H), 6.95 (s, 1H), 3.05 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.75 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 1.42 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 443 (M+H+).
  • Example 151
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00309
  • A solution of pyridine-2-carboxylic acid (246 mg, 2.0 mmol), Example Z (315 mg, 1.0 mmol), EDCI (394 mg, 2.0 mmol), HOBt (270 mg, 2.0 mmol), NMM (1.0 mL) in DMF (10 mL) was stirred at RT overnight. After quenching with water (100 mL), the reaction mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (3×100 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried (NaSO4), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield a residue which was purified by flash chromatography to afford 3-(3-{3-t-butyl-5-[(pyridine-2-carbonyl)-amino]-pyrazol-1-yl}-phenyl)-propionic acid ethyl ester (300 mg, 70%). 1H-NMR (CDCL3): 8.53 (d, J=4.4 Hz, 1H), 8.26 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 7.90 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.48-7.43 (m, 4H), 7.27 (s, 1H), 6.87 (s, 1H), 4.13 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 3.04 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.71 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 1.39 (s, 9H), 1.24 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H); MS (ESI) m/z: 421 (M+H+).
  • Example 152
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00310
  • A solution of Example Z (315 mg, 1.0 mmol) and Barton's base (0.5 mL) in anhydrous CH2Cl2 (5 mL) under N2 was stirred at RT for 30 min, and then added to a solution of naphthalene-1-carbonyl fluoride (348 mg, 0.2 mmol) in anhydrous CH2Cl2 (5 mL). The resulting mixture was stirred at RT overnight. After quenching with water (100 mL), the reaction mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (3×100 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried (NaSO4), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield a residue which was purified by flash chromatography to afford 3-(3-{3-t-butyl-5-[(naphthalene-1-carbonyl)-amino]-pyrazol-1-yl}-phenyl)-propionic acid ethyl ester, (350 mg, 74%). 1H-NMR (CDCL3): 8.29 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.98 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 7.89 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 7.62-7.57 (m, 3H), 7.49-7.28 (m, 4H), 7.03 (s, 1H), 3.94 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.96 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.58 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 1.45 (s, 9H), 1.13 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H); MS (ESI) m/z: 470 (M+H+).
  • Example 153
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00311
  • A solution of Example 152 (47 mg, 0.1 mmol) and 2N LiOH (3 mL) in MeOH (3 mL) was stirred at RT overnight. The reaction mixture was neutralized to pH=4, and extracted with ethyl acetate (3×20 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine, and dried (NaSO4) and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated to afford 3-(3-{3-t-butyl-5-[(isoquinoline-1-carbonyl)-amino]-pyrazol-1-yl}-phenyl)-propionic acid, (38 mg, 86%). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): 7.99 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.90 (m, 2H), 7.62 (m, 1H), 7.54-7.42 (m, 6H), 7.35 (m, 1H), 6.54 (s, 1H), 2.94 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.57 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 1.38 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 443 (M+H).
  • Example 154
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00312
  • A solution of naphthalene-2-carboxylic acid (344 mg, 2.0 mmol) in SOCl2 (10 mL) was heated to reflux for 2 h. After concentration under reduced pressure, the residue was dissolved into CH2Cl2 (5 mL) and was dropped into a solution of Example Z (315 mg, 1.0 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (10 mL) at 0° C., and was then stirred at RT overnight. After quenching with water (50 mL), the reaction mixture was extracted with CH2CH2Cl2 (3×100 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried (NaSO4), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield a residue which was purified by flash chromatography to afford 3-(3-{3-t-butyl-5-[(naphthalene-2-carbonyl)-amino]-pyrazol-1-yl}-phenyl)-propionic acid ethyl ester (180 mg, 38%). 1H-NMR (CDCL3): 8.24 (s, 1H), 8.21 (s, 1H), 7.91 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.88 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.73 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.63-7.49 (m, 3H), 7.45-7.26 (m, 3H), 6.94 (s, 1H), 4.02 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 3.04 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.67 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 1.43 (s, 9H), 1.17 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H); MS (ESI) m/z: 470 (M+H+).
  • Example 155
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00313
  • A solution of Example 154 (47 mg, 0.1 mmol) and 2N LiOH (3 mL) in MeOH (3 mL) was stirred at RT overnight. The reaction mixture was neutralized to pH=4, and extracted with ethyl acetate (3×20 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine, and dried (NaSO4) and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated to afford 3-(3-{3-t-butyl-5-[(isoquinoline-2-carbonyl)-amino]-pyrazol-1-yl}-phenyl)-propionic acid, (37 mg, 84%). 1H-NMR (CDCL3): 8.25 (s, 1H), 8.18 (s, 1H), 7.91-7.86 (m, 3H), 7.75 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.59-7.55 (m, 2H), 7.48-7.39 (m, 3H), 7.28 (s, 1H), 6.81 (s, 1H), 3.02 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.69 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 1.42 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 442 (M+H+).
  • Example 156
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00314
  • A solution of isoquinoline-3-carboxylic acid (346 mg, 2.0 mmol), example Z (315 mg, 1.0 mmol), EDCI (394 mg, 2.0 mmol), HOBt (270 mg, 2.0 mmol), and NMM (1.0 mL) in DMF (10 mL) was stirred at RT overnight. After quenching with water (50 mL), the reaction mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (3×100 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried (NaSO4) and filtered. After concentrated under reduced pressure, the residue was purified by flash chromatography to afford 3-(3-{3-t-butyl-5-[(isoquinoline-3-carbonyl)-amino]-pyrazol-1-yl}-phenyl)-propionic acid ethyl ester (250 mg, 54%). 1H-NMR (CD3OD): 9.24 (s, 1H), 8.63 (s, 1H), 8.17 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 8.11 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.88 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.81 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.50 (s, 1H), 7.48 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.54 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 7.36 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 6.75 (s, 1H), 4.04 (q, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 3.01 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.69 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 1.39 (s, 9H), 1.14 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H); MS (ESI) m/z: 471 (M+H+).
  • Example 157
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00315
  • A solution of Example 156 (47 mg, 0.1 mmol) and 2N LiOH (3 mL) in MeOH (3 mL) was stirred at RT overnight. The reaction mixture was neutralized to pH=4, and extracted with ethyl acetate (3×20 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine, and dried (NaSO4) and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated to afford 3-(3-{3-t-butyl-5-[(isoquinoline-3-carbonyl)-amino]-pyrazol-1-yl}-phenyl)-propionic acid, (39 mg, 0.88%). 1H NMR (CDCL3): 10.49 (s, 1H), 9.16 (s, 1H), 8.69 (s, 1H), 8.03 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 7.81 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 7.73 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 7.48-7.39 (m, 3H), 7.28 (br s, 1H), 6.94 (s, 1H), 3.02 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.79 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 1.42 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 442 (M+H+).
  • Example 158
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00316
  • A solution of 4-chlorobenzoic acid (312 mg, 2.0 mmol) in SOCl2 (10 mL) was heated to reflux for 2 h. After removal of the solvent, the residue was dissolved into CH2Cl2 (5 mL) and was dropped into a solution of Example Z (315 mg, 1.0 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (10 mL) at 0° C., was then stirred at RT overnight. After quenching with water (50 mL), the reaction mixture was extracted with CH2Cl2 (3×100 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried (NaSO4) and filtered. After concentrated under reduced pressure, the residue was purified by flash chromatography to afford 3-{3-[3-t-butyl-5-(4-chloro-benzoylamino)-pyrazol-1-yl]-phenyl}-propionic acid ethyl ester (290 mg, 64%). 1H-NMR (CDCL3): 8.02 (s, 1H), 7.67 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.46 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.44 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.36 (t, J=8.4 Hz, 3H), 6.87 (s, 1H), 4.06 (q, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 3.02 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.67 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 1.40 (s, 9H), 1.12 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H); MS (ESI) m/z: 454 (M+H+).
  • Example 159
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00317
  • A solution of Example 158 (45 mg, 0.1 mmol) and 2N LiOH (3 mL) in MeOH (3 mL) was stirred at RT overnight. The reaction mixture was neutralized to pH=4, and extracted with ethyl acetate (3×20 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine, and dried (NaSO4) and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated to afford 3-{3-[3-t-butyl-5-(4-chloro-benzoylamino)-pyrazol-1-yl]-phenyl}-propionic acid, (38.5 mg, 87%). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): 10.38 (s, 1H), 7.85 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.56 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.39 (s, 1H), 7.32 (d, J=4.8 Hz, 2H), 7.15 (t, J=4.8 Hz, 1H), 6.38 (s, 1H), 2.80 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.44 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 1.29 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 426 (M+H+).
  • Example AA
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00318
  • To a solution of m-aminobenzoic acid (200.0 g, 1.46 mmol) in concentrated HCl (200 mL) was added an aqueous solution (250 mL) of NaNO2 (102 g, 1.46 mmol) at 0° C. and the reaction mixture was stirred for 1 h. A solution of SnCl2.2H2O (662 g, 2.92 mmol) in concentrated HCl (2000 mL) was then added at 0° C. The reaction solution was stirred for an additional 2 h at RT. The precipitate was filtered and washed with ethanol and ether to give 3-hydrazino-benzoic acid hydrochloride as a white solid, which was used for the next reaction without further purification. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): 10.85 (s, 3H), 8.46 (s, 1H), 7.53 (s, 1H), 7.48 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.37 (m, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.21 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H).
  • A mixture of 3-hydrazino-benzoic acid hydrochloride (200 g, 1.06 mol) and 4,4-dimethyl-3-oxo-pentanenitrile (146 g, 1.167 mol) in ethanol (2 L) was heated to reflux overnight. The reaction solution was evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography to give 3-(5-amino-3-t-butyl-pyrazol-1-yl)-benzoic acid ethyl ester (116 g, 40%) as a white solid together with 3-(5-amino-3-t-butyl-pyrazol-1-yl)-benzoic acid (93 g, 36%). 3-(5-amino-3-t-butyl-pyrazol-1-yl)-benzoic acid and ethyl ester: 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): 8.09 (s, 1H), 8.05 (brd, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.87 (br d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.71 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 5.64 (s, 1H), 4.35 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 1.34 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H), 1.28 (s, 9H).
  • Example BB
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00319
  • To a stirred solution of Example AA (19.5 g, 68.0 mmol) in THF (200 mL) was added LiAlH4 powder (5.30 g, 0.136 mol) at −10° C. under N2. The mixture was stirred for 2 h at RT and excess LiAlH4 was destroyed by slow addition of ice. The reaction mixture was acidified to pH=7 with diluted HCl, the solution concentrated under reduced pressure, and the residue was extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organic extracts were concentrated to give [3-(5-amino-3-t-butyl-pyrazol-1-yl)-phenyl]-methanol (16.35 g, 98%) as a white powder. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): 9.19 (s, 1H), 9.04 (s, 1H), 8.80 (s, 1H), 8.26-7.35 (m, 1H), 6.41 (s, 1H), 4.60 (s, 2H), 1.28 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 415 (M+H+).
  • Example CC
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00320
  • A solution of Example BB (13.8 g, 56.00 mmol) and SOCl2 (8.27 mL, 0.11 mol) in THF (200 mL) was refluxed for 3 h and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield 5-t-butyl-2-(3-chloromethyl-phenyl)-2H-pyrazol-3-ylamine (14.5 g, 98%) as white powder which was used without further purification. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6), δ 7.62 (s, 1H), 7.53 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.43 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.31 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 5.38 (s, 1H), 5.23 (br s, 2H), 4.80 (s, 2H), 1.19 (s, 9H). MS (ESI) m/z: 264 (M+H+).
  • Example DD
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00321
  • To a stirred solution of chlorosulfonyl isocyanate (1.43 g, 10.0 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (20 mL) at 0° C. was added 2-methyl-propan-2-ol (0.74 g, 10.0 mmol) at such a rate that the reaction solution temperature did not rise above 5° C. After being stirred for 1.5 h, a solution of glycine ethyl ester (1.45 g, 12.0 mmol) and Et3N (3.2 mL, 25.0 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (20 mL) was added at such a rate that the reaction temperature didn't rise above 5° C. When the addition was completed, the solution was warmed to RT and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was poured into 10% HCl and extracted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with saturated NaCl, dried (Mg2SO4) and filtered. After removal of the solvent, the crude product was washed with CH2Cl2 to afford ethyl 2-((N-(butyloxycarbonyl)sulfamoyl)amino)acetate (2.4 g, 85%). 1H-NMR (DMSO): δ 10.85 (s, 1H), 8.04 (t, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 4.07 (q, J=5.6 Hz, 2H); 3.77 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 2H), 1.40 (s, 9H), 1.18 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H).
  • To a solution of (4-methoxyphenyl)-methanol (1.4 g, 8.5 mmol) and triphenyl-phosphine (2.6 g, 8.5 mol) in dry THF was added a solution of ethyl 2-((N-(butyloxycarbonyl)sulfamoyl)amino)acetate from the previous step (2.4 g, 8.5 mol) and DIAD (2.0 g, 8.5 mmol) in dry THF dropwise at 0° C. under N2 atmosphere. The mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 2 h, warmed to RT and stirred overnight. After the solvent was removed in vacuo, the residue was purified by column chromatography to afford ethyl 2-((N-(butyloxycarbonyl)-N-(p-methoxybenzyl)sulfamoyl)amino)acetate (2.3 g, 69%) as a white solid. 1H-NMR (CDCl3): δ 7.32 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 6.85 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 5.71 (m, 1H), 4.76 (s, 2H), 4.14 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 3.80 (s, 3H), 3.55 (d, J=5.2 Hz, 2H), 1.54 (s, 9H), 1.25 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H).
  • To a solution of HCl in methanol (2 M) was added ethyl 2-((N-(butyloxycarbonyl)-N-(p-methoxybenzyl)sulfamoyl)amino)acetate from the previous step (2.0 g, 5.0 mmol) in portions at RT and the mixture was stirred for 3 h. After the solvent was removed in vacuo, the residue was washed with diethyl ether to afford ethyl 2-((N-(p-methoxybenzyl)sulfamoyl)amino)acetate (1.0 g, 70%). 1H-NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 7.43 (t, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.287 (t, J=6.4 Hz, 1H), 7.21 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 6.86 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 3.94 (d, J=4.8 Hz, 2H), 3.71 (s, 3H), 3.64 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 2H), 3.62 (s, 3H),
  • To a solution of ethyl 2-((N-(p-methoxybenzyl)sulfamoyl)amino)acetate from the previous step (1.0 g, 3.47 mmol) in DMF (50 mL) was added KO-t-Bu (1.56 g, 13.88 mmol) in portions under N2 atmosphere at RT. The mixture was stirred overnight then quenched with HCl/methanol (2 M). After the solvent was removed in vacuo, the residue was washed with water to afford 2-(4-methoxy-benzyl)-1,1-dioxo-1λ6-[1,2,5]thiadiazolidin-3-one (480 mg, 54%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3): δ 7.36 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 6.87 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 4.87 (m, 1H), 4.68 (s, 2H), 4.03 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 3.80 (s, 3H).
  • Example EE
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00322
  • To a stirred solution of chlorosulfonyl isocyanate (1.43 g, 10.0 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (20 mL) at 0° C. was added benzyl alcohol (1.08 g, 10.0 mmol) at such a rate that the reaction solution temperature did not rise above 5° C. After stirring for 1.5 h, a solution of L-alanine methyl ester (1.45 g, 12.0 mmol) and Et3N (3.2 mL, 25.0 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (20 mL) was added at such a rate that the reaction temperature didn't rise above 5° C. When the addition was completed, the reaction solution was allowed to warm up to RT and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was poured into 10% HCl, extracted with CH2Cl2, the organic extracts washed with saturated NaCl, dried (Mg2SO4), and filtered. After removal of the solvent, the crude product was recrystallized in PE/EA (10:1) to afford the desired product (2.5 g, 79%), which was used directly in the next step. 1H-NMR (DMSO): δ 11.31 (s, 1H), 8.43 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.37-7.32 (m, 5H), 5.11 (s, 2H), 4.03 (m, 1H), 3.57 (s, 3H), 1.23 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 3H).
  • A mixture of material from the previous reaction (2.5 g, 12 mmol) and Pd/C (10%, 250 mg) in methanol was stirred for 4 h at 50° C. under H2 atmosphere (55 psi). After the catalyst was removed by suction, the filtrate was evaporated to afford the desired compound (1.37 g, 92%) as a white solid, which was used directly in the next step. 1H-NMR (CDCl3): δ5.51 (d, J=5.6 Hz, 1H), 4.94 (br, 2H), 4.18 (m, 1H), 3.78 (s, 3H), 1.46 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 3H).
  • To a solution of 2.0 N of NaOMe in methanol (20 mL) was added a solution of compound form the previous reaction (1.2 g, 6.1 mmol) in methanol and the resulting mixture was heated to reflux overnight. After cooling down, a solution of HCl in methanol was added to acidify to pH 7. The resulted salt was filtered off and the filtrate was evaporated to dryness to afford a light yellow solid which was used directly in the next step (600 mg, 66%). 1H-NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 6.04 (d, J=4.8 Hz, 1H), 3.60 (m, 1H), 1.11 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 3H).
  • A mixture of compound from the previous step (500 mg, 3.33 mmol) and 1-chloromethyl-4-methoxybenzene (156 mg, 1.0 mmol) in acetonitrile was heated to reflux overnight together with K2CO3 (207 mg, 1.5 mmol) and KI (250 mg, 1.5 mmol) under N2 atmosphere. After cooling, the salt was filtered off and the filtrate was purified by column to afford 2-(4-methoxybenzyl)-(S)-4-methyl-1,1-dioxo-1λ6-[1,2,5]thiadiazolidin-3-one as a white solid (200 mg), which was used without further purification.
  • Example 160
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00323
  • To a solution of Example EE (100 mg, 0.37 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (3 mL) was added NaH (18 mg, 0.44 mmol) at 0° C. After stirring for 0.5 h at 0° C., a solution of Example E (160 mg, 0.37 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture, which was stirred overnight at RT and subsequently concentrated under reduced pressure to yield a crude solid which was used without further purification.
  • A solution of the crude material from the previous reaction (60 mg, 0.090 mmol) in trifluoroacetic acid (3 mL) was stirred at 50° C. for 4 h. After the solvent was removed, the residue was purified by preparative HPLC to afford 1-{5-t-butyl-2-[3-((S)-3-methyl-1,1,4-trioxo-1λ6-[1,2,5]thiadiazolidin-2-ylmethyl)-phenyl]-2H-pyrazol-3-yl}-3-naphthalen-1-yl-urea as white power (45 mg). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): 9.04 (s, 1H), 8.87 (s, 1H), 8.02 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.89 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 7.62 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 7.41-7.52 (m, 6H), 6.40 (s, 1H), 4.31-4.49 (dd, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 4.03 (q, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 1.27 (s, 9H), 1.17 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 3H). MS (ESI) m/z: 547 (M+H+).
  • Example FF
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00324
  • 2-(4-methoxy-benzyl)-(R)-4-methyl-1,1-dioxo-1λ6-[1,2,5]thiadiazolidin-3-one was prepared from D-alanine ethyl ester using the same procedure as Example EE.
  • Example 161
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00325
  • To a solution of Example FF (60 mg, 0.22 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (2 mL) was added NaH (11 mg, 0.27 mmol) at 0° C. After stirring for 0.5 h at 0° C., a solution of Example D (100 mg, 0.22 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (2 mL) was added to the reaction mixture, which was stirred overnight at RT. The crude reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue by purified through preparative HPLC to yield 1-(5-t-butyl-2-{3-[5-(4-methoxy-benzyl)-(R)-3-methyl-1,1,4-trioxo-1λ6-[1,2,5]-thiadiazolidin-2-ylmethyl]-phenyl}-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-3-naphthalene-1-yl-urea (20 mg). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): 8.98 (s, 1H), 8.81 (s, 1H), 8.00 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.90 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 7.62 (s, 2H), 7.51-7.55 (m, 6H), 7.44 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 7.22 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 6.86 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 6.40 (s, 1H), 4.57-4.62 (dd, J=8.0 Hz, 4H), 4.53 (q, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 3.71 (s, 3H), 1.30 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 3H), 1.27 (s, 9H). MS (ESI) m/z: 653 (M+H+).
  • A solution of 1-(5-t-Butyl-2-{3-[5-(4-methoxy-benzyl)-(R)-3-methyl-1,1,4-trioxo-1λ6-[1,2,5]-thiadiazolidin-2-ylmethyl]-phenyl}-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-3-naphthalen-1-yl-urea (20 mg, 0.030 mmol) in trifluoroacetic acid (2 mL) was stirred at 50° C. for 4 h. After the solvent was removed, the residue was purified by preparative-HPLC to afford 1-{5-t-butyl-2-[3-((R)-3-methyl-1,1,4-trioxo-1λ6-[1,2,5]thiadiazolidin-2-ylmethyl)-phenyl]-2H-pyrazol-3-yl}-3-naphthalen-1-yl-urea as a white power (6 mg). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): 8.99 (s, 1H), 8.80 (s, 1H), 8.00 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 7.90 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 7.60-7.64 (m, 2H), 7.44-7.54 (m, 7H), 6.41 (s, 1H), 4.31-4.49 (dd, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 4.03 (q, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 1.27 (s, 9H), 1.19 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 3H). MS (ESI) m/z: 533 (M+H+).
  • Example 162
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00326
  • To a solution of Example CC (0.263 g, 1.0 mmol) in THF (2.0 mL) was added a solution of 1-fluoro-4-isocyanato-benzene (0.114 mL, 1.10 mmol) in THF (5.0 mL) at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at RT for 1 h then heated until all solids were dissolved. The mixture was stirred at RT for 3 h and poured into water (20 mL). The resulting precipitate was filtered, washed with diluted HCl and H2O, dried under reduced pressure to yield 1-[5-t-butyl-2-(3-chloromethyl-phenyl)-2H-pyrazol-3-yl]-3-(4-fluoro-phenyl)-urea (400 mg) as a white power. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): 8.99 (s, 1H), 8.38 (s, 1H), 7.59 (s, 1H), 7.44-7.51 (m, 3H), 7.38-7.40 (m, 2H), 7.08 (t, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 6.34 (s, 1H), 4.83 (s, 2H), 1.26 (s, 9H), MS (ESI) m/z: 401 (M+H+).
  • To a solution of 2-(4-methoxy-benzyl)-1-dioxo-1λ6-[1,2,5]thiadiazolidin-3-one (64 mg, 0.25 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (2 mL) was added NaH (11 mg, 0.27 mmol) at 0° C. After stirred for 0.5 h at 0° C., a solution of 1-[5-t-butyl-2-(3-chloromethyl-phenyl)-2H-pyrazol-3-yl]-3-(4-fluoro-phenyl)-urea from the previous reaction (100 mg, 0.25 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (2 mL) was added to the reaction mixture, then was stirred overnight at RT. The crude was purified through prepared-HPLC to yield 1-(5-t-butyl-2-{3-[5-(4-methoxy-benzyl)-1,1,4-trioxo-1-[1,2,5]thiadiazolidin-2-ylmethyl]-phenyl}-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-3-(4-fluoro-phenyl)-urea (45 mg). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): 8.95 (s, 1H), 8.37 (s, 1H), 7.50-7.54 (m, 3H), 7.36-7.41 (m, 3H), 7.25 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 7.07 (t, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 6.87 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 6.35 (s, 1H), 4.64 (s, 2H), 4.47 (s, 2H), 4.19 (s, 2H), 3.75 (s, 3H), 1.26 (s, 9H). MS (ESI) m/z: 515 (M+H+).
  • A solution of 1-(5-t-butyl-2-{3-[5-(4-methoxy-benzyl)-1,1,4-trioxo-1λ6-[1,2,5]thiadiazolidin-2-ylmethyl]-phenyl}-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-3-(4-fluoro-phenyl)-urea (40 mg, 0.060 mmol) in trifluoroacetic acid (3 mL) was stirred at 50° C. for 4 h. After the solvent was removed, the residue was purified by preparative HPLC to afford 1-{5-t-butyl-2-[3-(3-(R)-methyl-1,1,4-trioxo-1λ6-[1,2,5]thiadiazolidin-2-ylmethyl)-phenyl]-2H-pyrazol-3-yl}-3-naphthalen-1-yl-urea as a white power (12 mg). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): 8.98 (s, 1H), 8.39 (s, 1H), 7.37-7.51 (m, 6H), 7.07 (t, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 6.35 (s, 1H), 4.21 (s, 2H), 3.88 (s, 2H), 1.26 (s, 9H). MS (ESI) m/z: 501 (M+H+).
  • Example GG
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00327
  • To a stirred suspension of K2CO3 (5.5 g, 40 mmol) and 1-bromo-3-chloro-propane (3.78 g, 24 mmol) in acetonitrile (10 mL) was added a solution of N-methyl piperazine (2.0 g, 20 mmol) in acetonitrile (10 mL) dropwise at RT. After the addition was completed, the reaction mixture was stirred for 3 h then filtered. The filtrate was concentrated and dissolved in CH2Cl2, washed with brine, dried (NaSO4) and filtered. After removal of the solvent, the residue was dissolved in ether. To the above solution was added the solution of HCl and filtered to afford the desired product (2.3 g, 65.7%). 1H NMR (D2O): 3.61 (t, J=6.0 Hz, 2H), 3.59 (br, 8H), 3.31 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 2.92 (s, 3H), 2.15 (m, 2H).
  • Example 163
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00328
  • To a solution of Example 41 (100 mg, 0.25 mmol) in acetonitrile (10 mL) was added Example GG (75 mg, 0.30 mmol) and K2CO3 (172 mg, 1.25 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred at 45° C. for 3 h before filtered. After the filtrate was concentrated, the residue was purified by preparative TLC to afford 1-(5-t-Butyl-2-{3-[3-(4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-propoxy]-phenyl}-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-3-naphthalen-1-yl-urea (31 mg, 23%). 1H-NMR (CD3OD): 7.93 (m, 1H), 7.88 (m, 1H), 7.71 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.66 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.43-7.50 (m, 4H), 7.14 (m, 2H), 7.05 (m, 1H), 6.43 (s, 1H), 4.10 (t, J=6.0 Hz, 2H), 3.09-3.15 (br, 4H), 2.74-2.86 (br, 6H), 2.72 (s, 3H), 1.99 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 2H), 1.35 (s, 9H). MS (ESI) m/z: 541 (M+H+).
  • Example HH
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00329
  • Intermediate HH was synthesized according to literature procedures starting from 4,4-dimethyl-3-oxo-pentanenitrile (10 mmole) in absolute ethanol and HCl in quantitative afford.
  • Example II
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00330
  • Intermediate HH (5 g, 0.0241 mol) is added to pyridine (5 mL) in CH2Cl2 (25 mL) and cooled in an ice bath. The suspension is stirred for 5 min and 1-napthylchloroformate is added dropwise over 5 min. The reaction mixture is stirred an additional 5 min at 0° C., and the reaction is warmed and stirred at RT for 1 h. The reaction is pour into ethyl acetate (100 mL) and water (100 ml). After shaking, the aqueous layer is removed, the organic layer washed with water, dried (MgSO4) and concentrated to afford (Z)-naphthalen-1-yl 1-ethoxy-4,4-dimethyl-3-oxopentylidenecarbamate.
  • Example 164
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00331
  • Example II (10 mmol) is dissolved in absolute EtOH (50 mL) at RT and Example Y (10.5 mmol) is added dropwise over 5 min. The reaction mixture is stirred for 30 min at RT, poured in water (100 mL) and ethyl acetate (100 mL). After shaking, the organic layer is washed with 5% HCl, water, dried (MgSO4) and concentrated to afford 1-naphthyl 1-(3-(2-(ethoxycarbonyl)ethyl)phenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example 165
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00332
  • A solution of Example 164 (0.1 mmol) and 2N LiOH (3 mL) in MeOH (3 mL) is stirred at RT overnight. The reaction mixture is neutralized to pH=4, extracted with ethyl acetate (3×20 mL), the combined organic extracts are washed with brine, dried (NaSO4) and filtered. The filtrate is concentrated to afford 1-napthyl 1-(3-(2-carboxymethylphenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00333
  • Example JJ
  • Example JJ is synthesized utilizing Example HH and 2-napthylchloroformate according to the procedure described for Example II to afford (Z)-naphthalen-2-yl-1-ethoxy-4,4-dimethyl-3-oxopentylidenecarbamate.
  • Example 166
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00334
  • Example 166 is synthesized utilizing Example Y and Example JJ according to the procedure described for Example 79 to afford 2-naphthyl 1-(3-(2-(ethoxycarbonyl)ethyl)phenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example 167
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00335
  • Example 167 is synthesized utilizing Example 166 according to the procedure described for Example 165 to afford 2-napthyl 1-(3-(2-carboxymethylphenyl)-3-t-butyl-H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example KK
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00336
  • Example KK is synthesized utilizing Example HH and p-chlorophenylchloroformate according to the procedure described for Example II to afford (Z)-4-chlorophenyl 1-ethoxy-4,4-dimethyl-3-oxopentylidenecarbamate.
  • Example 168
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00337
  • Example 168 is synthesized utilizing Example Y and Example KK according to the procedure described for Example 164 to afford 4-chlorophenyl 1-(3-(2-(ethoxycarbonyl)ethyl)phenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example 169
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00338
  • Example 169 is synthesized utilizing Example 168 according to the procedure described for Example 165 to afford 4-chlorophenyl 1-(3-(2-carboxymethylphenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example LL
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00339
  • Example LL is synthesized utilizing Example HH and p-methoxyphenylchloroformate according to the procedure described for Example II to afford (Z)-4-methoxyphenyl 1-ethoxy-4,4-dimethyl-3-oxopentylidenecarbamate.
  • Example 170
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00340
  • Example 170 is synthesized utilizing Example Y and Example LL according to the procedure described for Example 164 to afford 4-methoxyphenyl 1-(3-(2-(ethoxycarbonyl)ethyl)phenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example 171
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00341
  • Example 171 is synthesized utilizing Example 170 according to the procedure described for Example 165 to afford 4-methoxyphenyl 1-(3-(2-carboxyethylphenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example MM
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00342
  • Example MM is synthesized utilizing Example HH and quinolin-8-yl-chloroformate according to the procedure described for Example II to afford (Z)-quinolin-8-yl 1-ethoxy-4,4-dimethyl-3-oxopentylidenecarbamate
  • Example 172
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00343
  • Example 172 is synthesized utilizing Example Y and Example MM according to the procedure described for Example 164 to afford quinolin-8-yl 1-(3-(2-(ethoxycarbonyl)ethyl)phenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example 173
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00344
  • Example 173 is synthesized utilizing Example 172 according to the procedure described for Example 165 to afford quinolin-8-yl 1-(3-(2-carboxyethylphenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example 174
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00345
  • Example 174 is synthesized utilizing a mixture of 4-methoxy-1-naphthylamine and Example Z according to the procedure described for Example 147 to afford 3-(3-{3-t-butyl-5-[3-(4-methoxy-1-naphthyl)-ureido]-pyrazol-1-yl}-phenyl)-propionic acid ethyl ester.
  • Example 175
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00346
  • Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example 146 and starting with Example 174, 3-(3-{3-t-butyl-5-[3-(4-methoxy-1-naphthyl)-ureido]-pyrazol-1-yl}-phenyl)-propionic acid is synthesized.
  • Example 176
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00347
  • Example 176 is synthesized utilizing a mixture of indoline and Example Z according to the procedure described for Example 147 to afford ethyl 3-(3-(3-t-butyl-5-(indoline-1-carboxamido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)phenyl)propanoate.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00348
  • Example 177
  • Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example 146 and starting with Example 173, 3-(3-(3-t-butyl-5-(indoline-1-carboxamido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)phenyl)propionic acid is synthesized.
  • Example NN
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00349
  • Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example Y and starting with p-bromo nitrobenzene, 3-(4-hydrazino-phenyl)-propionic acid ethyl ester is synthesized.
  • Example 178
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00350
  • Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example 164, Example 11 (10 mmol) and Example NN (10.5 mmol) are combined to afford 1-naphthyl 1-(4-(2-(ethoxycarbonyl)ethyl)phenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example 179
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00351
  • Example 179 is synthesized utilizing Example 178 according to the procedure described for Example 165 to afford 1-napthyl 1-(4-(2-carboxyethylphenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example 180
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00352
  • Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example 164, Example JJ (10 mmol) and Example NN (10.5 mmol) are combined to afford 2-naphthyl 1-(4-(2-(ethoxycarbonyl)ethyl)phenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example 181
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00353
  • Example 181 is synthesized utilizing Example 180 according to the procedure described for Example 165 to afford 2-napthyl 1-(4-(2-carboxyethylphenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example 182
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00354
  • Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example 164, Example KK (10 mmol) and Example NN (10.5 mmol) are combined to afford p-chlorophenyl 1-(4-(2-(ethoxycarbonyl)ethyl)phenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example 183
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00355
  • Example 183 is synthesized utilizing Example 182 according to the procedure described for Example 165 to afford 4-chlorophenyl 1-(4-(2-carboxyethylphenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example 184
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00356
  • Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example 164, Example LL (10 mmol) and Example NN (10.5 mmol) are combined to afford p-methoxyphenyl 1-(4-(2-(ethoxycarbonyl)ethyl)phenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example 185
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00357
  • Example 185 is synthesized utilizing Example 184 according to the procedure described for Example 165 to afford p-methoxyphenyl 1-(4-(2-carboxyethylphenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylcarbamate.
  • Example OO
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00358
  • Ethyl bromoacetate is reacted with meta-nitrophenol under standard conditions to afford ethyl 2-(3-nitrophenoxy)acetate, which is elaborated to ethyl 2-(3-hydrazinophenoxy)acetate using the reduction/oxidation sequence described for Example
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00359
  • Example PP
  • Example HH and 1-naphthylisocyanate are combined utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example II to afford (Z)-1-(1-ethoxy-4,4-dimethyl-3-oxopentylidene)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 186
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00360
  • Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example 164, Example PP (10 mmol) and Example OO (10.5 mmol) are combined to afford 3-(3-{3-t-butyl-5-[3-(1-naphthyl)-ureido]-pyrazol-1-yl}-phenoxy)-acetic acid ethyl ester.
  • Example 187
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00361
  • Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example 146 and starting with Example 186, 3-(3-{3-t-butyl-5-[3-(1-naphthyl)-ureido]-pyrazol-1-yl}-phenoxy)-acetic acid is synthesized.
  • Example QQ
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00362
  • Example HH and 4-chlorophenylisocyanate are combined utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example II to afford (Z)-1-(4-chlorophenyl)-3-(1-ethoxy-4,4-dimethyl-3-oxopentylidene)urea
  • Example 188
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00363
  • Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example 164, Example QQ (10 mmol) and Example OO (10.5 mmol) are combined to afford 3-(3-{3-t-butyl-5-[3-(1-4-chlorophenyl)-ureido]-pyrazol-1-yl}-phenoxy)-acetic acid ethyl ester.
  • Example 189
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00364
  • Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example 146 and starting with Example 188, 3-(3-{3-t-butyl-5-[3-(14-chlorophenyl)-ureido]-pyrazol-1-yl}-phenoxy)-acetic acid is synthesized.
  • Example RR
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00365
  • Ethyl bromoacetate is reacted with para-nitrophenol under standard conditions to afford ethyl 2-(4-nitrophenoxy)acetate, which is elaborated to ethyl 2-(4-hydrazinophenoxy)acetate using the reduction/oxidation sequence described for Example Y.
  • Example 190
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00366
  • Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example 164, Example PP (10 mmol) and Example RR (10.5 mmol) are combined to afford 4-(3-{3-t-butyl-5-[3-(1-naphthyl)-ureido]-pyrazol-1-yl}-phenoxy)-acetic acid ethyl ester.
  • Example 191
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00367
  • Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example 146 and starting with Example 190, 4-(3-{3-t-butyl-5-[3-(1-naphthyl)-ureido]-pyrazol-1-yl}-phenoxy)-acetic acid is synthesized.
  • Example 192
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00368
  • Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example 164, Example QQ (10 mmol) and Example RR (10.5 mmol) are combined to afford 4-(3-{3-t-butyl-5-[3-(1-4-chlorophenyl)-ureido]-pyrazol-1-yl}-phenoxy)-acetic acid ethyl ester.
  • Example 193
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00369
  • Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example 146 and starting with Example 192, 4-(3-{3-t-butyl-5-[3-(14-chlorophenyl)-ureido]-pyrazol-1-yl}-phenoxy)-acetic acid is synthesized.
  • Example DD
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00370
  • To a stirred solution of chlorosulfonyl isocyanate (1.43 g, 10.0 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (20 mL) at 0° C. was added 2-methyl-propan-2-ol (0.74 g, 10.0 mmol) at such a rate that the reaction solution temperature did not rise above 5° C. After being stirred for 1.5 h, a solution of glycine ethyl ester (1.45 g, 12.0 mmol) and Et3N (3.2 mL, 25.0 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (20 mL) was added at such a rate that the reaction temperature didn't rise above 5° C. When the addition was completed, the solution was warmed to RT and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was poured into 10% HCl and extracted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with saturated NaCl, dried (Mg2SO4) and filtered. After removal of the solvent, the crude product was washed with CH2Cl2 to afford ethyl 2-((N-(butyloxycarbonyl)sulfamoyl)amino)acetate (2.4 g, 85%). 1H-NMR (DMSO): δ 10.85 (s, 1H), 8.04 (t, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 4.07 (q, J=5.6 Hz, 2H), 3.77 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 2H), 1.40 (s, 9H), 1.18 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H).
  • To a solution of methanol (8.5 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (2.6 g, 8.5 mol) in dry THF is added a solution of ethyl 2-((N-(butyloxycarbonyl)sulfamoyl)amino)acetate from the previous step (2.4 g, 8.5 mol) and DIAD (2.0 g, 8.5 mmol) in dry THF dropwise at 0° C. under N2 atmosphere. The mixture is stirred at 0° C. for 2 h, warmed to RT and is stirred overnight. After the solvent is removed in vacuo, the residue is purified by column chromatography to afford ethyl 2-((N-(butyloxycarbonyl)-N-methylsulfamoyl)amino)acetate.
  • To a solution of HCl in methanol (2 M) is added ethyl 2-((N-(butyloxycarbonyl)-N-methylsulfamoyl)amino)acetate from the previous step (5.0 mmol) in portions at RT and the mixture is stirred for 3 h. After the solvent is removed in vacuo, the residue is washed with diethyl ether to afford ethyl 2-((N-methylsulfamoyl)amino)acetate
  • To a solution of ethyl 2-((N-methylsulfamoyl)amino)acetate from the previous step (3.5 mmol) in DMF (50 mL) is added KO-t-Bu (1.56 g, 13.88 mmol) in portions under N2 at RT. The mixture is stirred overnight then quenched with HCl/methanol (2 M). After the solvent is removed in vacuo, the residue is washed with water to afford 2-methyl-1,1-dioxo-1λ6-[1,2,5]thiadiazolidin-3-one (480 mg, 54%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3): δ 7.36 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 6.87 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 4.87 (m, 1H), 4.68 (s, 2H), 4.03 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 3.80 (s, 3H).
  • Example 194
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00371
  • Example E and Example OO are combined utilizing the procedure for Example 160 to afford 1-(5-t-butyl-2-{3-[5-methyl-1,1,4-trioxo-1λ6-[1,2,5]thiadiazolidin-2-ylmethyl]-phenyl}-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-3-naphthyl-urea.
  • Example 195
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00372
  • To a solution of Example X (2.9 g, 10 mmol) in THF (50 mL) was added a solution of 1-naphthyl isocyanate (1.7 g, 10 mmol) in THF (20 mL) at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at RT for 1 h and heated until all solids dissolved. The mixture was then stirred at RT for 3 h and poured into water (200 mL). The precipitate was filtered, washed with diluted HCl and H2O, dried under vacuum to give 4.3 g of 4-[3-t-butyl-5-(3-naphthalen-1-yl-ureido)-pyrazol-1-yl]-benzoic acid ethyl ester, which was used without further purification.
  • Example 196
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00373
  • To a solution of Example B (228 mg, 0.5 mmol) in dry THF (20 mL) was added dropwise a solution of methyl magnesium bromide in toluene/THF (3.6 mL, 5.0 mmol) at −78° C. under N2. After stirring for 1 h, the mixture was allowed to rise to RT and stirred for another 2 h. The reaction mixture was quenched with saturated NH4Cl solution and aqueous HCl solution (10%), extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried (Na2SO4), the solvent removed in vacuo and the residue purified by column chromatography to afford 1-{5-t-butyl-2-[3-(1-hydroxy-1-methyl-ethyl)-phenyl]-2H-pyrazol-3-yl}-3-naphthalen-1-yl-urea (150 mg, 67%). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): 9.00 (s, 1H), 8.75 (s, 1H), 7.98 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.92-7.89 (m, 2H), 7.65-7.62 (m, 2H), 7.52-7.44 (m, 5H), 7.37 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 6.39 (s, 1H), 5.13 (s, 1H), 1.45 (s, 6H), 1.27 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 443 (M+H+).
  • Example 197
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00374
  • To a solution of Example C (220 mg, 0.5 mmol) in dry THF (20 mL) was added dropwise a solution of methyl magnesium bromide in toluene/THF (3.6 mL, 5.0 mmol) at −78° C. under N2. After stirring for 1 h, the mixture was allowed to rise to RT and stirred for another 2 h. The reaction mixture was quenched with saturated NH4Cl and aqueous HCl solution (10%), and extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried (Na2SO4), the solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue was purified by column chromatography to afford 1-{5-t-butyl-2-[3-(1-hydroxy-1-methyl-ethyl)-phenyl]-2H-pyrazol-3-yl}-3-(4-chloro-phenyl)-urea (174 mg, 81%). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): 9.11 (s, 1H), 8.34 (s, 1H), 7.59 (s, 1H), 7.46 (t, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 7.43-7.40 (m, 3H), 7.31-7.28 (m, 3H), 6.34 (s, 1H), 5.13 (s, 1H), 1.42 (s, 6H), 1.27 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 428 (M+H+).
  • Example 198
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00375
  • To a solution of Example 195 (228 mg, 0.5 mmol) in dry THF (20 mL) was added dropwise a solution of methylmagnesium bromide in toluene/THF (3.6 mL, 5.0 mmol) at −78° C. under N2. After stirring for 1 h, the mixture was allowed to rise to RT and stirred for another 2 h. The reaction mixture was quenched with saturated NH4Cl and aqueous HCl solution (10%), extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried (Na2SO4), the solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue purified by column chromatography to afford 1-{5-t-butyl-2-[4-(1-hydroxy-1-methyl-ethyl)-phenyl]-2H-pyrazol-3-yl}-3-naphthalen-1-yl-urea (180 mg, 81%). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): 9.06 (s, 1H), 8.83 (s, 1H), 7.99 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.92 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 7.64-7.61 (m, 3H), 7.55-7.43 (m, 5H), 6.40 (s, 1H), 5.13 (s, 1H), 1.47 (s, 6H), 1.27 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 443 (M+H+).
  • Example 199
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00376
  • To a solution of Example 57 (220 mg, 0.5 mmol) in dry THF (20 mL) was added dropwise a solution of methyl magnesium bromide in toluene/THF (3.6 mL, 5.0 mmol) at −78° C. under N2. After stirring for 1 h, the mixture was allowed to rise to RT and stirred for another 2 h. The reaction mixture was quenched with saturated NH4Cl and aqueous HCl solution (10%), and extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried (Na2SO4), the solvent removed in vacuo and the residue was purified by column chromatography to afford 1-{5-t-butyl-2-[4-(1-hydroxy-1-methyl-ethyl)-phenyl]-2H-pyrazol-3-yl}-3-(4-chloro-phenyl)-urea (187 mg, 87%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3): 9.14 (s, 1H), 8.42 (s, 1H), 7.58 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.42 (d, J=5.6 Hz, 2H), 7.40 (d, J=4.8 Hz, 2H), 7.29 (d, J=8.8 Hz, H), 6.34 (s, 1H), 5.11 (s, 1H), 1.44 (s, 6H), 1.25 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 427 (M+H+).
  • Example PP
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00377
  • To a solution of 3-bromo-phenylamine (17 g, 0.1 mol) in concentrated HCl (200 mL) was added an aqueous solution (20 mL) of NaNO2 (7 g, 0.1 mol) at 0° C. and the resulting mixture was stirred for 1 h. A solution of SnCl2.2H2O (45 g, 0.2 mmol) in concentrated HCl (500 mL) was then added at 0° C. The reaction solution was stirred for an additional 2 h at RT. The precipitate was filtered and washed with ethanol and ether to give (3-bromo-phenyl)-hydrazine as a white solid, which was used for the next reaction without further purification
  • Example QQ
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00378
  • A mixture of Example PP (22.2 g, 0.1 mol) and 4,4-dimethyl-3-oxo-pentanenitrile (18.7 g, 0.15 mol) in ethanol (250 mL) was heated to reflux overnight. The reaction solution was concentrated under reduced pressure, and the residue purified by column chromatography to afford 2-(3-bromo-phenyl)-5-t-butyl-2H-pyrazol-3-ylamine as a white solid. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): 7.85 (s, 1H), 7.68 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.62 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 7.50 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 5.62 (s, 1H), 1.27 (s, 9H).
  • Example RR
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00379
  • To a mixture of Example QQ (2.94 g, 10 mmol), Pd(OAc)2 (1 mmol), PPh3 (20 mmol), and K2CO3 (20 mmol) in MeCN (50 mL) was added 2-methyl-acrylic acid ethyl ester (20 mmol). The resulting mixture was heated to reflux overnight, filtered, concentrated, and the residue was purified by column chromatography to afford 1.2 g of 3-[3-(5-Amino-3-t-butyl-pyrazol-1-yl)-phenyl]-2-methyl-acrylic acid ethyl ester. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 7.41 (s, 1H), 7.40-7.36 (m, 2H), 7.15 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 6.24 (s, 1H), 5.51 (s, 1H), 4.27 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H); 2.12 (s, 3H), 1.33 (s, 9H), 1.27 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H).
  • Example SS
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00380
  • A mixture of Example RR (1.2 g,) and Pd/C (120 mg, 10%) in methanol (50 mL) was stirred under 40 psi of H2 at RT overnight, filtered. And concentrated to afford 3-[3-(5-amino-3-t-butyl-pyrazol-1-yl)-phenyl]-2-methyl-propionic acid ethyl ester as a racemate (1.1 g), which was used for the next reaction without further purification.
  • Example 200
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00381
  • To a solution of Example SS (100 mg, 0.3 mmol) and Et3N (60 mg, 0.6 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (10 mL) was added 1-isocyanato-naphthalene (77 mg, 0.45 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred at RT overnight, added to water (50 mL), extracted with CH2Cl2 (3×30 mL) and the combined organic extracted were washed with brine, dried (Na2SO4), and filtered. After concentration under reduced pressure, the residue was purified by preparative-TLC to afford 3-(3-{3-t-butyl-5-[3-(4-fluoro-phenyl)-ureido]-pyrazol-1-yl}-phenyl)-propionic acid ethyl ester as a racemate (50 mg, 33%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3): 7.99 (s, 1H), 7.91 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.84 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 7.67 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.49-7.41 (m, 3H), 7.35-7.33 (m, 3H), 7.21 (s, 1H), 7.14-7.13 (m, 1H), 6.65 (s, 1H), 3.98 (q, J=6.0 Hz, 2H), 2.92-2.88 (m, 3H), 1.36 (s, 9H), 1.24 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 3H), 1.08 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H); MS (ESI) m/z: 499 (M+H+).
  • Example 201
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00382
  • A solution of Example 200 (17 mg, mmol) and 2N LiOH (3 mL) in MeOH (3 mL) was stirred at RT over night. The reaction mixture was adjusted to pH=4, and extracted with ethyl acetate (3×20 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried Na2SO4), and filtered. After the filtrate was concentrated, the residue was purified by preparative-TLC to afford 3-{3-[3-t-butyl-5-(3-naphthalen-1-yl-ureido)-pyrazol-1-yl]-phenyl}-2-methyl-propionic acid as a racemate (15 mg, 92%). 1H NMR (DMSO): 11.81 (br s, 1H), 9.58 (s, 1H), 8.56 (s, 1H), 7.95 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.82 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.55 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.45-1.35 (m, 5H), 7.28 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.14 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 6.52 (s, 1H), 3.77 (m, 1H), 2.65 (m, 1H), 2.36 (m, 1H), 1.27 (s, 9H), 1.00 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 3H); MS (ESI) m/z: 471 (M+H+).
  • Example 202
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00383
  • To a solution of Example SS (100 mg, 0.3 mmol) and Et3N (60 mg, 0.6 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (10 mL) was added 1-chloro-4-isocyanato-benzene (77 mg, 0.45 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred at RT overnight, and then added to water (50 mL). The solution was extracted with CH2Cl2 (3×30 mL) and the combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried (Na2SO4), and filtered. After concentration under reduced pressure, the residue was purified by preparative-TLC to afford 3-(3-{3-t-butyl-5-[3-(4-chloro-phenyl)-ureido]-pyrazol-1-yl}-phenyl)-2-methyl-propionic acid ethyl ester as a racemate (51 mg, 35%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3): 8.20 (s, 1H), 7.39 (d, J=4.4 Hz, 2H), 7.37 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 7.21 (t, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.14-7.11 (m, 2H), 6.59 (s, 1H), 4.04-3.99 (m, 2H), 3.00 (m, 1H), 2.93 (m, 1H), 2.83 (m, 1H), 1.34 (s, 9H), 1.17 (d, J=6.4 Hz, 3H), 1.15 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H); MS (ESI) m/z: 483 (M+H+).
  • Example 203
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00384
  • A solution of Example 202 (15 mg, mmol) and 2N LiOH (3 mL) in MeOH (3 mL) was stirred at RT overnight. The reaction mixture was adjusted to pH=4, extracted with ethyl acetate (3×20 mL), the combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried (Na2SO4), and filtered. After the filtrate was concentrated, the residue was purified by preparative-TLC to afford 3-(3-{3-t-butyl-5-[3-(4-chloro-phenyl)-ureido]-pyrazol-1-yl}-phenyl)-2-methyl-propionic acid as a racemate (13 mg, 90%). 1H NMR (DMSO): 12.48 (br s, 1H), 9.35 (br s, 1H), 7.55 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 7.34-7.32 (m, 2H), 7.26 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.24 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 7.10 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 6.45 (s, 1H), 2.74 (m, 1H), 2.65 (m, 1H), 2.31 (m, 2H), 1.26 (s, 9H), 0.99 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 3H); MS (ESI) m/z: 455 (M+H+).
  • Example 204
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00385
  • To a stirred solution of Example 195 (500 mg, 0.83 mmol) in THF (10 mL) was added LiAlH4 powder (65 mg, 1.66 mmol) in portion at 0° C. under N2. The mixture was stirred for 2 h at RT, excess LiAlH4 was destroyed by a slow addition of ice, and the reaction mixture was acidified to pH=7 with dilute HCl. After the solvent was removed, the residue was extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried (Na2SO4), and filtered. After concentration in vacuo, the crude product was purified by preparative-TLC to afford 1-[2-(4-hydroxymethyl-phenyl)-5-isopropyl-2H-pyrazol-3-yl]-3-naphthalen-1-yl-urea (415 mg, 92%). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): 9.04 (s, 1H), 8.78 (s, 1H), 7.98 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.90 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 7.63 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.55-7.42 (m, 7H), 6.39 (s, 1H), 5.30 (t, J=5.6 Hz, 1H), 4.56 (d, J=5.6 Hz, 2H), 1.27 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 415 (M+H+).
  • Example 205
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00386
  • To a solution of Example 204 (200 mg) in CH2Cl2 (50 mL) was added MnO2 (450 mg) at RT. The suspension was stirred for 2 h then filtered through celite. The filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure to afford 150 mg of 1-[5-t-butyl-2-(4-formyl-phenyl)-2H-pyrazol-3-yl]-3-naphthalen-1-yl-urea, which was used without further purification.
  • Example 206
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00387
  • To a solution of (trifluoromethyl)trimethylsilane (77 mg) and TBAF (10 mg) in THF (10 mL) was added Example 205 (150 mg) in THF (10 mL) under N2 atmosphere in ice-bath. The resulting mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 1 h and then warned to RT for an additional hour. To the reaction was then added 0.5 mL of 3 N HCL, which was then stirred at RT overnight. After removal the solvent, the residue was dissolved in CH2Cl2 (50 mL). The organic layer was washed with saturated NaHCO3 and brine, dried (Na2SO4), and filtered. After the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure, the residue was purified by preparative-TLC to afford the final product 1-{5-t-Butyl-2-[4-(2,2,2-trifluoro-1-hydroxy-ethyl)-phenyl]-2H-pyrazol-3-yl}-3-naphthalen-1-yl-urea (110 mg, 63%). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): 9.07 (s, 1H), 8.89 (s, 1H), 8.03 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.90 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 7.67-7.62 (m, 5H), 7.55-7.51 (m, 2H), 7.44 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 6.95 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 6.42 (s, 1H), 5.27 (m, 1H), 1.28 (s, 9H). MS (ESI) m/z: 483 (M+H+).
  • Example 207
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00388
  • To a stirred solution of Example 57 (500 mg, 1.1 mmol) in THF (10 mL) was added LiAlH4 powder (65 mg, 1.66 mmol) in portion at 0° C. under N2. The mixture was stirred for 2 h at RT, excess LiAlH4 was destroyed by a slow addition of ice, and the reaction mixture was acidified to pH=7 with diluted HCl. After the solvent removal, the residue was extracted with ethyl acetate, and the combined organic extracts were washed with brine, d dried (Na2SO4), and filtered, After solvent removal, the crude product was purified by preparative TLC to 1-[5-t-butyl-2-(4-hydroxymethyl-phenyl)-2H-pyrazol-3-yl]-3-(4-chloro-phenyl)-urea (380 mg, 92%) as a white powder. 1H-NMR (CDCl3): 8.17 (br s, 1H), 7.22 (s, 4H), 7.17 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 7.09 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 7.04 (s, H), 6.38 (s, 1H), 4.51 (s, 1H), 1.22 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 399 (M+H+).
  • Example 208
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00389
  • To a solution of Example 207 (200 mg) in CH2Cl2 (50 mL) was added MnO2 (450 mg) at RT. The suspension was stirred for 2 h, then filtered through celite. The filtrate was concentrated to afford 160 mg of 1-[5-t-butyl-2-(4-formyl-phenyl)-2H-pyrazol-3-yl]-3-(4-chloro-phenyl)-urea, which was used without further purification.
  • Example 209
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00390
  • To a solution of (trifluoromethyl)trimethylsilane (86 mg) and TBAF (10 mg) in THF (10 mL) was added Example 208 (160 mg) in THF (20 mL) under N2 atmosphere in ice-bath. The resulting mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 1 h and then warmed to RT for an additional hour. To the reaction was added 0.5 mL of 3 N HCl, which was then stirred at RT overnight. After removal of the solvent, the residue was dissolved in CH2Cl2 (100 mL). The organic extracts were washed with saturated NaHCO3 and brine, dried (Na2SO4), and filtered. After the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure, the residue was purified by preparative-TLC to afford the final product 1-{5-t-butyl-2-[4-(2,2,2-trifluoro-1-hydroxy-ethyl)-phenyl]-2H-pyrazol-3-yl}-3-(4-chloro-phenyl)-urea (120 mg, 64%). 1H-NMR (DMSO-d6): 9.15 (s, 1H), 8.50 (s, 1H), 7.61 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.55 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.42 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 7.28 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 6.91 (d, J=5.6 Hz, 1H), 6.36 (s, 1H), 5.25 (m, 1H), 1.26 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 467 (M+H+).
  • Example 210
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00391
  • A solution of Example 151 (42 mg, 0.1 mmol) and 2N LiOH (3 mL) in MeOH (3 mL) was stirred at RT over night. The reaction mixture was neutralized to pH=4, and extracted with ethyl acetate (3×20 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried (Na2SO4), and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated to afford 3-(3-{3-t-butyl-5-[(pyridine-2-carbonyl)-amino]-pyrazol-1-yl}-phenyl)-propionic acid (30 mg, 76%). 8.45 (d, 4.0 Hz, 1H), 8.24 (d, 8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.92 (s, 1H), 7.88 (t, 7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.67 (d, 8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.36 (t, 5.6 Hz, 1H), 7.23 (t, 7.6 Hz, 1H), 6.96 (d, 6.8 Hz, 1H), 6.67 (s, 1H), 2.77 (t, 7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.22 (t, 7.6 Hz, 2H), 1.26 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z: 393 (M+H+).
  • Example 211
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00392
  • Example I is reacted with CDI and N-methyl piperazine using the procedure for Example 145 to afford the title compound.
  • Example 212
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00393
  • Example J is reacted with CDI and N-methyl piperazine using the procedure for Example 145 to afford the title compound.
  • Example 213
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00394
  • Example I is reacted with CDI and piperidine using the procedure for Example 145 to afford the title compound.
  • Example 214
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00395
  • Example I is reacted with CDI and morpholine using the procedure for Example 145 to afford the title compound.
  • Example 215
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00396
  • Example I is reacted with CDI and pyrrolidine using the procedure for Example 145 to afford the title compound.
  • Example 216
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00397
  • Example I is reacted with CDI and dimethylamine using the procedure for Example 145 to afford the title compound.
  • Example 217
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00398
  • Example J is reacted with CDI and piperidine using the procedure for Example 145 to afford the title compound.
  • Example 218
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00399
  • Example J is reacted with CDI and morpholine using the procedure for Example 145 to afford the title compound.
  • Example 219
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00400
  • Example J is reacted with CDI and pyrrolidine using the procedure for Example 145 to afford the title compound.
  • Example 220
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00401
  • Example J is reacted with CDI and dimethylamine using the procedure for Example 145 to afford the title compound.
  • Example 221
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00402
  • Isoquinoline-8-carboxylic acid and Example Z are reacted using the procedure for Example 149 to afford ethyl 3-(3-(3-t-butyl-5-(quinoline-8-carboxamido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)phenyl)propanoate.
  • Example 222
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00403
  • Example 222 is reacted using the procedure for Example 150 to afford 3-(3-(3-t-butyl-5-(quinoline-8-carboxamido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)phenyl)propanoic acid.
  • Example 223
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00404
  • Example E is reacted with (1-ethoxy-2-methylprop-1-enyloxy)trimethylsilane under literature conditions to afford ethyl 2-(3-(3-t-butyl-5-(3-(naphthalen-1-yl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)benzyl)-2-methylpropanoate.
  • Example 224
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00405
  • Example 224 is reacted using the procedure for Example 150 to afford 2-(3-(3-t-butyl-5-(3-(naphthalen-1-yl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)benzyl)-2-methylpropanoic acid
  • Example 225
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00406
  • Example G is reacted with (1-ethoxy-2-methylprop-1-enyloxy)trimethylsilane under literature conditions to afford ethyl 2-(3-(3-t-butyl-5-(3-(4-chlorophenyl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)benzyl)-2-methylpropanoate.
  • Example 226
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00407
  • Example 226 is reacted using the procedure for Example 150 to afford 2-(3-(3-t-butyl-5-(3-(4-chlorophenyl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)benzyl)-2-methylpropanoic acid.
  • Example TT
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00408
  • Example 204 is reacted using the procedure for Example E to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-(4-(chloromethyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea
  • Example UU
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00409
  • Example 122 is reacted using the procedure for Example G to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-(4-(chloromethyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea.
  • Example 227
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00410
  • Example TT is reacted with (1-ethoxy-2-methylprop-1-enyloxy)trimethylsilane under literature conditions to afford ethyl 2-(4-(3-t-butyl-5-(3-(naphthalen-1-yl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)benzyl)-2-methylpropanoate.
  • Example 228
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00411
  • Example 227 is reacted using the procedure for Example 150 to afford 2-(4-(3-t-butyl-5-(3-(naphthalen-1-yl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)benzyl)-2-methylpropanoic acid.
  • Example 229
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00412
  • Example UU is reacted with (1-ethoxy-2-methylprop-1-enyloxy)trimethylsilane under literature conditions to afford ethyl 2-(4-(3-t-butyl-5-(3-(4-chlorophenyl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)benzyl)-2-methylpropanoate
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00413
  • Example 230
  • Example 144 is reacted using the procedure for Example 150 to afford 2-(4-(3-t-butyl-5-(3-(4-chlorophenyl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)benzyl)-2-methylpropanoic acid.
  • Example VV
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00414
  • N-methyl piperazine and 1-bromo-2-chloroethane are reacted using the procedure for Example OO to afford 1-(2-chloroethyl)-4-methylpiperazine hydrochloride.
  • Example WW
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00415
  • Morpholine and 1-bromo-2-chloroethane are reacted using the procedure for Example OO to afford 4-(2-chloroethyl)morpholine
  • Example XX
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00416
  • Morpholine and 1-bromo-3-chloropropane are reacted using the procedure for Example OO to afford 4-(3-chloropropyl)morpholine.
  • Example YY
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00417
  • 4-methylpiperidin-4-ol (made via literature methods) and 1-bromo-2-chloroethane are reacted using the procedure for Example OO to afford 1-(2-chloroethyl)-4-methylpiperidin-4-ol.
  • Example ZZ
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00418
  • 4-methylpiperidin-4-ol (made via literature methods) and 1-bromo-3-chloropropane are reacted using the procedure for Example OO to afford 1-(3-chloropropyl)-4-methylpiperidin-4-ol.
  • Example AAA
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00419
  • A solution of 4,4-dioxothiomorpholine and 1-bromo-2-chloroethane are reacted using the procedure for Example OO to afford 4-(2-chloroethyl)-4,4-dioxo-4-thiomorpholine.
  • Example BBB
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00420
  • A solution of 4,4-dioxothiomorpholine and 1-bromo-3-chloropropane are reacted using the procedure for Example OO to afford 4-(3-chloropropyl)-4,4-dioxo-4-thiomorpholine.
  • Example CCC
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00421
  • A solution of 4-(trifluoromethyl)piperidin-4-ol and 1-bromo-2-chloroethane are reacted using the procedure for Example OO to afford 1-(2-chloroethyl)-4-(trifluoromethyl)piperidin-4-ol.
  • Example DDD
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00422
  • A solution of 4-(trifluoromethyl)piperidin-4-ol and 1-bromo-3-chloropropane are reacted using the procedure for Example OO to afford 1-(3-chloropropyl)-4-(trifluoromethyl)piperidin-4-ol.
  • Example 231
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00423
  • Example 41 and Example WW are reacted according to the procedure for Example 194 to afford 1-(1-(3-(2-morpholinoethoxy)phenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 232
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00424
  • Example 41 and Example XX are reacted according to the procedure for Example to afford 1-(1-(3-(3-morpholinopropoxy)phenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 233
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00425
  • Example 41 and Example VV are reacted according to the procedure for Example 194 to afford 1-(1-(3-(2-(4-methylpiperazin-1-yl)ethoxy)phenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 234
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00426
  • Example CC, 2-naphthoic acid chloride and Example DD were combined utilizing the same general approach for Example 162 to yield N-(3-tert-butyl-1-(3-([5-1,1,4-trioxo-1λ6-[1,2,5]thiadiazolidin-2-ylmethyl]phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-2-naphthamide. 1H-NMR (DMSO-d6): 10.50 (s, 1H), 8.45 (s, 1H), 8.15-8.05 (m, 3H), 7.90 (s, 1H), 7.60 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H), 7.45 (s, 1H), 7.38 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.27 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 6.44 (s, 1H), 4.05 (s, 2H), 1.31 (s, 9H). MS (ESI) m/z: 518 (M+H+).
  • Example 235
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00427
  • Example 41 and Example AAA are reacted according to the procedure for Example 194 to afford 1-(1-(3-(2-(4,4-dioxo-4-thio-morpholino)ethoxy)phenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 236
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00428
  • Example 41 and Example BBB are reacted according to the procedure for Example 194 to afford 1-(1-(3-(2-(4,4-dioxo-4-thio-morpholino)propoxy)phenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 237
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00429
  • Example 41 and Example YY are reacted according to the procedure for Example 194 to afford 1-(1-(3-(2-(4-methylpiperidin-4-ol)ethoxy)phenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 238
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00430
  • Example 41 and Example ZZ are reacted according to the procedure for Example 194 to afford 1-(1-(3-(3-(4-methylpiperidin-4-ol-)propoxy)phenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 239
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00431
  • Example 41 and Example CCC are reacted according to the procedure for Example 194 to afford 1-(1-(3-(2-(4-(trifluoromethyl)piperidin-4-ol)ethoxy)phenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 240
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00432
  • Example 41 and Example DDD are reacted according to the procedure for Example 194 to afford 1-(1-(3-(3-(4-(trifluoromethyl)piperidin-4-ol)propoxy)phenyl)-3-t-butyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 241
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00433
  • Example D is reacted using the procedure for Example 205 to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-(3-formylphenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 242
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00434
  • Example 242 is reacted using the procedure for Example 206 to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-(3-(2,2,2-trifluoro-1-hydroxyethyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00435
  • Example 243
  • Example F is reacted using the procedure for Example 208 to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-(3-formylphenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea.
  • Example 244
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00436
  • Example 244 is reacted using the procedure for Example 209 to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-(3-(2,2,2-trifluoro-1-hydroxyethyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea
  • Example 245
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00437
  • Example B is saponified using the procedure for Example 150. The resulting acid is reacted with trifluorotriazine in pyridine to afford the acid fluoride which is directly reacted with CsF and TBAF according to literature procedures (see J. Org. Chem. USSR (Engl. Transl.), 11, 1975, 315-317) to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-(3-(difluoro(hydroxy)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 246
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00438
  • Example C is reacted according to the procedure for Example 245 to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-(3-(difluoro(hydroxy)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea.
  • Example 247
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00439
  • Example 205 is reacted according to the procedure for Example 245 to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-(4-(difluoro(hydroxy)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 248
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00440
  • Example 57 is reacted according to the procedure for Example 245 to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-(4-(difluoro(hydroxy)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea.
  • Example EEE
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00441
  • Example EEE (tert-butyl 7-hydrazinyl-3,4-dihydroisoquinoline-2(1H)-carboxylate) was synthesized according to literature procedures.
  • Example 249
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00442
  • Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example 164, Example EEE (10 mmol) and Example PP (10.5 mmol) are combined to afford t-butyl t-(3-t-butyl-5-(3-(naphthalen-1-yl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)-3,4-dihydroisoquinoline-2(1H)-carboxylate.
  • Example 250
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00443
  • Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example 164, Example EEE (10 mmol) and Example QQ (10.5 mmol) are combined to afford t-butyl 7-(3-t-butyl-5-(3-(4-chlorophenyl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)-3,4-dihydroisoquinoline-2(1H)-carboxylate
  • Example 251
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00444
  • Example 249 is reacted with trifluoroacetic acid under standard conditions to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-(1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinolin-7-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00445
  • Example 252
  • Example 250 is reacted with trifluoroacetic acid under standard conditions to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-(1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinolin-7-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea.
  • Example 253
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00446
  • Example 251 is reacted with chlorosulfonyl isocyanate then dimethylamine according to the procedure for Example 7 to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-[[1-N-[[(1-dimethylaminolsulphonyl)amino]carbonyl]-1-(1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinolin-7-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 254
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00447
  • Example 252 is reacted with chlorosulfonyl isocyanate then dimethylamine according to the procedure for Example 7 to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-[[1-N-[[(1-dimethylaminolsulphonyl)amino]carbonyl]-1-(1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinolin-7-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea.
  • Example 255
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00448
  • Example 252, CDI, and methanesulfonamide are reacted under standard conditions to yield 1-(3-t-butyl-1-[[1-N-[[(methanesulphonyl)amino]carbonyl)-1-(1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-isoquinolin-7-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea.
  • Example 256
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00449
  • Example 251, CDI, and methanesulfonamide are reacted under standard conditions to yield 1-(3-t-butyl-1-[[1-N-[[(methanesulphonyl)amino]carbonyl]-1-(1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinolin-7-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(1-naphthyl)urea.
  • Example FFF
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00450
  • Commercially available 3-nitrobenzoic acid is reacted with methylamine and EDC under standard conditions to afford N-methyl-3-nitrobenzamide, which is reduced with LAH under standard conditions to afford N-methyl(3-nitrophenyl)methanamine, which is protected with benzylchloroformate under standard conditions to yield t-butyl 3-nitrobenzylmethylcarbamate. This material is nitrosated and reduced to yield t-butyl 3-hydrzazinobenzylmethylcarbamate.
  • Example 257
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00451
  • Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example 164, Example FFF (10 mmol) and Example PP (10.5 mmol) are combined to afford t-butyl 3-(3-t-butyl-5-(3-(naphthalen-1-yl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)benzylmethylcarbamate.
  • Example 258
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00452
  • Example 257 is deprotected with trifluoroacetic acid under standard conditions to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-(3-((methylamino)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 259
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00453
  • Example 258 is reacted with chlorosulfonyl isocyanate then piperidine according to the procedure for Example 7 to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-[[3-[[(1-piperidinylsulphonyl)amino]carbonyl]-((methylamino)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 260
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00454
  • Example 258 is reacted with chlorosulfonyl isocyanate then morpholine according to the procedure for Example 7 to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-[[3-[[(1-morpholinyl-sulphonyl)amino)carbonyl]-((methylamino)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 261
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00455
  • Example 258 is reacted with chlorosulfonyl isocyanate then pyrrolidine according to the procedure for Example 7 to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-[[3-[[(1-piperidinyl-sulphonyl)amino]carbonyl]-((methylamino)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 262
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00456
  • Example 258 is reacted with chlorosulfonyl isocyanate then dimethylamine according to the procedure for Example 7 to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-[[3-[[(1-dimethylamino-sulphonyl)amino]carbonyl]-((methylamino)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 263
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00457
  • Example 258 is reacted with chlorosulfonyl isocyanate then ammonia according to the procedure for Example 7 to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-[[3-[[(1-aminosulphonyl)amino]carbonyl]-((methylamino)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 264
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00458
  • Example 258 is reacted with chlorosulfonyl isocyanate then N-methyl piperazine according to the procedure for Example 7 to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-[[3-[[(1-(N-methylpiperazinyl)sulphonyl)amino]carbonyl]-((methylamino)methyl)phenyl) 1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 265
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00459
  • Example 258 is reacted with chlorosulfonyl isocyanate then-4,4-dioxo-4-thiomorpholine according to the procedure for Example 7 to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-[[3-[[(1-(4,4-dioxo-4-thiomorpholinyl)sulphonyl)amino]carbonyl]-((methylamino)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 266
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00460
  • Chlorosulfonyl isocyanate, piperidine, then Example 258 are reacted according to the procedure for Example 7 to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-[[3-[[(1-piperidinylcarbonyl)amino]sulphonyl]-((methylamino)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 267
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00461
  • Chlorosulfonyl isocyanate, morpholine and then Example 258 are reacted according to the procedure for Example 7 to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-[[3-[[(1-morpholinyl-sulphonyl]-((methylamino)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 268
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00462
  • Chlorosulfonyl isocyanate, pyrrolidine and then Example 258 are reacted according to the procedure for Example 7 to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-[[3-[[(1-piperidinyl-carbonyl)amino]sulphonyl]-((methylamino)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 269
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00463
  • Chlorosulfonyl isocyanate, dimethylamine, then Example 258 are reacted according to the procedure for Example 7 to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-[[3-[[(1-sulphonyl]-((methylamino)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 270
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00464
  • Chlorosulfonyl isocyanate, ammonia and then Example 258 are reacted according to the procedure for Example 7 to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-[[3-[[(1-aminocarbonyl)amino]sulphonyl]-((methylamino)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 271
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00465
  • Chlorosulfonyl isocyanate, N-methyl piperazine and then Example 258 are reacted according to the procedure for Example 7 to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-[[3-[[(1-(N-methylpiperazinyl)carbonyl)amino]sulphonyl]-((methylamino)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 272
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00466
  • Chlorosulfonyl isocyanate, 4,4-dioxo-4-thiomorpholine and then Example 258 are reacted according to the procedure for Example 7 to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-[[3-[[(1-(4,4-dioxo-4-thiomorpholinyl)carbonyl)amino]sulphonyl]-((methylamino)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example GGG
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00467
  • Commercially available 3-nitrobenzamide is reduced with LAH under standard conditions to afford (3-nitrophenyl)methanamine, which is reacted with 4-methoxybenzylisocyanate to afford 1-(3-nitrobenzyl)-3-(4-methoxybenzyl)urea. This material is subsequently reacted with oxalyl chloride to afford 1-(3-nitrobenzyl)-3-(4-methoxybenzyl)imidazolidine-2,4,5-trione whose nitro group is reduced and oxidized to afford 1-(3-hydrazinylbenzyl)-3-(4-methoxybenzyl)imidazolidine-2,4,5-trione. This material is deprotected with TFA under standard conditions to afford the title compound 1-(3-hydrazinylbenzyl)imidazolidine-2,4,5-trione.
  • Example 273
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00468
  • Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example 164, Example GGG (10 mmol) and Example PP (10.5 mmol) are combined to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-(3-((2,4,5-thioxoimidazolidin-1-yl)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea
  • Example 274
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00469
  • Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example 164, Example GGG (10 mmol) and Example QQ (10.5 mmol) are combined to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-(3-((2,4,5-thioxoimidazolidin-1-yl)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea.
  • Example HHH
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00470
  • Commercially available 3-nitrobenzamide is reduced with LAH under standard conditions to afford (3-nitrophenyl)methanamine, which is reacted with N-4-methoxybenzylsulfamic acid and EDC to afford 1-(4-methoxybenzyl)-3-benzylsulfonylurea. This material is reacted with oxalyl chloride to afford 1-(3-nitrobenzyl)-3-(4-methoxybenzyl)imidazolidine-2,2-dioxo-2-thio-4,5-trione whose nitro group is reduced and oxidized to afford 1-(3-hydrazinylbenzyl)-3-(4-methoxybenzyl)imidazolidine-2,2-dioxo-2-thio-4,5-trione. This material is deprotected with TFA under standard conditions to afford the title compound I-(3-hydrazinylbenzyl)imidazolidine-2,2-dioxo-2-thio-4,5-trione.
  • Example 275
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00471
  • Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example 164, Example HHH (10 mmol) and Example PP (10.5 mmol) are combined to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-(3-((2,2-dioxo-2-thio-4,5-dioxoimidazolidin-1-yl)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 276
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00472
  • Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example 164, Example HHH (10 mmol) and Example QQ (10.5 mmol) are combined to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-(3-((2,2-dioxo-2-thio-4,5-dioxoimidazolidin-1-yl)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea.
  • Example 277
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00473
  • Example CC, 4-methoxy-1-aminonaphthalene and Example E are reacted using the procedure for Example 162 to afford 1-(5-t-butyl-2-[(3-[1,1,4-trioxo-1λ6-[1,2,5]thiadiazolidin-2-ylmethyl]-phenyl}-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-3-(4-methoxynaphth-1-yl)-urea.
  • Example III
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00474
  • A solution of 1-(chloromethyl)-3-nitrobenzene and Example DD are combined using the procedure for Example 77 to yield 2-(4-methoxybenzyl)-5-(3-nitrophenylmethyl)-1,1-dioxo-1λ6-[1,2,5]thiadiazolidin-3-one. This material is reduced under standard condition to yield 2-(4-methoxybenzyl)-5-(3-aminophenylmethyl)-1,1-dioxo-1λ6-[1,2,5]thiadiazolidin-3-one, which was nitrosated and acidified to yield 5-(3-hydrazinophenylmethyl)-1,1-dioxo-1λ6-[1,2,5]thiadiazolidin-3-one.
  • Example JJJ
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00475
  • Intermediate HH (5 g, 0.0241 mol) is added to pyridine (5 mL) in CH2Cl2 (25 mL) and cooled in an ice bath. The suspension is stirred for 5 min and 2-naphthoic acid chloride is added dropwise over 5 min. The reaction mixture is stirred an additional 5 min at 0° C., and the reaction is warmed and stirred at RT for 1 h. The reaction is pour into ethyl acetate (100 mL) and water (100 ml). After shaking, the aqueous layer is removed, the organic layer washed with water, dried (MgSO4) and concentrated to afford (Z)-N-(1-ethoxy-4,4-dimethyl-3-oxopentylidene)-2-naphthamide.
  • Example KKK
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00476
  • Intermediate HH (5 g, 0.0241 mol) is added to pyridine (5 mL) in CH2Cl2 (25 mL) and cooled in an ice bath. The suspension is stirred for 5 min and 1-naphthoic acid chloride is added dropwise over 5 min. The reaction mixture is stirred an additional 5 min at 0° C., and the reaction is warmed and stirred at RT for 1 h. The reaction is pour into ethyl acetate (100 mL) and water (100 ml). After shaking, the aqueous layer is removed, the organic layer washed with water, dried (MgSO4) and concentrated to afford (Z)-N-(1-ethoxy-4,4-dimethyl-3-oxopentylidene)-1-naphthamide
  • Example LLL
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00477
  • Intermediate HH (5 g, 0.0241 mol) is added to pyridine (5 mL) in CH2Cl2 (25 mL) and cooled in an ice bath. The suspension is stirred for 5 min and isoquinoloic acid chloride is added dropwise over 5 min. The reaction mixture is stirred an additional 5 min at 0° C., and the reaction is warmed and stirred at RT for 1 h. The reaction is pour into ethyl acetate (100 mL) and water (100 ml). After shaking, the aqueous layer is removed, the organic layer washed with water, dried (MgSO4) and concentrated to afford (Z)-N-(1-ethoxy-4,4-dimethyl-3-oxopentylidene)isoquinoline-3-carboxamide.
  • Example 278
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00478
  • Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example 164, Example III (10 mmol) and Example II (10.5 mmol) are combined to afford 1-naphtyl 1-(3-t-butyl-1-(3-((2,4,5-thioxoimidazolidin-1-yl)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)carbamate.
  • Example 279
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00479
  • Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example 164, Example III (10 mmol) and Example JJJ (10.5 mmol) are combined to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-(3-((2,4,5-thioxoimidazolidin-1-yl)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-2-naphthamide.
  • Example 280
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00480
  • Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example 164 Example III (10 mmol) and Example KKK (10.5 mmol) are combined to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-(3-((2,4,5-thioxoimidazolidin-1-yl)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-1-naphthamide.
  • Example 281
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00481
  • Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example 149, Example III (10 mmol) and Example KKK (10.5 mmol) are combined to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-(3-((2,4,5-thioxoimidazolidin-1-yl)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)isoquinoline-3-carboxamide.
  • Example MMM
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00482
  • Commercially available 3-nitrobenzamide is reduced with LAH under standard conditions to afford (3-nitrophenyl)methanamine, which is reacted with succinic anhydride under standard conditions to afford 1-(3-nitrobenzyl)pyrrolidine-2,5-dione. This material is reduced at the nitro group and oxidized to afford 1-(3-hydrazinobenzyl)pyrrolidine-2,5-dione.
  • Example 282
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00483
  • Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example 164, Example MMM (10 mmol) and Example PP (10.5 mmol) are combined to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-(3-((2,5-dioxopyrrolidin-1-yl)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea.
  • Example 283
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00484
  • Utilizing the same synthetic procedure as for Example 164, Example MMM (10 mmol) and Example QQ (10.5 mmol) are combined to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-(3-((2,5-dioxopyrrolidin-1-yl)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea.
  • Example 284
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00485
  • Example C was reacted with LiOH utilizing the procedure for Example 146 to yield 3-(3-t-butyl-5-(3-(4-chlorophenyl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)benzoic acid in 90% overall yield. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): 9.00 (s, 1H), 8.83 (s, 1H), 8.25-7.42 (m, 11H), 6.42 (s, 1H), 1.26 (s, 9H); MS (ESI): Expected: 412.88 Found: 413.00.
  • Example 285
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00486
  • Example B was reacted with LiOH utilizing the procedure for Example 146 to yield 3-(3-t-butyl-5-(3-(naphthalen-1-yl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)benzoic acid in 90% overall yield. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 9.11 (s, 1H), 8.47 (s, 1H), 8.06 (m, 1H), 7.93 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.81 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.65 (dd, J=8.0, 7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.43 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 7.30 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 6.34 (s, 1H), 1.27 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) Expected: 428.49 Found: 429.2 (M+1).
  • Example NNN
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00487
  • To the solution of phenyl-urea (13.0 g, 95.48 mol) in THF (100 mL) was slowly added chlorocarbonyl sulfonylchloride (13 mL, 148.85 mmol) at RT. The reaction mixture was refluxed overnight, the volatiles removed in vacuo yielded 2-phenyl-1,2,4-thiadiazolidine-3,5-dione as a white solid (4.0 g, 20%). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 12.49 (s, 1H), 7.51 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 7.43 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 7.27 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 1H).
  • Example 286
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00488
  • Example E and Example NNN were reacted together utilizing the same general approach as for Example 160 to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-(3-((3,5-dioxo-2-phenyl-1,2,4-thiadiazolidin-4-yl)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(naphthalen-1-yl)urea. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 8.96 (s, 1H), 8.01-7.21 (m, 16H), 6.40 (s, 1H), 4.85 (s, 2H), 1.28 (s, 9H); MS (ESI): Expected: 590.21, Found 591.26 (M+1).
  • Example 287
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00489
  • Example CC, 1-naphthylisocyanate and Example DD were combined utilizing the same general approach for Example 162 to yield 1-(5-t-butyl-2-{3-[5-1,1,4-trioxo-1λ6-[1,2,5]thiadiazolidin-2-ylmethyl]-phenyl}-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-1-naphthylurea. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 9.0 (s, 1H), 8.81 (s, 1H), 7.99-7.42 (m, 11H), 6.41 (s, 1H), 4.33 (s, 2H), 1.27 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) Exact Mass: 532.19 Found:=533.24
  • Example 288
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00490
  • Example CC, p-chlorophenylisocyanate and Example DD were combined utilizing the same general approach for Example 162 to yield 1-(5-t-butyl-2-{3-[5-1,1,4-trioxo-1λ6-[1,2,5]thiadiazolidin-2-ylmethyl]-phenyl}-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-3-(4-chloro-phenyl)-urea. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 9.07 (s, 1H), 8.42 (s, 1H), 7.52-7.272 (m, 8H), 6.36 (s, 1H), 4.60 (s, 2H), 1.26 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) Exact Mass: 516.13 Found:=517.1
  • Example 289
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00491
  • Example G and Example NNN were reacted together utilizing the same general approach as for Example 160 to afford 1-(3-t-butyl-1-(3-((3,5-dioxo-2-phenyl-1,2,4-thiadiazolidin-4-yl)methyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 9.02 (s, 1H), 8.51 (s, 1H), 7.52-7.24 (m, 13H), 6.36 (s, 1H), 4.90 (s, 2H), 1.27 (s, 9H); MS (ESI): Expected: 574.16 Found: 575.26 (M+1)
  • Example 290
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00492
  • Example Z and 2,6-dichlorophenylisocyanate were reacted utilizing the same conditions as for Example 145 to yield ethyl 3-(3-(3-t-butyl-5-(3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)phenyl)propanoate. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 7.46-7.26 (m, 7H), 6.35 (s, 1H), 4.11 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 3.31 (t, J=5.2, Hz, 2H), 2.68 (t, J=5.6 Hz, 2H), 1.32 (s, 9H), 1.24 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H); MS (ESI): Expected: 502.15 Found:=503.1 (M+1).
  • Example 291
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00493
  • Example 290 was reacted utilizing the same condition as for Example 146 to yield 3-(3-(3-t-butyl-5-(3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)phenyl)propanoic acid in >90% yield. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 8.70 (s, 1H), 8.60 (s, 1H) 7.50-7.24 (m, 7H), 6.26 (s, 1H), 2.87 (t, J=5.2 Hz, 2H), 2.57 (t, J=5.6 Hz, 2H), 1.25 (s, 9H); MS (ESI): Expected: 474.12 Found: 475.18 (M+1).
  • Example OOO
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00494
  • A mixture of ethyl 3-(4-aminophenyl)acrylate (1.5 g) and 10% Pd on activated carbon (0.3 g) in ethanol (20 ml) was hydrogenated at 30 psi for 18 h and filtered over Celite. Removal of the volatiles in vacuo provided ethyl 3-(4-aminophenyl)propionate (1.5 g).
  • A solution of the crude material from the previous reaction (1.5 g, 8.4 mmol) was dissolved in 6 N HCl (9 ml), cooled to 0° C., and vigorously stirred. Sodium nitrite (0.58 g) in water (7 ml) was added. After 1 h, tin (II) chloride dihydrate (5 g) in 6 N HCl (10 ml) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 3 h. The pH was adjusted to pH 7 to yield ethyl 3-(4-(3-t-butyl-5-amino-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)phenyl)propanoate.
  • Example 292
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00495
  • Example OOO and 2,6-dichlorophenylisocyanate were reacted utilizing the same conditions as for Example 145 to yield ethyl 3-(4-(3-t-butyl-5-(3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)phenyl)propanoate. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 7.45-7.24 (m, 7H), 6.36 (s, 1H), 4.10 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 3.02 (t, J=5.2 Hz, 2H), 2.70 (t, J=5.6 Hz, 2H), 1.33 (s, 9H), 1.22 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H); MS (ESI): Expected: 502.15 Found:=503.1 (M+1).
  • Example 293
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00496
  • Example 292 was reacted utilizing the same condition as for Example 146 to yield 3-(3-(3-t-butyl-5-(3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)phenyl)propanoic acid in >90% yield. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 8.66 (s, 1H), 8.58 (s, 1H) 7.50-7.28 (m, 7H), 6.27 (s, 1H), 2.85 (t, J=5.2 Hz, 2H), 2.48 (t, J=5.6 Hz, 2H), 1.24 (s, 9H); MS (ESI): Expected: 474.12 Found: 475.18 (M+1).
  • Example 294
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00497
  • Example OOO and p-chlorophenylisocyanate were reacted utilizing the same conditions as for Example 145 to yield ethyl 3-(4-(3-tert-butyl-5-(3-(4-chlorophenyl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)phenyl)propanoate. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 7.34-7.19 (m, 9H), 6.36 (s, 1H), 4.10 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.92 (t, J=5.2 Hz, 2H), 2.58 (t, J=Hz, 2H), 1.32 (s, 9H), 1.25 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H); MS (ESI): Exact Mass: 468.19 Found: 469.21 (M+1).
  • Example 295
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00498
  • Example Z and p-chlorophenylisocyanate were reacted utilizing the same conditions as for Example 145 to yield ethyl 3-(3-(3-tert-butyl-5-(3-(4-chlorophenyl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)phenyl)propanoate. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 9.12 (s, 1H), 8.37 (s, 1H), 7.41-7.27 (m, 8H), 6.34 (s, 1H), 5.73 (s, 1H), 4.01 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.90 (t, J=5.2 Hz, 2H), 2.62 (t, J=5.6 Hz, 2H), 1.25 (s, 9H) 1.125 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H); MS (ESI): Exact Mass: 468.19 Found:=469.21 (M+1).
  • Example 296
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00499
  • Example OOO and 1-naphthylisocyanate were reacted utilizing the same conditions as for Example 145 to yield ethyl 3-(4-(3-tert-butyl-5-(3-(naphthalen-1-yl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)phenyl)propanoate. δ 7.88-9.95 (m, 13H), 6.27 (s, 1H), 4.04 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.75 (t, J=5.2 Hz, 2H), 2.42 (t, J=5.6 Hz, 2H), 1.27 (s, 9H), 1.20 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H); MS (ESI): Exact Mass: 484.25 Found:=485.26 (M+1).
  • Example 297
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00500
  • Example Z and 1-naphthylisocyanate were reacted utilizing the same conditions as for Example 145 to yield ethyl 3-(3-(3-tert-butyl-5-(3-(naphthalen-1-yl)ureido)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)phenyl)propanoate. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 9.01 (s, 1H), 8.80 (s, 1H), 8.0-7.27 (m, 1H), 6.41 (s, 1H), 4.01 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.95 (t, J=5.2 Hz, 2H), 2.72 (t, J=5.6 Hz, 2H), 1.27 (s, 9H), 1.15 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H); MS (ESI): Exact Mass: 484.25 Found:=485.26 (M+1).
  • Example 298
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00501
  • Example CC, 1′-(4-methoxynaphthyl)isocyanate and Example DD were combined utilizing the same general approach for Example 162 to yield 1-(5-t-butyl-2-{3-[5-1,1,4-trioxo-1λ6-[1,2,5]thiadiazolidin-2-ylmethyl]-phenyl}-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-1-(4-methoxynaphthyl)urea. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 8.69 (s, 1H), 8.61 (s, 1H), 8.15-6.90 (m, 10H), 6.36 (s, 1H), 4.37 (s, 2H), 3.93 (s, 3H), 1.22 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) Exact Mass: 562.20 Found:=563.2.
  • Example PPP
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00502
  • In a 250 mL Erlenmeyer flask with a magnetic stir bar, 3-phenoxyphenylamine (4.81 g, 0.026 mol) was added to 6 N HCl (40 mL) and cooled with an ice bath to 0° C. A solution of NaNO2 (2.11 g, 0.0306 mol, 1.18 eq.) in water (5 mL) was added drop wise. After 30 min, SnCl22H2O (52.0 g, 0.23 mol, 8.86 eq.) in 6 N HCl (100 mL) was added and the reaction mixture was allowed to stir for 3 h, and then subsequently transferred to a 500 mL round bottom flask. To this, 4,4-dimethyl-3-oxopentanenitrile (3.25 g, 0.026 mol) and EtOH (100 ml) were added and the mixture refluxed for 4 h, concentrated in vacuo and the residue extracted with EtOAc (2×100 mL) and purified by column chromatography using hexane/EtOAc/Et3N (8:2:0.2) to yield 3-tert-butyl-1-(3-phenoxyphenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-amine (1.40 g, 17%). mp: 108-110° C.; 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 7.3 (m, 10H), 5.7 (s, 1H), 4.9 (brs, 2H), 1.3 (s, 9H).
  • Example 299
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00503
  • In a dry vial with a magnetic stir bar, Example PPP (0.184 g; 0.60 mmol) was dissolved in 2 mL CH2Cl2 (anhydrous) followed by the addition of phenylisocyanate (0.0653 mL; 0.60 mmol; 1 eq.). The reaction was kept under Ar and stirred for 18 h. Evaporation of solvent gave a crystalline mass that was recrystallized from EtOAc/hexane and then filtered washing with hexane/EtOAc (4:1) to yield 1-[3-tert-butyl-1-(3-phenoxyphenyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl]-3-phenylurea (0.150 g, 50%). HPLC purity: 96%; 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 7.5 (m, 16H), 6.8 (s, 1H), 6.5 (s, 1H), 1.4 (s, 9H).
  • Example QQQ
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00504
  • To a stirred solution of Example L (1.2 g, 3.5 mmol) in THF (6 ml) was added borane-methylsulfide (9 mmol). The mixture was heated to reflux for 90 min and cooled to RT, and 6 N HCl was added and heated to reflux for 10 min. The mixture was basified by adding sodium hydroxide, followed by extraction with ethyl acetate. The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4) filtered and concentrated in vacuo to yield 3-tert-butyl-1-[3-(2-morpholinoethyl)phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5-amine (0.78 g), which was used without further purification.
  • Example 300
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00505
  • A mixture of Example QQQ (0.35 g, 1.07 mmol) and 1-naphthylisocyanate (0.18 g, 1.05 mmol) in dry CH2Cl2 (4 ml) was stirred at RT under N2 for 18 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the crude product was purified by column chromatography using 5% methanol in CH2Cl2 (with a small amount of TEA) as the eluent (0.18 g, off-white solid) to yield 1-{3-tert-butyl-1-[3-(2-morpholinoethyl)phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5-yl}-3-naphthalen-1-yl)urea. mp: 88-90° C.; 1H NMR (200 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 9.07 (s, 1H), 8.80 (s, 1H), 8.06-7.92 (m, 3H), 7.69-7.44 (m, 7H), 7.40-7.29 (m, 1H), 6.44 (s, 1H), 3.57-3.55 (m, 4H), 3.33-3.11 (m, 4H), 2.40-2.38 (m, 4H), 1.32 (s, 9H); MS
  • Example 301
  • Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00506
  • The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to Example 23 utilizing Example QQQ (0.35 g, 1.07 mmol) and 4-chlorophenylisocyanate (0.165 g, 1.05 mmol) to yield 1-{3-tert-butyl-1-[3-(2-morpholinoethyl)phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-5-yl}-3-(4-chlorophenyl)urea. mp: 82-84° C.; 1H NMR (200 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 9.18 (s, 1H, s), 8.40 (s, 1H), 7.53-7.26 (m, 8H), 6.37 (s, 1H), 3.62-3.54 (m, 4H), 2.82-2.78 (m, 4H), 2.41-2.39 (m, 4H), 1.30 (s, 9H); MS
  • All of the references above identified are incorporated by reference herein. In addition, two simultaneously applications are also incorporated by reference, namely Modulation of Protein Functionalities, Ser. No. 10/746,545, filed Dec. 24, 2003, and Anti-Cancer Medicaments, Ser. No. 10/746,607, filed Dec. 24, 2003.

Claims (14)

1-83. (canceled)
84. A compound having the formula
Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00507
wherein:
A is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, thienyl, furyl, pyrrolyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, imidazolyl, indolyl, indazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzotriazolyl, isoquinolyl, quinolyl, benzothiazolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothienyl, pyrazolylpyrimidinyl, imidazopyrimidinyl, purinyl, and
Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00508
where each W1 is individually selected from the group consisting of —CH— and —N—;
D is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyrazolyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, furyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, thienyl, pyridyl, and pyrimidyl;
E is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridinyl, and pyrimidinyl;
Y is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —S—, —NR6—, —NR6SO2—, —NR6CO—, alkynyls, alkenyls, alkylenes, —O(CH2)h—, and —NR6(CH2)h—, where h is individually selected from the group consisting of 1, 2, 3, or 4, and where for each of alkylenes, —O(CH2)h—, and —NR6(CH2)h—, one of the methylene groups present therein may be optionally double-bonded to a side-chain oxo group except that where —O(CH2)h— the introduction of the side-chain oxo group does not form an ester moiety;
t is 0 or 1;
Q is
Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00509
each R4 group is individually selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyls, aminoalkyls, alkoxyalkyls, aryls, aralkyls, heterocyclyls, and heterocyclylalkyls except when the R4 substituent places a heteroatom on an alpha-carbon directly attached to a ring nitrogen on Q;
when two R4 groups are bonded with the same atom, the two R4 groups optionally form an alicyclic or heterocyclic 4-7 membered ring;
each R6 is individually selected from the group consisting of —H and alkyls;
R7″ is selected from the group consisting of alkyls, aryls, heterocyclyls, and perfluoroalkyls;
and wherein A or Q is optionally substituted with one or more R7′ substituents selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyls, aryls, heterocyclyls, alkylaminos, arylaminos, cycloalkylaminos, heterocyclylaminos, hydroxys, alkoxys, aryloxys, alkylthios, arthylthios, cyanos, halogens, nitros, alkylsulfinyls, alkylsulfonyls, aminosulfonyls, and perfluoroalkyls.
85. The compound of claim 84, wherein A is phenyl substituted by one or more R7′ substituents, said R7′ substituents being halogens.
86. The compound of claim 84, wherein A is an R7′-substituted naphthyl.
87. The compound of claim 84, where R7″ is selected from the group consisting of aryls and heterocyclyls.
88. A method of modulating the activation state of a p38-alpha kinase comprising the step of contacting said kinase with a molecule having the formula
Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00510
wherein:
A is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, thienyl, furyl, pyrrolyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, imidazolyl, indolyl, indazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzotriazolyl, isoquinolyl, quinolyl, benzothiazolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothienyl, pyrazolylpyrimidinyl, imidazopyrimidinyl, purinyl, and
Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00511
where each W1 is individually selected from the group consisting of —CH— and —N—;
D is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyrazolyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, furyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, thienyl, pyridyl, and pyrimidyl;
E is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridinyl, and pyrimidinyl;
Y is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —S—, —NR6—, —NR6SO2—, —NR6CO—, alkynyls, alkenyls, alkylenes, —O(CH2)h—, and —NR6(CH2)h—, where h is individually selected from the group consisting of 1, 2, 3, or 4, and where for each of alkylenes, —O(CH2)h—, and —NR6(CH2)h—, one of the methylene groups present therein may be optionally double-bonded to a side-chain oxo group except that where —O(CH2)h— the introduction of the side-chain oxo group does not form an ester moiety;
t is 0 or 1;
Q is
Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00512
each R4 group is individually selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyls, aminoalkyls, alkoxyalkyls, aryls, aralkyls, heterocyclyls, and heterocyclylalkyls except when the R4 substituent places a heteroatom on an alpha-carbon directly attached to a ring nitrogen on Q;
when two R4 groups are bonded with the same atom, the two R4 groups optionally form an alicyclic or heterocyclic 4-7 membered ring;
each R6 is individually selected from the group consisting of —H and alkyls;
R7″ is selected from the group consisting of alkyls, aryls, heterocyclyls, and perfluoroalkyls;
and wherein A or Q is optionally substituted with one or more R7′ substituents selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyls, aryls, heterocyclyls, alkylaminos, arylaminos, cycloalkylaminos, heterocyclylaminos, hydroxys, alkoxys, aryloxys, alkylthios, arthylthios, cyanos, halogens, nitros, alkylsulfinyls, alkylsulfonyls, aminosulfonyls, and perfluoroalkyls.
89. The method of claim 88, wherein A is phenyl substituted by one or more R7′ substituents, said R7′ substituents being halogens.
90. The compound of claim 88, wherein A is an R7′-substituted naphthyl.
91. The compound of claim 88, where R7″ is selected from the group consisting of aryls and heterocyclyls.
92. An adduct comprising a molecule bound with a kinase, said molecule having the formula
Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00513
wherein:
A is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, thienyl, furyl, pyrrolyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, imidazolyl, indolyl, indazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzotriazolyl, isoquinolyl, quinolyl, benzothiazolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothienyl, pyrazolylpyrimidinyl, imidazopyrimidinyl, purinyl, and
Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00514
where each W1 is individually selected from the group consisting of —CH— and —N—;
D is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyrazolyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, furyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, thienyl, pyridyl, and pyrimidyl;
E is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridinyl, and pyrimidinyl;
Y is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —S—, —NR6—, —NR6(SO2—, —NR6CO—, alkynyls, alkenyls, alkylenes, —O(CH2)h—, and —NR6(CH2)h—, where h is individually selected from the group consisting of 1, 2, 3, or 4, and where for each of alkylenes, —O(CH2)h—, and —NR6(CH2)h—, one of the methylene groups present therein may be optionally double-bonded to a side-chain oxo group except that where —O(CH2)h— the introduction of the side-chain oxo group does not form an ester moiety;
t is 0 or 1;
Q is
Figure US20090105230A1-20090423-C00515
each R4 group is individually selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyls, aminoalkyls, alkoxyalkyls, aryls, aralkyls, heterocyclyls, and heterocyclylalkyls except when the R4 substituent places a heteroatom on an alpha-carbon directly attached to a ring nitrogen on Q;
when two R4 groups are bonded with the same atom, the two R4 groups optionally form an alicyclic or heterocyclic 4-7 membered ring;
each R6 is individually selected from the group consisting of —H and alkyls;
R7″ is selected from the group consisting of alkyls, aryls, heterocyclyls, and perfluoroalkyls;
and wherein A or Q is optionally substituted with one or more R7′ substituents selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyls, aryls, heterocyclyls, alkylaminos, arylaminos, cycloalkylaminos, heterocyclylaminos, hydroxys, alkoxys, aryloxys, alkylthios, arthylthios, cyanos, halogens, nitros, alkylsulfinyls, alkylsulfonyls, aminosulfonyls, and perfluoroalkyls.
93. The adduct of claim 92, wherein A is phenyl substituted by one or more R7′ substituents, said R7′ substituents being halogens.
94. The adduct of claim 92, wherein A is an R7′-substituted naphthyl.
95. The adduct of claim 92, where R7″ is selected from the group consisting of aryls and heterocyclyls.
96. A method of treating an individual suffering from a condition selected from the group consisting of human inflammation, rheumatoid arthritis, rheumatoid spondylitis, osteo-arthritis, asthma, gouty arthritis, sepsis, septic shock, endotoxic shock, Gram-negative sepsis, toxic shock syndrome, adult respiratory distress syndrome, stroke, reperfusion injury, neural trauma, neural ischemia, psoriasis, restenosis, chronic pulmonary inflammatory disease, bone resorptive diseases, graft-versus-host reaction, Crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis, inflammatory bowel disease, pyresis, and combinations thereof, said method comprising the step of administering to said individual a compound of the formula of claim 84.
US11/450,842 2002-12-31 2006-06-09 Anti-inflammatory medicaments Abandoned US20090105230A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US11/450,842 US20090105230A1 (en) 2002-12-31 2006-06-09 Anti-inflammatory medicaments

Applications Claiming Priority (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US43730402P 2002-12-31 2002-12-31
US43741502P 2002-12-31 2002-12-31
US43740302P 2002-12-31 2002-12-31
US43748702P 2002-12-31 2002-12-31
US46380403P 2003-04-18 2003-04-18
US10/746,460 US7144911B2 (en) 2002-12-31 2003-12-24 Anti-inflammatory medicaments
US10/886,329 US7202257B2 (en) 2003-12-24 2004-07-06 Anti-inflammatory medicaments
US11/450,842 US20090105230A1 (en) 2002-12-31 2006-06-09 Anti-inflammatory medicaments

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/886,329 Continuation US7202257B2 (en) 2002-12-31 2004-07-06 Anti-inflammatory medicaments

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20090105230A1 true US20090105230A1 (en) 2009-04-23

Family

ID=32719725

Family Applications (7)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/746,460 Expired - Fee Related US7144911B2 (en) 2002-12-31 2003-12-24 Anti-inflammatory medicaments
US11/337,245 Abandoned US20080187978A1 (en) 2002-12-31 2006-01-20 Anti-inflammatory medicaments
US11/450,842 Abandoned US20090105230A1 (en) 2002-12-31 2006-06-09 Anti-inflammatory medicaments
US11/450,852 Abandoned US20090069310A1 (en) 2002-12-31 2006-06-09 Anti-inflammatory medicaments
US11/450,850 Expired - Fee Related US7666895B2 (en) 2002-12-31 2006-06-09 Anti-inflammatory medicaments
US11/450,851 Abandoned US20090137021A1 (en) 2002-12-31 2006-06-09 Anti-inflammatory medicaments
US11/450,849 Expired - Fee Related US7737283B2 (en) 2002-12-31 2006-06-09 Anti-inflammatory medicaments

Family Applications Before (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/746,460 Expired - Fee Related US7144911B2 (en) 2002-12-31 2003-12-24 Anti-inflammatory medicaments
US11/337,245 Abandoned US20080187978A1 (en) 2002-12-31 2006-01-20 Anti-inflammatory medicaments

Family Applications After (4)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/450,852 Abandoned US20090069310A1 (en) 2002-12-31 2006-06-09 Anti-inflammatory medicaments
US11/450,850 Expired - Fee Related US7666895B2 (en) 2002-12-31 2006-06-09 Anti-inflammatory medicaments
US11/450,851 Abandoned US20090137021A1 (en) 2002-12-31 2006-06-09 Anti-inflammatory medicaments
US11/450,849 Expired - Fee Related US7737283B2 (en) 2002-12-31 2006-06-09 Anti-inflammatory medicaments

Country Status (9)

Country Link
US (7) US7144911B2 (en)
EP (2) EP1585734A4 (en)
JP (1) JP2006514691A (en)
AU (1) AU2003303641A1 (en)
BR (1) BR0317872A (en)
CA (1) CA2513627A1 (en)
MX (1) MXPA05007236A (en)
TW (1) TW200427672A (en)
WO (2) WO2004060306A2 (en)

Cited By (14)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20080261965A1 (en) * 2007-04-20 2008-10-23 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Kinase inhibitors useful for the treatment of myleoprolific diseases and other proliferative diseases
US7666895B2 (en) 2002-12-31 2010-02-23 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Anti-inflammatory medicaments
US20100120806A1 (en) * 2008-10-29 2010-05-13 Flynn Daniel L Cyclopropane amides and analogs exhibiting anti-cancer and anti-proliferative activities
US7790756B2 (en) 2006-10-11 2010-09-07 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Kinase inhibitors useful for the treatment of myleoproliferative diseases and other proliferative diseases
US20110189167A1 (en) * 2007-04-20 2011-08-04 Flynn Daniel L Methods and Compositions for the Treatment of Myeloproliferative Diseases and other Proliferative Diseases
US8163756B2 (en) 2004-12-23 2012-04-24 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Enzyme modulators and treatments
US8188113B2 (en) 2006-09-14 2012-05-29 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Dihydropyridopyrimidinyl, dihydronaphthyidinyl and related compounds useful as kinase inhibitors for the treatment of proliferative diseases
US8940756B2 (en) 2012-06-07 2015-01-27 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Dihydronaphthyridines and related compounds useful as kinase inhibitors for the treatment of proliferative diseases
US10966966B2 (en) 2019-08-12 2021-04-06 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Methods of treating gastrointestinal stromal tumors
US11185535B2 (en) 2019-12-30 2021-11-30 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Amorphous kinase inhibitor formulations and methods of use thereof
US11266635B2 (en) 2019-08-12 2022-03-08 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Methods of treating gastrointestinal stromal tumors
US11395818B2 (en) 2019-12-30 2022-07-26 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Compositions of 1-(4-bromo-5-(1-ethyl-7-(methylamino)-2-oxo-1,2-dihydro-1,6-naphthyridin-3-yl)-2-fluorophenyl)-3-phenylurea
US11518757B2 (en) 2017-12-18 2022-12-06 NodThera Limited Sulphonyl urea derivatives as NLRP3 inflammasome modulators
US11779572B1 (en) 2022-09-02 2023-10-10 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Methods of treating gastrointestinal stromal tumors

Families Citing this family (82)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7202257B2 (en) * 2003-12-24 2007-04-10 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Anti-inflammatory medicaments
US20080045531A1 (en) * 2002-12-31 2008-02-21 Flynn Daniel L Anti-inflammatory medicaments
WO2004071447A2 (en) * 2003-02-12 2004-08-26 Transtech Pharma Inc. Substituted azole derivatives as therapeutic agents
WO2004092140A1 (en) 2003-04-03 2004-10-28 Merck & Co., Inc. Biaryl substituted pyrazoles as sodium channel blockers
PT1635835E (en) * 2003-06-13 2010-03-17 Novartis Ag 2-aminopyrimidine derivatives as raf kinase inhibitors
BRPI0412259B1 (en) 2003-07-22 2019-08-20 Astex Therapeutics Limited 3,4-Disubstituted 1H-pyrazole compounds as cyclin-dependent kinase (CDK) modulators, their uses, process for their preparation and pharmaceutical composition
KR100854211B1 (en) * 2003-12-18 2008-08-26 동아제약주식회사 Novel oxazolidinone derivatives, a process for the preparation thereof and pharmaceutical composition comprising the same for antibiotics
US20050187277A1 (en) * 2004-02-12 2005-08-25 Mjalli Adnan M. Substituted azole derivatives, compositions, and methods of use
AU2005231507B2 (en) 2004-04-08 2012-03-01 Targegen, Inc. Benzotriazine inhibitors of kinases
KR20070057792A (en) 2004-07-16 2007-06-07 선에시스 파마슈티컬스 인코포레이티드 Thienopyrimidines useful as aurora kinase inhibitors
RU2468021C2 (en) 2004-08-25 2012-11-27 Таргеджен, Инк. Heterocyclic compounds and their application
WO2006045581A1 (en) * 2004-10-21 2006-05-04 Neuropharma, S.A. The use of 1, 2, 4-thiadiazolidine-3, 5-diones as ppar activators
EP1824843A2 (en) 2004-12-07 2007-08-29 Locus Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Inhibitors of protein kinases
US7741479B2 (en) 2004-12-07 2010-06-22 Locus Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Urea inhibitors of MAP kinases
EP1831228A1 (en) * 2004-12-20 2007-09-12 AstraZeneca AB Novel pyrazole derivatives and their use as modulators of nicotinic acetylcholine receptors
JP2008525502A (en) * 2004-12-23 2008-07-17 デシファラ ファーマスーティカルズ, エルエルシー Anti-inflammatory drug
US8404718B2 (en) 2005-01-21 2013-03-26 Astex Therapeutics Limited Combinations of pyrazole kinase inhibitors
AR054425A1 (en) 2005-01-21 2007-06-27 Astex Therapeutics Ltd PIPERIDIN ADDITION SALTS 4-IL-ACID AMID 4- (2,6-DICLORO-BENZOILAMINO) 1H-PIRAZOL-3-CARBOXILICO.
JP2008544743A (en) 2005-05-10 2008-12-11 インターミューン インコーポレイテッド Pyridone derivatives for modulating the stress-activated protein kinase system
WO2006137421A1 (en) * 2005-06-21 2006-12-28 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co., Ltd. Agent for topical administration
US8604042B2 (en) 2005-11-01 2013-12-10 Targegen, Inc. Bi-aryl meta-pyrimidine inhibitors of kinases
US7723369B2 (en) * 2006-01-30 2010-05-25 Transtech Pharma, Inc. Substituted imidazole derivatives, compositions, and methods of use as PTPase inhibitors
US8242271B2 (en) 2007-06-04 2012-08-14 Avila Therapeutics, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
JP5710251B2 (en) * 2007-06-07 2015-04-30 イントラ−セルラー・セラピーズ・インコーポレイテッドIntra−Cellular Therapies, Inc. Novel heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
WO2009042565A2 (en) * 2007-09-26 2009-04-02 The University Of North Carolina At Chapel Hill Inhibitors of eppin/semenogelin binding as male contraceptives
ES2399469T3 (en) 2007-10-09 2013-04-01 Merck Patent Gmbh Pyridine derivatives useful as glucokinase activators
MX2010006046A (en) * 2007-12-13 2010-06-23 Amgen Inc Gamma secretase modulators.
UA103319C2 (en) 2008-05-06 2013-10-10 Глаксосмитклайн Ллк Thiazole- and oxazole-benzene sulfonamide compounds
WO2009149188A1 (en) * 2008-06-03 2009-12-10 Intermune, Inc. Compounds and methods for treating inflammatory and fibrotic disorders
GB0818033D0 (en) 2008-10-02 2008-11-05 Respivert Ltd Novel compound
PE20110598A1 (en) 2008-10-02 2011-08-31 Respivert Ltd INHIBITORS OF MITOGEN P38 ACTIVATED PROTEIN KINASE ENZYMES
CN106220621B (en) 2008-10-10 2019-06-11 默沙东公司 Prepare the method for oxazolidinones and the composition containing oxazolidinones
BRPI0922962A2 (en) * 2008-12-11 2019-09-24 Respivert Ltd p38 map kinase inhibitors
KR101739923B1 (en) 2009-02-03 2017-05-25 머크 샤프 앤드 돔 코포레이션 Crystalline form of R)-3-(4-(2-(2-methyltetrazol-5-yl)pyridin-5-yl)-3-fluorophenyl)-5-hydroxymethyl oxazolidin-2-one dihydrogen phosphate
GB0905955D0 (en) 2009-04-06 2009-05-20 Respivert Ltd Novel compounds
US8580767B2 (en) * 2009-05-28 2013-11-12 Trius Therapeutics, Inc. Oxazolidinone containing dimer compounds, compositions and methods to make and use
US9296722B2 (en) 2010-05-27 2016-03-29 Ambit Biosciences Corporation Azolyl urea compounds and methods of use thereof
AU2010363329A1 (en) 2010-11-07 2013-05-09 Targegen, Inc. Compositions and methods for treating myelofibrosis
SG194902A1 (en) 2011-05-13 2013-12-30 Array Biopharma Inc Pyrrolidinyl urea and pyrrolidinyl thiourea compounds as trka kinase inhibitors
SG10201704095UA (en) 2012-04-24 2017-06-29 Vertex Pharma Dna-pk inhibitors
AR092742A1 (en) 2012-10-02 2015-04-29 Intermune Inc ANTIFIBROTIC PYRIDINONES
WO2014078408A1 (en) 2012-11-13 2014-05-22 Array Biopharma Inc. Bicyclic heteroaryl urea, thiourea, guanidine and cyanoguanidine compounds as trka kinase inhibitors
LT2922844T (en) 2012-11-13 2018-03-26 Array Biopharma, Inc. N-pyrrolidinyl, n`-pyrazolyl- urea, thiourea, guanidine and cyanoguanidine compounds as trka kinase inhibitors
UA117573C2 (en) 2012-11-13 2018-08-27 Ерей Біофарма Інк. Bicyclic urea, thiourea, guanidine and cyanoguanidine compounds useful for the treatment of pain
WO2014078417A1 (en) 2012-11-13 2014-05-22 Array Biopharma Inc. Pyrazolyl urea, thiourea, guanidine and cyanoguanidine compounds as trka kinase inhibitors
US9969694B2 (en) 2012-11-13 2018-05-15 Array Biopharma Inc. N-(arylalkyl)-N′-pyrazolyl-urea, thiourea, guanidine and cyanoguanidine compounds as TrkA kinase inhibitors
WO2014078322A1 (en) 2012-11-13 2014-05-22 Array Biopharma Inc. Thiazolyl and oxazolyl urea, thiourea, guanidine and cyanoguanidine compounds as trka kinase inhibitors
WO2014078325A1 (en) 2012-11-13 2014-05-22 Array Biopharma Inc. N-(monocyclic aryl),n'-pyrazolyl-urea, thiourea, guanidine and cyanoguanidine compounds as trka kinase inhibitors
WO2014078372A1 (en) 2012-11-13 2014-05-22 Array Biopharma Inc. Pyrrolidinyl urea, thiourea, guanidine and cyanoguanidine compounds as trka kinase inhibitors
US9828360B2 (en) 2012-11-13 2017-11-28 Array Biopharma Inc. Pyrrolidinyl urea, thiourea, guanidine and cyanoguanidine compounds as TrkA kinase inhibitors
WO2014078328A1 (en) 2012-11-13 2014-05-22 Array Biopharma Inc. N-bicyclic aryl,n'-pyrazolyl urea, thiourea, guanidine and cyanoguanidine compounds as trka kinase inhibitors
ES2900061T3 (en) 2013-03-12 2022-03-15 Vertex Pharma DNA-PK inhibitors
EP3424920B1 (en) 2013-10-17 2020-04-15 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Co-crystals of (s)-n-methyl-8-(1-((2'-methyl-[4,5'-bipyrimidin]-6-yl)amino)propan-2-yl)quinoline-4-carboxamide and deuterated derivatives thereof as dna-pk inhibitors
RU2692485C2 (en) 2014-04-02 2019-06-25 Интермьюн, Инк. Antifibrous pyridinones
MX2016014945A (en) 2014-05-15 2017-03-27 Array Biopharma Inc 1-((3s,4r)-4-(3-fluorophenyl)-1-(2-methoxyethyl)pyrrolidin-3-yl) -3-(4-methyl-3-(2-methylpyrimidin-5-yl)-1-phenyl-1h-pyrazol-5-yl )urea as a trka kinase inhibitor.
MX2017001553A (en) 2014-08-04 2017-07-24 Nuevolution As Optionally fused heterocyclyl-substituted derivatives of pyrimidine useful for the treatment of inflammatory, metabolic, oncologic and autoimmune diseases.
US11214565B2 (en) 2015-11-20 2022-01-04 Denali Therapeutics Inc. Compound, compositions, and methods
WO2017151409A1 (en) 2016-02-29 2017-09-08 University Of Florida Research Foundation, Incorporated Chemotherapeutic methods
US11028080B2 (en) 2016-03-11 2021-06-08 Denali Therapeutics Inc. Substituted pyrimidines as LRKK2 inhibitors
KR102553188B1 (en) 2016-06-16 2023-07-11 데날리 테라퓨틱스 인크. Pyrimidin-2-ylamino-1H-pyrazole as an LRRK2 inhibitor for use in the treatment of neurodegenerative disorders
CA3038657A1 (en) 2016-09-27 2018-04-05 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Method for treating cancer using a combination of dna-damaging agents and dna-pk inhibitors
CN108203450B (en) * 2016-12-19 2020-05-19 南京工业大学 Preparation method and application of amino phosphonate containing arylpyrazole compound
TWI767148B (en) 2018-10-10 2022-06-11 美商弗瑪治療公司 Inhibiting fatty acid synthase (fasn)
US11066404B2 (en) 2018-10-11 2021-07-20 Incyte Corporation Dihydropyrido[2,3-d]pyrimidinone compounds as CDK2 inhibitors
EP3886854A4 (en) 2018-11-30 2022-07-06 Nuvation Bio Inc. Pyrrole and pyrazole compounds and methods of use thereof
PT3902547T (en) 2018-12-28 2023-12-04 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals Llc Csf1r inhibitors for use in treating cancer
WO2020168197A1 (en) 2019-02-15 2020-08-20 Incyte Corporation Pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidinone compounds as cdk2 inhibitors
US11472791B2 (en) 2019-03-05 2022-10-18 Incyte Corporation Pyrazolyl pyrimidinylamine compounds as CDK2 inhibitors
WO2020205560A1 (en) 2019-03-29 2020-10-08 Incyte Corporation Sulfonylamide compounds as cdk2 inhibitors
US11447494B2 (en) 2019-05-01 2022-09-20 Incyte Corporation Tricyclic amine compounds as CDK2 inhibitors
US11440914B2 (en) 2019-05-01 2022-09-13 Incyte Corporation Tricyclic amine compounds as CDK2 inhibitors
CA3139708A1 (en) 2019-05-10 2020-11-19 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Phenylaminopyrimidine amide autophagy inhibitors and methods of use thereof
AU2020274011B2 (en) 2019-05-10 2024-02-15 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Heteroarylaminopyrimidine amide autophagy inhibitors and methods of use thereof
MA56191A (en) 2019-06-17 2022-04-20 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals Llc AMINOPYRIMIDINE AMIDE AUTOPHAGY INHIBITORS AND METHODS OF USE THEREOF
TW202115024A (en) 2019-08-14 2021-04-16 美商英塞特公司 Imidazolyl pyrimidinylamine compounds as cdk2 inhibitors
CN112574201A (en) * 2019-09-29 2021-03-30 四川科伦博泰生物医药股份有限公司 Arylamine compound, pharmaceutical composition containing arylamine compound, and preparation method and application of arylamine compound
JP2022551668A (en) 2019-10-11 2022-12-12 インサイト・コーポレイション Bicyclic amines as CDK2 inhibitors
WO2021124277A1 (en) 2019-12-20 2021-06-24 Nuevolution A/S Compounds active towards nuclear receptors
US20230399319A1 (en) * 2019-12-27 2023-12-14 Japan Tobacco Inc. Acylsulfamide Compound and Pharmaceutical Use Therefor
EP4126875A1 (en) 2020-03-31 2023-02-08 Nuevolution A/S Compounds active towards nuclear receptors
MX2022012260A (en) 2020-03-31 2022-11-30 Nuevolution As Compounds active towards nuclear receptors.
WO2022109001A1 (en) 2020-11-18 2022-05-27 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Gcn2 and perk kinase inhibitors and methods of use thereof

Citations (14)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3818024A (en) * 1972-02-16 1974-06-18 Velsicol Chemical Corp Benzothiazol substituted thiadiazolidines
US4093624A (en) * 1977-01-31 1978-06-06 Icn Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 1,2,4-Thiadiazolidine-3,5-dione
US4296237A (en) * 1979-09-11 1981-10-20 Merck & Co., Inc. 4-(Pyridyl, piperazinyl and thiazolyl substituted thiazolyl)-3-hydroxy-3-pyrroline-2,5-diones
US4432992A (en) * 1979-11-05 1984-02-21 Merck & Co., Inc. 4-[5(and 4)-Substituted-2-thienyl]-3-hydroxy-3-pyrroline-2,5-dione inhibitors of glycolic acid oxidase
US5103014A (en) * 1987-09-30 1992-04-07 American Home Products Corporation Certain 3,3'-[[[(2-phenyl-4-thiazolyl)methoxy]phenyl]methylene]dithiobis-propanoic acid derivatives
US5494925A (en) * 1994-12-02 1996-02-27 Sterling Winthrop Inc. 2-heterocyclyloxymethyl and 2-heterocyclylthiomethyl-1,2,5-thiadiazolidin-3-one 1,1-dioxides and compositions and method of use thereof
US6020357A (en) * 1996-12-23 2000-02-01 Dupont Pharmaceuticals Company Nitrogen containing heteroaromatics as factor Xa inhibitors
US6235786B1 (en) * 1997-08-06 2001-05-22 Abbott Laboratories Reverse hydroxamate inhibitors of matrix metalloproteinases
US20010008898A1 (en) * 2000-01-11 2001-07-19 Tsuyoshi Tomiyama Ether and amide compounds and preparation of thereof as antidiadetics.
US6294573B1 (en) * 1997-08-06 2001-09-25 Abbott Laboratories Reverse hydroxamate inhibitors of matrix metalloproteinases
US6319921B1 (en) * 1999-01-19 2001-11-20 Boerhinger Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Aromatic heterocyclic compound as antiinflammatory agents
US6525046B1 (en) * 2000-01-18 2003-02-25 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Aromatic heterocyclic compounds as antiinflammatory agents
US20030181411A1 (en) * 2002-03-20 2003-09-25 Elan Pharma International Ltd. Nanoparticulate compositions of mitogen-activated protein (MAP) kinase inhibitors
US20030186221A1 (en) * 2002-04-02 2003-10-02 Lockhart David J. Phage display affinity filter and forward screen

Family Cites Families (109)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US186221A (en) * 1877-01-16 Improvement in time-locks
US8898A (en) * 1852-04-20 Improved device for casting circle-plates, roses
US181411A (en) * 1876-08-22 Improvement in frame-squaring tools
DE1115350B (en) 1959-04-17 1961-10-19 Siemens Ag Circuit breaker, in particular line circuit breaker, with a drive mechanism consisting of a knee joint for the switching element
GB971307A (en) 1961-03-02 1964-09-30 Wellcome Found 5-anilinopyrimidines
DE1670701A1 (en) 1966-05-23 1970-11-12 Bayer Ag Process for the preparation of thiaimidazolidines
GB1127875A (en) 1967-03-23 1968-09-18 Parke Davis & Co 4-(5-nitro-2-furyl) thiazolyl hydantoins and hydrouracils
DE2156343A1 (en) 1970-11-13 1972-05-18 Ici Ltd Heat-stable aromatic polymers - containing sulphone -or oxo-groups
CH565887A5 (en) 1972-08-22 1975-08-29 Ciba Geigy Ag
US3939122A (en) * 1973-04-11 1976-02-17 Bayer Aktiengesellschaft Process for the preparation of compounds which contain hydantoin rings
FR2337554A1 (en) 1976-01-08 1977-08-05 Buzas Andre (1)-Substd. (2)-phenyl-(4)-butyl-pyrazolidine dione salts - analgesics and antiinflammatories with little ulcerogenic action
FR2396549A2 (en) 1977-07-06 1979-02-02 Buzas Andre Antiinflammatory pyrazolidine-di:one cpds. - with reduced ulcerogenic activity
GB2036480B (en) 1977-08-02 1982-06-03 Western Electric Co Reversible analogue to digital converter with high precision
US4256758A (en) 1979-06-11 1981-03-17 Merck & Co., Inc. 4-Substituted-3-hydroxy-3-pyrroline-2,5-dione inhibitors of glycolic acid oxidase
US4298743A (en) 1979-09-11 1981-11-03 Merck & Co., Inc. 4-(Substituted phenyl thiazolyl)-3-hydroxy-3-pyrroline-2,5-diones
US4366189A (en) 1979-12-21 1982-12-28 Ciba-Geigy Corporation 4-Heterocyclyl-4'-vinylstilbenes
JPS5915247A (en) 1982-07-16 1984-01-26 Mitsubishi Paper Mills Ltd Formation of image
JPS59177557A (en) 1983-03-28 1984-10-08 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Silver halide color photosensitive material
DE3406329A1 (en) 1984-02-22 1985-08-22 Merck Patent Gmbh, 6100 Darmstadt PYRIDONE
US4816454A (en) * 1984-09-21 1989-03-28 Cassella Aktiengesellschaft 4,5-dihydro-3(2H)-pyridazinones and their pharmacological use
AU606808B2 (en) 1988-06-29 1991-02-14 Otsuka Pharmaceutical Factory, Inc. Arylcarboxamide substituted by alkylphosphonates, process for preparing the same and a pharmaceutical composition containing the same
US5235786A (en) * 1989-11-06 1993-08-17 Mitsubishi Jukogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Hourglass worm gear
GB9012936D0 (en) 1990-06-11 1990-08-01 Fujisawa Pharmaceutical Co Thiophene derivatives,processes for preparation thereof and pharmaceutical composition comprising the same
US5254715A (en) 1990-11-07 1993-10-19 Warner-Lambert Company Aminosulfonyl carbamates
US5319099A (en) 1991-01-21 1994-06-07 Shionogi Seiyaku Kabushiki Kaisha 3-benzylidene-1-carbamoyl-2-pyrrolidone compounds useful as antiinflammatory agents
US5162360A (en) 1991-06-24 1992-11-10 Warner-Lambert Company 2-heteroatom containing urea and thiourea ACAT inhibitors
GB9816837D0 (en) 1998-08-04 1998-09-30 Zeneca Ltd Amide derivatives
TW225528B (en) * 1992-04-03 1994-06-21 Ciba Geigy Ag
CA2142900A1 (en) 1992-08-20 1994-03-03 Terry Russell Knapp Penile implant with triglyceride fill
DE4302702A1 (en) 1993-02-01 1994-08-04 Bayer Ag Arylaminosulfonylureas
CA2159344A1 (en) 1993-03-30 1994-10-13 Minoru Moriwaki Cell adhesion inhibitor and thienotriazolodiazepine compound
WO1994024095A1 (en) 1993-04-16 1994-10-27 Abbott Laboratories Immunosuppressive agents
CA2123728A1 (en) * 1993-05-21 1994-11-22 Noriyoshi Sueda Urea derivatives and their use as acat inhibitors
NO932986L (en) 1993-08-20 1995-02-21 Leiv Sandvik Headrest device
DE4337847A1 (en) 1993-11-05 1995-05-11 Bayer Ag Substituted phenylaminosulphonylureas
EP0733048A1 (en) 1993-12-07 1996-09-25 Smithkline Beecham Plc Heterocyclic biphenylylamides useful as 5ht1d antagonists
DE4343831A1 (en) 1993-12-22 1995-06-29 Magyar Tudomanyos Akademia New N-substd. N-acyloxy:methyl-N'-sulphonyl-urea cpds
FR2715155B1 (en) 1994-01-19 1996-07-26 Mayoly Spindler Monoamine oxidase B inhibitors and methods of preparing them.
DE4414840A1 (en) 1994-04-28 1995-11-02 Bayer Ag Substituted phenylaminosulfonylureas
WO1995034540A1 (en) 1994-06-15 1995-12-21 Otsuka Pharmaceutical Company, Limited Benzoheterocyclic derivatives useful as vasopressin or oxytocin modulators
ES2193205T3 (en) 1994-11-24 2003-11-01 Basilea Pharmaceutica Ag NEW BENCIL PYRIMIDINS.
HUT77650A (en) 1994-12-22 1998-07-28 Smithkline Beecham P.L.C. Spiro{(furo[2,3-f]indole-, furo[2,3-g]quinoline-and furo[2,3-h]benzazepine)-3,4'-piperidine} derivatives, process for their preparation and pharmaceutical compositions containing them
EP0739884B1 (en) 1995-04-24 2003-08-13 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Liquid crystal compound and liquid crystal composition containing the same
JPH09221476A (en) 1995-12-15 1997-08-26 Otsuka Pharmaceut Co Ltd Medicinal composition
GB9605945D0 (en) 1996-03-21 1996-05-22 Smithkline Beecham Plc Novel compounds
JPH107804A (en) 1996-06-25 1998-01-13 Japan Synthetic Rubber Co Ltd Thermosetting resin composition
US6174905B1 (en) * 1996-09-30 2001-01-16 Mitsui Chemicals, Inc. Cell differentiation inducer
GB9623833D0 (en) 1996-11-16 1997-01-08 Zeneca Ltd Chemical compound
EP0867435B1 (en) 1997-03-27 2003-01-08 Great Lakes Chemical (Europe) GmbH 2-(2'Hydroxyphenyl) benzotriazoles and their use as light stabilizers for organic polymers
PT1019040E (en) 1997-05-23 2005-01-31 Bayer Pharmaceuticals Corp INHIBITION OF THE ACTIVITY OF P38-KINASE BY MEANS OF ARILUREIAS
CN1271279A (en) 1997-09-23 2000-10-25 普尼卡有限公司 Amide derivatives for the treatment of diseases mediated by cytokines
IT1295933B1 (en) 1997-10-30 1999-05-28 Great Lakes Chemical Italia 2- (2'-HYDROXYPHENYL) BENZOTHRIAZOLS AND PROCEDURE FOR THEIR PREPARATION
AU1367599A (en) 1997-11-03 1999-05-24 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Aromatic heterocyclic compounds as anti-inflammatory agents
PT1043995E (en) 1997-12-22 2007-01-31 Bayer Pharmaceuticals Corp Inhibition of p38 kinase activity using aryl and heteroaryl substituted heterocyclic ureas
CN1117081C (en) 1997-12-22 2003-08-06 拜尔有限公司 Inhibition of raf kinase using aryl and hetroaryl substituted heterocyclic ureas
CZ299156B6 (en) 1997-12-22 2008-05-07 Bayer Corporation Substituted heterocyclic ureas, pharmaceutical compositions in which they are comprised and their use
ATE529109T1 (en) 1997-12-22 2011-11-15 Bayer Healthcare Llc INHIBITION OF P38 KINASE ACTIVITY BY SUBSTITUTED HETEROCYCLIC UREAS
US6887893B1 (en) 1997-12-24 2005-05-03 Sankyo Company, Limited Methods and compositions for treatment and prevention of tumors, tumor-related disorders and cachexia
JPH11209350A (en) 1998-01-26 1999-08-03 Eisai Co Ltd Nitrogen-containing heterocyclic derivative and medicine containing the same
ES2189079T3 (en) 1998-04-24 2003-07-01 Leuven K U Res & Dev IMMUNOSUPPRESSING EFFECTS OF XANTINA DERIVATIVES 8-SUBSTITUTED.
NZ507144A (en) 1998-05-15 2002-10-25 Astrazeneca Ab Benzamide derivatives useful for the treatment of diseases mediated by cytokines
CA2336807C (en) 1998-07-08 2010-04-13 Aventis Pharma Deutschland Gmbh Sulfur substituted sulfonylaminocarboxylic acid n-arylamides, their preparation, their use and pharmaceutical preparations comprising them
US6197599B1 (en) 1998-07-30 2001-03-06 Guorong Chin Method to detect proteins
WO2000006550A1 (en) 1998-07-31 2000-02-10 Nippon Soda Co., Ltd. Phenylazole compounds, process for producing the same and drugs for hyperlipemia
JP3602343B2 (en) * 1998-09-02 2004-12-15 アルプス電気株式会社 Display device
PT1115707E (en) 1998-09-25 2004-04-30 Astrazeneca Ab BENZAMIDE DERIVATIVES AND ITS USE AS CYTOKINE INHIBITORS
ATE284387T1 (en) 1998-10-08 2004-12-15 Smithkline Beecham Plc 3-(3-CHLORO-4-HYDROXYPHENYLAMINO)-4-(2-NITROPHENYL)-1H-PYRROL-2,5-DIONE AS A GLYCOGEN SYNTHASE KINASE-3 INHIBITOR (GSK-3)
ATE556713T1 (en) 1999-01-13 2012-05-15 Bayer Healthcare Llc OMEGA-CARBOXYARYL SUBSTITUTED DIPHENYL UREAS AS P38 KINASE INHIBITORS
US6358945B1 (en) * 1999-03-12 2002-03-19 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds useful as anti-inflammatory agents
JP2000275886A (en) 1999-03-23 2000-10-06 Konica Corp Electrophotographic photoreceptor and process cartridge and image forming device using the same
US6548529B1 (en) 1999-04-05 2003-04-15 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Heterocyclic containing biphenyl aP2 inhibitors and method
US6410254B1 (en) 1999-05-18 2002-06-25 Cytokinetics Compositions and assays utilizing ADP or phosphate for detecting protein modulators
JP3972163B2 (en) 1999-06-18 2007-09-05 株式会社大塚製薬工場 Phosphonic acid diester derivatives
KR20020022787A (en) * 1999-07-28 2002-03-27 로렌스 티. 마이젠헬더 Oxazolidinones and Their Use as Antiinfectives
DE60039616D1 (en) 1999-08-13 2008-09-04 Vertex Pharma INHIBITORS OF THE C-JUN N-TERMINAL KINASE (JNK) AND OTHER PROTEIN KINASES
AR035016A1 (en) 1999-08-25 2004-04-14 Takeda Chemical Industries Ltd COMPOSITION OF AZOL PROMOTER OF PRODUCTION / SECRETION OF NEUROTROFINE, COMPOSITE PRODROGA OF THE SAME, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION THAT INCLUDES IT AND USE OF THE SAME TO PREPARE THIS LAST.
GB0008264D0 (en) 2000-04-04 2000-05-24 Smithkline Beecham Plc Novel method and compounds
US6500628B1 (en) 2000-05-25 2002-12-31 Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Nucleic acid molecules encoding human kinase and phosphatase homologues and uses therefor
BR0111383A (en) 2000-06-14 2003-05-13 Warner Lambert Co 1,2,4-tri-substituted benzenes as 15-lipoxygenase inhibitors
US6787552B2 (en) 2000-08-11 2004-09-07 Nippon Chemiphar Co., Ltd. PPAR delta activators
US6645990B2 (en) * 2000-08-15 2003-11-11 Amgen Inc. Thiazolyl urea compounds and methods of uses
US20020173507A1 (en) * 2000-08-15 2002-11-21 Vincent Santora Urea compounds and methods of uses
HUP0301249A2 (en) 2000-10-05 2004-01-28 Daiso Co., Ltd. Benzamide compounds as apo b secretion inhibitors pharmaceutical compositions containing them and their use
JP2004530648A (en) 2000-10-19 2004-10-07 スミスクライン・ビーチャム・コーポレイション Use of p38 inhibitors for the treatment of inflammation-promoted cough
KR100885129B1 (en) 2000-10-27 2009-02-23 노파르티스 아게 Treatment of gastrointestinal stromal tumors
EP1340749A4 (en) 2000-11-17 2007-09-05 Takeda Pharmaceutical Isoxazole derivatives
JP2002226464A (en) 2001-01-30 2002-08-14 Sumitomo Pharmaceut Co Ltd Triaryl analogue and its use
JP2004518739A (en) * 2001-02-15 2004-06-24 ベーリンガー インゲルハイム ファーマシューティカルズ インコーポレイテッド Method for synthesizing heteroaryl-substituted urea compounds useful as anti-inflammatory agents
ES2360205T3 (en) 2001-03-02 2011-06-01 Agennix Ag THREE HYBRID TEST SYSTEM.
US7217533B2 (en) 2001-06-21 2007-05-15 Baylor College Of Medicine P38 MAPK pathway predicts endocrine-resistant growth of human breast cancer and provides a novel diagnostic and treatment target
EP1281399A3 (en) 2001-08-01 2004-02-11 Warner-Lambert Company Dual inhibitors of wax ester and cholesteryl ester synthesis for inhibiting sebum production
CA2458029A1 (en) * 2001-09-13 2003-03-20 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods of treating cytokine mediated diseases
CN1596240A (en) 2001-12-19 2005-03-16 阿特罗吉尼克斯公司 Chalcone derivatives and their use to treat diseases
WO2003059373A2 (en) 2002-01-16 2003-07-24 Ramot At Tel Aviv University Ltd. Compositions and their use for enhancing and inhibiting fertilization
ES2292992T3 (en) 2002-02-28 2008-03-16 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag DERIVATIVES OF TIAZOL AS ANTAGONISTS OF THE NPY RECEIVER.
US20030225089A1 (en) * 2002-04-10 2003-12-04 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharma Gmbh & Co. Kg Pharmaceutical compositions based on anticholinergics and p38 kinase inhibitors
AU2003240026A1 (en) * 2002-06-15 2003-12-31 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method of driving a shift register, a shift register, a liquid crystal display device having the shift register
US20040138216A1 (en) 2002-12-23 2004-07-15 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharma Gmbh & Co. Kg Process for the preparation of an essentially pure polymorph of an n-pyrazolyl-n'-naphthyl-urea
US7144911B2 (en) 2002-12-31 2006-12-05 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals Llc Anti-inflammatory medicaments
US20040171075A1 (en) 2002-12-31 2004-09-02 Flynn Daniel L Modulation of protein functionalities
US20080045531A1 (en) 2002-12-31 2008-02-21 Flynn Daniel L Anti-inflammatory medicaments
US7202257B2 (en) 2003-12-24 2007-04-10 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Anti-inflammatory medicaments
KR100705617B1 (en) * 2003-03-31 2007-04-11 비오이 하이디스 테크놀로지 주식회사 Liquid crystal driving device
WO2004113352A1 (en) 2003-06-19 2004-12-29 Amedis Pharmaceuticals Ltd. Silylated heterocyclylurea derivatives as cytokine-inhibitors
US20080220497A1 (en) 2003-12-24 2008-09-11 Flynn Daniel L Modulation of protein functionalities
US20070191336A1 (en) 2003-12-24 2007-08-16 Flynn Daniel L Anti-inflammatory medicaments
CA2592118C (en) 2004-12-23 2015-11-17 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Urea derivatives as enzyme modulators
US20080248548A1 (en) 2007-04-09 2008-10-09 Flynn Daniel L Modulation of protein functionalities
US20080248487A1 (en) 2007-04-09 2008-10-09 Flynn Daniel L Modulation of protein functionalities

Patent Citations (14)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3818024A (en) * 1972-02-16 1974-06-18 Velsicol Chemical Corp Benzothiazol substituted thiadiazolidines
US4093624A (en) * 1977-01-31 1978-06-06 Icn Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 1,2,4-Thiadiazolidine-3,5-dione
US4296237A (en) * 1979-09-11 1981-10-20 Merck & Co., Inc. 4-(Pyridyl, piperazinyl and thiazolyl substituted thiazolyl)-3-hydroxy-3-pyrroline-2,5-diones
US4432992A (en) * 1979-11-05 1984-02-21 Merck & Co., Inc. 4-[5(and 4)-Substituted-2-thienyl]-3-hydroxy-3-pyrroline-2,5-dione inhibitors of glycolic acid oxidase
US5103014A (en) * 1987-09-30 1992-04-07 American Home Products Corporation Certain 3,3'-[[[(2-phenyl-4-thiazolyl)methoxy]phenyl]methylene]dithiobis-propanoic acid derivatives
US5494925A (en) * 1994-12-02 1996-02-27 Sterling Winthrop Inc. 2-heterocyclyloxymethyl and 2-heterocyclylthiomethyl-1,2,5-thiadiazolidin-3-one 1,1-dioxides and compositions and method of use thereof
US6020357A (en) * 1996-12-23 2000-02-01 Dupont Pharmaceuticals Company Nitrogen containing heteroaromatics as factor Xa inhibitors
US6235786B1 (en) * 1997-08-06 2001-05-22 Abbott Laboratories Reverse hydroxamate inhibitors of matrix metalloproteinases
US6294573B1 (en) * 1997-08-06 2001-09-25 Abbott Laboratories Reverse hydroxamate inhibitors of matrix metalloproteinases
US6319921B1 (en) * 1999-01-19 2001-11-20 Boerhinger Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Aromatic heterocyclic compound as antiinflammatory agents
US20010008898A1 (en) * 2000-01-11 2001-07-19 Tsuyoshi Tomiyama Ether and amide compounds and preparation of thereof as antidiadetics.
US6525046B1 (en) * 2000-01-18 2003-02-25 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Aromatic heterocyclic compounds as antiinflammatory agents
US20030181411A1 (en) * 2002-03-20 2003-09-25 Elan Pharma International Ltd. Nanoparticulate compositions of mitogen-activated protein (MAP) kinase inhibitors
US20030186221A1 (en) * 2002-04-02 2003-10-02 Lockhart David J. Phage display affinity filter and forward screen

Cited By (37)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7666895B2 (en) 2002-12-31 2010-02-23 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Anti-inflammatory medicaments
US7737283B2 (en) 2002-12-31 2010-06-15 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Anti-inflammatory medicaments
US8163756B2 (en) 2004-12-23 2012-04-24 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Enzyme modulators and treatments
US8188113B2 (en) 2006-09-14 2012-05-29 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Dihydropyridopyrimidinyl, dihydronaphthyidinyl and related compounds useful as kinase inhibitors for the treatment of proliferative diseases
US7790756B2 (en) 2006-10-11 2010-09-07 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Kinase inhibitors useful for the treatment of myleoproliferative diseases and other proliferative diseases
US20110189167A1 (en) * 2007-04-20 2011-08-04 Flynn Daniel L Methods and Compositions for the Treatment of Myeloproliferative Diseases and other Proliferative Diseases
US20080261965A1 (en) * 2007-04-20 2008-10-23 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Kinase inhibitors useful for the treatment of myleoprolific diseases and other proliferative diseases
US8143293B2 (en) 2007-04-20 2012-03-27 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Kinase inhibitors useful for the treatment of myleoprolific diseases and other proliferative diseases
US20080269267A1 (en) * 2007-04-20 2008-10-30 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Kinase inhibitors useful for the treatment of myleoprolific diseases and other proliferative diseases
US20100120806A1 (en) * 2008-10-29 2010-05-13 Flynn Daniel L Cyclopropane amides and analogs exhibiting anti-cancer and anti-proliferative activities
US8278331B2 (en) 2008-10-29 2012-10-02 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc N-acyl ureas exhibiting anti-cancer and anti-proliferative activities
US8940756B2 (en) 2012-06-07 2015-01-27 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Dihydronaphthyridines and related compounds useful as kinase inhibitors for the treatment of proliferative diseases
USRE48731E1 (en) 2012-06-07 2021-09-14 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Dihydronaphthyridines and related compounds useful as kinase inhibitors for the treatment of proliferative diseases
US11518757B2 (en) 2017-12-18 2022-12-06 NodThera Limited Sulphonyl urea derivatives as NLRP3 inflammasome modulators
US11426390B2 (en) 2019-08-12 2022-08-30 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Methods of treating gastrointestinal stromal tumors
US11576904B2 (en) 2019-08-12 2023-02-14 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Methods of treating gastrointestinal stromal tumors
US11344536B1 (en) 2019-08-12 2022-05-31 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Methods of treating gastrointestinal stromal tumors
US11813251B2 (en) 2019-08-12 2023-11-14 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Methods of treating gastrointestinal stromal tumors
US11266635B2 (en) 2019-08-12 2022-03-08 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Methods of treating gastrointestinal stromal tumors
US11433056B1 (en) 2019-08-12 2022-09-06 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Methods of treating gastrointestinal stromal tumors
US10966966B2 (en) 2019-08-12 2021-04-06 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Methods of treating gastrointestinal stromal tumors
US11529336B2 (en) 2019-08-12 2022-12-20 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Methods of treating gastrointestinal stromal tumors
US11534432B2 (en) 2019-08-12 2022-12-27 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Methods of treating gastrointestinal stromal tumors
US11612591B2 (en) 2019-12-30 2023-03-28 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Compositions of 1-(4-bromo-5-(1-ethyl-7-(methylamino)-2-oxo-1,2-dihydro-1,6-naphthyridin-3-yl)-2-fluorophenyl)-3-phenylurea
US11844788B1 (en) 2019-12-30 2023-12-19 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Compositions of 1-(4-bromo-5-(1-ethyl-7-(methylamino)-2-oxo-1,2-dihydro-1,6-naphthyridin-3-yl)-2-fluoropheyl)-3-phenylurea
US11185535B2 (en) 2019-12-30 2021-11-30 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Amorphous kinase inhibitor formulations and methods of use thereof
US11918564B1 (en) 2019-12-30 2024-03-05 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Compositions of 1-(4-bromo-5-(1-ethyl-7-(methylamino)-2-oxo-1,2-dihydro-1,6-naphthyridin-3-yl)-2-fluoropheyl)-3-phenylurea
US11793795B2 (en) 2019-12-30 2023-10-24 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Compositions of 1-(4-bromo-5-(1-ethyl-7-(methylamino)-2-oxo-1,2-dihydro-1,6-naphthyridin-3-yl)-2-fluorophenyl)-3-phenylurea
US11801237B2 (en) 2019-12-30 2023-10-31 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Amorphous kinase inhibitor formulations and methods of use thereof
US11395818B2 (en) 2019-12-30 2022-07-26 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Compositions of 1-(4-bromo-5-(1-ethyl-7-(methylamino)-2-oxo-1,2-dihydro-1,6-naphthyridin-3-yl)-2-fluorophenyl)-3-phenylurea
US11576903B2 (en) 2019-12-30 2023-02-14 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Amorphous kinase inhibitor formulations and methods of use thereof
US11850240B1 (en) 2019-12-30 2023-12-26 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Compositions of 1-(4-bromo-5-(1-ethyl-7-(methylamino)-2-oxo-1,2-dihydro-1,6-naphthyridin-3-yl)-2-fluoropheyl)-3-phenylurea
US11850241B1 (en) 2019-12-30 2023-12-26 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Compositions of 1-(4-bromo-5-(1-ethyl-7-(methylamino)-2-oxo-1,2-dihydro-1,6-naphthyridin-3-yl)-2-fluoropheyl)-3-phenylurea
US11896585B2 (en) 2019-12-30 2024-02-13 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Compositions of 1-(4-bromo-5-(1-ethyl-7-(methylamino)-2-oxo-1,2-dihydro-1,6-naphthyridin-3-yl)-2-fluorophenyl)-3-phenylurea
US11903933B2 (en) 2019-12-30 2024-02-20 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Compositions of 1-(4-bromo-5-(1-ethyl-7-(methylamino)-2-oxo-1,2-dihydro-1,6-naphthyridin-3-yl)-2-fluoropheyl)-3-phenylurea
US11911370B1 (en) 2019-12-30 2024-02-27 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Compositions of 1-(4-bromo-5-(1-ethyl-7-(methylamino)-2-oxo-1,2-dihydro-1,6-naphthyridin-3-yl)-2-fluoropheyl)-3-phenylurea
US11779572B1 (en) 2022-09-02 2023-10-10 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Methods of treating gastrointestinal stromal tumors

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US7666895B2 (en) 2010-02-23
US20080299639A1 (en) 2008-12-04
US20090137021A1 (en) 2009-05-28
JP2006514691A (en) 2006-05-11
WO2004060305A3 (en) 2005-02-10
EP1585734A2 (en) 2005-10-19
US20080187978A1 (en) 2008-08-07
US20040180906A1 (en) 2004-09-16
US7737283B2 (en) 2010-06-15
BR0317872A (en) 2005-12-06
MXPA05007236A (en) 2006-04-27
US20090075986A1 (en) 2009-03-19
WO2004060306A3 (en) 2005-07-28
US7144911B2 (en) 2006-12-05
EP1590344A2 (en) 2005-11-02
TW200427672A (en) 2004-12-16
US20090069310A1 (en) 2009-03-12
EP1585734A4 (en) 2007-09-19
AU2003303641A1 (en) 2004-07-29
WO2004060306A2 (en) 2004-07-22
WO2004060305A2 (en) 2004-07-22
EP1590344A4 (en) 2007-08-29
CA2513627A1 (en) 2004-07-22

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7531566B2 (en) Anti-inflammatory medicaments
US7737283B2 (en) Anti-inflammatory medicaments
US20070191336A1 (en) Anti-inflammatory medicaments
US20090312349A1 (en) Anti-inflammatory medicaments
US20080045706A1 (en) Anti-inflammatory medicaments
US7279576B2 (en) Anti-cancer medicaments
ZA200505268B (en) Anti-inflammatory medicaments
CA2511840A1 (en) Anti-cancer medicaments

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION